initial commit of ebook 38721HEADmain

16 files changed, 10767 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/38721-8.txt b/38721-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a6b36e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3134 @@
+Project Gutenberg's The Roman Empire in the Light of Prophecy, by W. E. Vine
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Roman Empire in the Light of Prophecy
+       The Rise, Progress, and End of the Fourth World-empire
+
+Author: W. E. Vine
+
+Release Date: January 31, 2012 [EBook #38721]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROMAN EMPIRE IN LIGHT OF PROPHECY ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+Transcriber's note:
+
+      Text enclosed by underscores is in italics (_italics_).
+
+      Text enclosed by equal signs is in bold face (=bold=).
+
+      Small capital text has been replaced with all capitals.
+
+
+
+
+  THE
+  ROMAN
+  EMPIRE
+  IN
+  PROPHECY.
+
+  W. E. VINE, M.A.
+
+  "Regarded as an historical
+  manual it is of no little value,
+  and the author's summaries of
+  the rise and progress of Rome
+  are quite masterly in their way."
+
+  --_Glasgow Citizen._
+
+[Illustration: CÆSAR AUGUSTUS, first Roman Emperor, born 63 B.C.
+Grand-nephew and heir of Julius Cæsar Octavianus. Obtained supreme power
+over Roman dominions by victory over Anthony at Actium, 31 B.C.
+Proclaimed Emperor, 27 B.C., by the Roman Senate, which conferred on him
+the title Augustus. Died 19th August, A.D. 14, in his 76th year.]
+
+
+
+
+  THE
+  ROMAN EMPIRE
+  IN THE LIGHT OF
+  PROPHECY
+
+  --OR,--
+
+  THE RISE, PROGRESS AND END OF
+  THE FOURTH WORLD-EMPIRE.
+
+  BY
+  W. E. VINE, M.A.,
+
+  Author of "B.C. and A.D.; or, How the World was prepared for the
+  Gospel"; "The Scriptures and How to Use Them," etc.
+
+[Illustration: Publisher's Mark]
+
+  PICKERING & INGLIS
+
+  Printers and Publishers, 14 Paternoster Row, London, E.C.4
+  229 Bothwell Street, Glasgow; 75 Princes Street, Edinburgh
+
+
+
+
+               OFFICES AND AGENTS.
+
+
+  LONDON: PICKERING & INGLIS, 14 Paternoster Row, E.C.4.
+  GLASGOW: PICKERING & INGLIS, 229 Bothwell Street.
+  EDINBURGH: PICKERING & INGLIS, 75 Princes Street.
+  MANCHESTER: THE TRACT SOCIETY, 135 Deansgate.
+  LIVERPOOL: WM. T. JAYE, 18 Slater Street.
+  NEWCASTLE: NORTHERN COUNTIES DEPOT, 63a Blackett Street.
+  BIRMINGHAM: P. H. HULBERT, 315 Broad Street (Corner).
+  BATH: H. W. & H. R. GRIFFITHS, 35 Milton Avenue.
+  BRISTOL: W. B. W. SARSFIELD, 78 Park Street.
+  WESTON-SUPER-MARE: WESTERN BIBLE DEPOT, 12 Waterloo Street.
+  CARDIFF: H. J. LEAR, 17 Royal Arcade.
+  DUBLIN: R. STEWART, 10 D'Olier Street, and 2 Nassau Street.
+  BELFAST: R. M'CLAY, 44 Ann Street.
+  DUNDEE: R. H. LUNDIE, 35 Reform Street.
+  NEW YORK: GOSPEL PUBLISHING HOUSE, 318 West 39th Street.
+  CHICAGO: WM. NORTON, Bible Institute Assoc., 826 North La Salle St.
+  BUFFALO, N.Y.: SWORD AND SHIELD TRACT SOCIETY, 1247 Niagara St.
+  SWENGEL, PA.: I. C. HERENDEN, Bible Truth Depot.
+  LOS ANGELES, CAL.: GEO. RAY, 8508 So. Vermont Avenue.
+  BOSTON: HAMILTON BROS., 120 Tremont Street.
+  PHILADELPHIA: GLAD TIDINGS PUBLISHING CO., 5863 Christian St.
+  DALLAS, TEXAS: J. T. DEAN, 2613 Pennsylvania Avenue.
+  WINDSOR, ONT.: C. J. STOWE, 23 Martin Street.
+  TORONTO: UPPER CANADA TRACT SOCIETY, 2 Richmond Street, E.
+  ORILLIA, ONTARIO: S. W. BENNER, Bible and Tract Depot.
+  WINNIPEG: N. W. BIBLE DEPOT, 580 Main Street.
+  BUENOS AIRES: W. C. K. TORRE, Casilla 5.
+  MELBOURNE: E. W. COLE, Book Arcade.
+  SYDNEY: BIBLE, BOOK, AND TRACT DEPOT, 373 Elizabeth Street.
+  SYDNEY: CHRISTIAN WORKERS DEPOT, 170 Elizabeth Street.
+  BRISBANE: W. R. SMITH & CO., Bible Repository, Albert Street.
+  AUCKLAND, N.Z.: H. L. THATCHER, 135 Symonds Street.
+  DUNEDIN: H. J. BATES, Otago Bible House, 38 George Street.
+  PALMERSTON NORTH: JAMES G. HARVEY, Main Street.
+  CHRISTCHURCH: G. W. PLIMSOLL, 84 Manchester Street.
+  BELGAUM, INDIA: W. C. IRVINE, Christian Literature Depot.
+  BANGALORE: A. M'D. REDWOOD, Frasertown Book Depot.
+  SWITZERLAND: JAS. HUNTER, Clarens.
+  CAIRO: THE NILE PRESS, Bulag.
+  HONG-KONG: A. YOUNG, Bible Depot, 2 Wyndham Street.
+
+  _And through most Booksellers, Colporteurs, and Tract Depots._
+
+  Copyright--Pickering & Inglis.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+The following pages are the outcome of several conversations with
+inquirers shortly after the outbreak of the great war, in 1914, and of
+requests for notes of the views expressed. The subject of these
+conversations had occupied the earnest if intermittent attention of the
+writer for over twenty years. The notes were expanded into a series of
+articles which appeared in _The Witness_ during 1915. These have been
+revised and somewhat extended for the present volume, especially the
+last chapter, much of which was previously precluded by limitations of
+space.
+
+In regard to past history, the outlines of events connected with the
+Roman and Turkish Empires are given with the hope that the records will
+prove helpful to those who read the history of Nations in the light of
+Scripture.
+
+In regard to the future, while there are many events which the Word of
+God has foretold with absolute clearness, and upon these we may speak
+unreservedly, yet there are many circumstances concerning which definite
+prediction has been designedly withheld, and upon which prophecy is
+therefore obscure. In such matters an effort has been made to avoid
+dogmatism. Prophecy was not given in order for us to prophesy.
+
+On the other hand, the prophetic Scriptures are not to be neglected.
+Difficulty in understanding them is no reason for disregarding them.
+They are part of that Word, the whole of which is declared to be
+"profitable for doctrine, for reproof, for correction, for instruction
+in righteousness" (2 Tim. 3. 16). They therefore demand prayerful and
+patient meditation.
+
+For a speaker to refer to the study of the prophecies in a way which
+tends to minimise their importance in the minds of his hearers is to
+dishonour both the sacred Word and Him who inspired it. It is
+significant that the book of the Revelation opens with a promise of
+blessing to him who reads (the reference is especially to public
+reading) and to those who "hear the words of the prophecy, and keep the
+things which are written therein" (chap. 1. 3), and at the close repeats
+the blessing for him who keeps its words (chap. 22. 7).
+
+The quotations in the present volume are from the Revised Version, the
+comparatively greater accuracy of its translations being important for a
+correct understanding of many of the passages considered.
+
+While the book is published at the request of several friends, the
+author fulfils such request with the earnest desire that in matters of
+doctrine that only may be accepted which can be confirmed from the Word
+of God itself, and that the Lord may graciously own what is in
+accordance with His mind for the glory of His Name and the profit of the
+reader.
+
+BATH, 1916.                         W. E. VINE.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+  CHAPTER I.          PAGE
+
+  =The Times of the Gentiles=,                           9
+
+  Nebuchadnezzar's Dream,                               11
+
+  The Chaldean, Medo-Persian, Grecian Kingdoms,         12
+
+  The Fourth Kingdom,                                   13
+
+
+  CHAPTER II.
+
+  =The Roman Dominion=,                                 15
+
+  Rise and Progress of the Roman Empire,                16
+
+  Eastward Extension,                                   18
+
+  The Empire Completed,                                 22
+
+  The Crushing of the Nations,                          23
+
+  The Twofold Division,                                 25
+
+  The Tenfold Division,                                 27
+
+  A Comparison of the Visions,                          29
+
+  Testimony of Early Christian Writers,                 32
+
+  Processes at Work Since the Twofold Division,         34
+
+
+  CHAPTER III.
+
+  =The Overthrow in the West=--GERMANIC INVASIONS,      35
+
+  Disintegration of the Western Half,                   37
+
+  Alaric and the Goths,                                 37
+
+  Attila and the Huns,                                  39
+
+  Genseric and the Vandals,                             40
+
+  Northern Limits of the Empire,                        41
+
+  Ten Kingdoms not Formed by Germanic Invasions,        42
+
+
+  CHAPTER IV.
+
+  =The Overthrow in the East=--TURKISH EMPIRE,          44
+
+  Mohammed and the Khaliphs,                            45
+
+  Eastern Empire at End of 10th Century,                46
+
+  The Appearance of the Turks,                          46
+
+  The Turks Embrace Mohammedanism,                      47
+
+  The Turks Enter Europe,                               48
+
+  Constantinople Taken,                                 49
+
+  A Comparison of the Two Divisions,                    50
+
+  Decline of the Turkish Empire,                        51
+
+  The Coming Overthrow,                                 54
+
+  A Blank in Prophecy,                                  55
+
+  Continuation of the Roman Government,                 56
+
+  Roman Imperialism Continued,                          57
+
+
+  CHAPTER V.
+
+  =Coming Revival of the Roman Empire=,                 59
+
+  1. GEOGRAPHICAL CONSIDERATIONS,                       59
+
+      Review of the Ancient Territories,                62
+
+      Divisions of the Greek Empire,                    63
+
+      Other European Territories,                       65
+
+      The British Empire,                               67
+
+  2. POLITICAL STANDPOINT,                              69
+
+      European Federation,                              69
+
+      The Sea Symbolic of National Unrest,              72
+
+      Revolutions and their Issues,                     74
+
+      The Iron and the Clay,                            74
+
+      Unprecedented Political and Social Upheaval,      77
+
+  3. THE RELIGIOUS STANDPOINT,                          77
+
+      The Papacy: Its Present Power,                    79
+
+      A Reunion of Christendom,                         80
+
+      The Doom of Religious Babylon,                    81
+
+      Satanic Authority of the Emperor,                 82
+
+      The "Superman,"                                   83
+
+      Spiritism--The False Prophet,                     84
+
+      Universal System of Commerce,                     87
+
+
+  CHAPTER VI.
+
+  =The Everlasting Kingdom=,                            88
+
+  The Jews,                                             88
+
+  The Seventy Weeks,                                    88
+
+  The Last "Week,"                                      89
+
+  Fierce Persecution,                                   92
+
+  Armageddon and After,                                 93
+
+  The Scene of the Conflict,                            94
+
+  The Epiphany of His Parousia,                         97
+
+  The Voice of the Lord,                                98
+
+  The Treading of the Winepress,                        99
+
+  Overthrow of the Man of Sin,                         100
+
+  The Scene of Judgment,                               102
+
+  The Jews in their Extremity,                         104
+
+  Seismic Disturbances,                                104
+
+  THE KING ETERNAL,                                    107
+
+
+=Index to Maps.=
+
+  ROMAN EMPIRE IN APOSTOLIC TIMES,                      22
+
+  WESTERN ROMAN EMPIRE UNDER GERMANIC TRIBES,           36
+
+  TURKISH EMPIRE IN THE 16TH CENTURY,                   44
+
+  TURKISH EMPIRE IN 1914,                               54
+
+  PALESTINE TO ILLUSTRATE PSALM 29,                     88
+
+
+
+
+The Roman Empire in the Light of Prophecy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+THE TIMES OF THE GENTILES.
+
+
+The overthrow of the kingdom of Judah recorded in 2 Kings 24 and 25, and
+in the opening words of the book of Daniel, was a remarkable crisis in
+the history of the world. In judgment upon the people of God for their
+long-continued iniquity, sovereignty was removed from their hands, king
+and people were led into captivity, and Jerusalem was, in fulfilment of
+Jeremiah's words, given into the hand of Nebuchadnezzar, the king of
+Babylon (Jer. 21. 10). The government of their land was thus committed
+to the Gentiles, and with the Gentiles it has remained from that day
+till now. These events took place in 606 and 587 B.C.
+
+
+The Times of the Gentiles.
+
+But Gentile control is not to continue indefinitely. This, which is
+plain from many Scriptures, was intimated by Christ to His disciples
+when He said of Jerusalem that the city would "be trodden down of the
+Gentiles until the times of the Gentiles be fulfilled" (Luke 21. 24).
+The phrase, "the times of the Gentiles," calls for consideration, and
+especially as it has to do with Nebuchadnezzar's conquest just
+mentioned.
+
+There are two words translated "times" in the New Testament; one is
+_chronoi_, which is invariably rendered "times;" the other is _kairoi_,
+which, when the two are found together, is rendered "seasons." Thus
+Paul, in writing to the Thessalonian Church, says, "But concerning the
+times and the seasons, brethren, ye have no need that aught be written
+unto you" (1 Thess. 5. 1, R.V.; cp. Acts 1.7). We may distinguish
+"seasons" from "times" in the following way: "times" denotes mere
+duration, lengths of time; "seasons" implies that these lengths of time
+have certain events or circumstances associated with them by which they
+are characterised. Thus the words almost exactly correspond to the terms
+"periods" and "epochs." Now the word _kairoi_, "seasons," is used in the
+phrase translated "the times of the Gentiles," which might accordingly
+be rendered "the seasons of the Gentiles." We look, then, for some
+special characteristic of the period or periods thus designated. We have
+observed that Nebuchadnezzar's overthrow of the kingdom of Judah
+involved the transference of its sovereignty from Jew to Gentile from
+that event onward. "The times of the Gentiles," accordingly, is that
+period, or succession of periods, during which dominion over the Jews
+and their land is committed to Gentile Powers.
+
+
+Nebuchadnezzar's Dream.
+
+Special significance attaches to the fact that no sooner had the times
+of the Gentiles begun than God made known the future course of their
+authority over His people, and the character and doom of that authority,
+and made it known to the first Gentile conqueror himself. It was in the
+second year of his reign that Nebuchadnezzar saw in a dream the great
+image by means of which the purposes of God were to be communicated to
+him. The description of this, given by Daniel to the troubled monarch,
+is as follows: "Thou, O king, sawest, and behold a great image. This
+image, which was mighty, and whose brightness was excellent, stood
+before thee; and the aspect thereof was terrible. As for this image,
+his head was of fine gold, his breast and his arms of silver, his belly
+and his thighs of brass, his legs of iron, his feet part of iron, and
+part of clay. Thou sawest till that a stone was cut out without hands,
+which smote the image upon his feet that were of iron and clay, and
+brake them in pieces. Then was the iron, the clay, the brass, the
+silver, and the gold, broken in pieces together, and became like the
+chaff of the summer threshing-floors: and the wind carried them away,
+that no place was found for them: and the stone that smote the image
+became a great mountain, and filled the whole earth" (Dan. 2. 31-35).
+
+Interpreting this vision, the prophet identified Nebuchadnezzar, the
+Chaldean monarch, with the head of gold, and foretold that his kingdom,
+or empire, would be followed in succession by three others,
+corresponding respectively to the different parts of the remainder of
+the image and to the nature of the metals composing them. Of the four
+kingdoms the last is to engage our chief attention in these papers.
+Passing from the first, the =Chaldean=, as specified in Daniel's words
+to the king, "Thou art this head of gold" (v. 38), we are shown that the
+second kingdom was that of the =Medes and Persians= by the prophet's
+record of the doom of Nebuchadnezzar's successor, Belshazzar: "In that
+night Belshazzar the Chaldean king was slain. And Darius the Mede
+received the kingdom" (Dan. 5. 30, 31; cp. v. 28). That the third
+kingdom was the =Grecian= we find in the interpretation of part of a
+vision recorded in the eighth chapter: "The ram which thou sawest that
+had the two horns, they are the kings of Media and Persia. And the rough
+he-goat [who was seen to destroy the ram, v. 8] is the king of Greece"
+(vv. 20, 21; cp. chap. 10. 20).
+
+
+The Fourth Kingdom.
+
+The name of the fourth kingdom is not mentioned in the Old Testament,
+but the prediction given in the ninth chapter of Daniel's prophecies
+sufficiently identifies it. Messiah, it was said, would be cut off, and
+the people of a coming prince would destroy the city and the sanctuary.
+Now we know that the perpetrators of this were the Romans. We know, too,
+that by them the Grecian empire was conquered. The world-wide rule of
+the first =Roman= Emperor is indicated in the words of Luke's
+introduction to his record of the birth of Christ: "Now it came to pass
+in those days, there went out a decree from Cæsar Augustus, that all the
+world should be enrolled" (Luke 2. 1).
+
+It is important to note that this fourth kingdom will, in its final
+condition, be in world-wide authority at the close of the times of the
+Gentiles, that is, that the Roman power, though in a divided state, will
+not be finally destroyed until it meets its doom at the hands of the Son
+of God. This fact, which will receive fuller treatment later, and is
+borne out by several Scriptures, is plainly indicated in the passage
+which describes the last state of the fourth kingdom and its
+destruction. Immediately after showing that it would be a divided
+kingdom, and describing the nature of that division (vv. 41-43), the
+prophet says: "And in the days of those kings shall the God of Heaven
+set up a kingdom, which shall never be destroyed, nor shall the
+sovereignty thereof be left to another people; but it shall break in
+pieces and consume all these kingdoms, and it shall stand for ever" (v.
+44). Now this indestructible kingdom cannot be other than that of
+Christ, and by His kingdom the fourth is to be broken in pieces and
+consumed, thus involving the overthrow of all forms of Gentile
+authority. Obviously no form of world government will exist between that
+of the fourth kingdom, in its condition described in verses 42, 43, and
+the kingdom of Christ which destroys it.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+THE ROMAN DOMINION.
+
+
+An understanding of the Scriptures does not depend upon access to other
+books, or reference to historical records outside the limits of the
+Bible. The Word of God is its own interpreter, and all that is needed
+for our establishment in the faith is contained in its pages. On the
+other hand, the Bible throws light upon history not recorded therein,
+and it is with that in view that we give certain historical outlines in
+dealing with our subject.
+
+The first part of the prophet's description of the fourth kingdom is as
+follows: "The fourth kingdom shall be strong as iron: forasmuch as iron
+breaketh in pieces and subdueth all things: and as iron that crusheth
+all these, shall it break in pieces and crush" (v. 40). A similar
+description is given in his account of a subsequent vision, in which he
+saw four great beasts coming up from the sea. In this vision the Roman
+kingdom again was undoubtedly symbolised by the fourth beast. This beast
+he describes as "terrible and powerful, and strong exceedingly; and it
+had great iron teeth: it devoured and brake in pieces, and stamped the
+residue with his feet" (7. 7). So, again, in the words of the
+interpretation: "The fourth beast shall be a fourth kingdom upon earth,
+which shall be diverse from all the kingdoms, and shall devour the whole
+earth, and shall tread it down, and break it in pieces" (v. 23). Now all
+this exactly depicts the Roman power in its subjugation and control of
+the nations which eventually composed its empire. In the light, then, of
+these prophecies we give a brief sketch of its rise and conquests.
+
+
+The Rise and Progress of the Roman Empire.
+
+The Romans, who early in the third century B.C. had become masters of
+all Italy, save in the extreme north, were drawn into a course of
+conquest beyond the limits of their own country by the rivalry of the
+rapidly advancing power of Carthage in North Africa. Carthage, a city
+founded some centuries earlier by Phoenician colonists from Tyre and
+Sidon, had at length become the capital of a great North African empire,
+stretching from Tripoli to the Atlantic Ocean, and embracing settlements
+elsewhere in countries and islands of the Mediterranean. These
+settlements included the greater part of Sicily, and that island,
+situated between the rival nations, became the first bone of contention
+between them. The precise cause of the struggle must not occupy us here,
+but the circumstances which decided the Roman Government, in 264 B.C.,
+upon an invasion of Sicily were of the deepest significance in the
+history of the world. By the year 242 Sicily was subdued. In the
+following year the island was ceded by Carthage, and the extension of
+Roman dominion beyond Italy was begun. The war continued intermittently,
+with many vicissitudes, for a century, but eventually the Carthagians
+were overwhelmingly defeated by land and sea. "Think you that Carthage
+or that Rome will be content, after the victory, with its own country
+and Sicily?" said a Greek orator, while the issues of the struggle in
+its earliest stage were yet in the balance. Rome's vast ambition, and
+her abundant means of gratifying it, justified the orator's fears. The
+islands of Sardinia and Corsica were shortly afterwards seized.
+
+Defeated in Sicily, Carthage extended her dominions in Spain and made
+that country a base for marching through Gaul to attack the Romans from
+the north. Though their renowned leader Hannibal met with success, their
+effort was doomed to failure. Meanwhile Roman armies had pushed into
+Spain. After a fierce struggle of thirteen years the Carthagians were
+completely overcome there, and Spain soon became a Roman province. By
+the decisive battle of Zama, in North Africa, in 202, Carthage and its
+territories became tributary, and thus all the western Mediterranean
+passed under the supremacy of Rome. Eventually in 146, as a result of a
+final war, Carthage was razed to the ground, and its North African
+kingdom was constituted a Roman province under the name of Africa. War
+with the Celts in North Italy, commencing the next year, resulted in the
+extension of the boundary to the Alps, and countries beyond began to
+feel the terror of the Roman name.
+
+
+Eastward Extension.
+
+The second century B.C. witnessed the spread of the iron rule eastward.
+The Grecian Empire of Alexander the Great, the third mentioned in
+Daniel's interpretation, had embraced all the countries surrounding the
+eastern half of the Mediterranean and had stretched far beyond the
+Euphrates. The disintegration of Alexander's empire after his death
+prepared the way for the Romans. Macedonia, the former seat of that
+empire, was their first great objective. A pretext for war was soon
+forthcoming, and war was actually declared in 200 B.C. A series of
+struggles ensued, and Macedonia was not finally subdued for over thirty
+years. Meanwhile matters had developed in Greece and Asia Minor. In the
+latter country Antiochus III., the Great, who had also conquered Syria
+and Palestine, was seeking to extend his dominions. Cities and states of
+Asia Minor, however, groaning under the tyranny of Antiochus, appealed
+to Rome for aid. The Romans declared war against him in 192 B.C. The
+first conflict occurred in Greece, which was largely under his
+influence. An early victory secured the submission of the Greek states.
+Antiochus retreated into Asia Minor, and was finally crushed at Magnesia
+in 190. The whole of Asia Minor was then surrendered to Rome. Actual
+possession was postponed and local government was largely granted both
+there and in Greece. But that policy proved impracticable, and the force
+of circumstances compelled a forward movement to universal empire. There
+was no such thing as the balance of power in the ancient world. Once a
+country became predominant there was nothing for it but the subjugation
+of its neighbours. The extension of Rome's dominions eastward was a
+fulfilment of a destiny beyond its own control. The reverent student of
+Scripture sees in the course of these events the unfolding of God's
+plans and the fulfilment of His Word.
+
+The final campaign against the Macedonians was opened in 169 B.C., and
+in the next year they were overwhelmed at the decisive battle of Pydna.
+Macedonia and the adjacent state of Illyria became tributary, and
+eventually were reduced to Roman provinces.
+
+The Romans then felt the necessity of definitely annexing Greece.
+Seventy towns in that country were plundered and 150,000 inhabitants
+were sold into slavery. Antiochus IV., Epiphanes, was now king of Syria
+and Palestine, and had possessed himself of almost the whole of Egypt.
+Such was the effect of the battle of Pydna, however, that he was at once
+compelled to hand over Egypt to the conquerors, and that country became
+a Roman protectorate. Syria passed under Roman control at the death of
+Antiochus Epiphanes, in 164, and by the end of a few decades all the
+states of Asia Minor had been incorporated.
+
+Thus by the middle of this century the Republic of Rome had gained
+ascendancy east and west. Its senate was recognised by the civilised
+world as "the supreme tribunal for kings and nations." Early in the next
+century Dalmatia and Thrace were subdued, and the latter was
+incorporated in the province of Macedonia. Wars with Mithradates, King
+of Pontus, Cappadocia and Armenia, resulted in the conquest of all his
+territories, and provinces were formed out of the states from thence
+westward to the Ægean sea.
+
+
+Palestine Annexed.
+
+This century saw the actual interference of Rome in the affairs of
+Judæa. Syria had been made a province in 65 B.C. by the Roman General
+Pompey, and from thence he intervened in a strife which had for some
+time been raging amongst the leaders of the Jews. In 63 he marched an
+army into Judæa and took Jerusalem. At the final assault upon the Temple
+12,000 Jews perished. Judæa thus passed under the iron heel.
+
+As a result of the wars of Cæsar in north-western Europe, in 58-51 B.C.,
+what are now Switzerland, France, and Belgium were subdued and Britain
+was invaded. By Cæsar also Roman authority in Africa was consolidated
+across the entire length of the north of the continent. The conquests of
+Rome as a Republic were complete. The Mediterranean had become a "Roman
+lake."
+
+[Illustration: THE ROMAN EMPIRE IN APOSTOLIC TIMES.]
+
+
+The Empire Completed.
+
+In 27 B.C. the purely Republican form of constitution was abolished, and
+the government of the Roman world was concentrated in the hands of an
+Emperor, the Cæsar Augustus of Luke 2.1. In his reign were fulfilled the
+prophecies foretelling the Birth of Christ. When the Prince of Peace was
+born in Bethlehem the din of strife was hushed throughout the empire,
+and Rome, under the restraining hand of God, ceased for a time its
+warring. By Augustus the northern territories of the empire were
+extended to practically the entire length of the Danube. The greater
+part of Britain became a province under Claudius. A later Emperor,
+Trajan, added, at the beginning of the second century A.D., the province
+of Dacia, covering what are now Transylvania and most of Roumania. Under
+Marcus Aurelius (161-180) a large part of Mesopotamia was finally
+annexed.
+
+This completes the actual conquests of the Romans. We will now note
+certain characteristics of their method of subjugation, viewed in the
+light of Daniel's prophecy concerning the fourth kingdom, that, like
+iron, it would "break in pieces and crush."
+
+
+The Crushing of the Nations.
+
+The crushing process was evidenced in many ways, and especially by the
+establishment of a general system of slavery, which almost everywhere
+supplanted free labour. Slave-hunting and slave-dealing became a
+profession. To such an extent were they carried on at one period that
+certain provinces were well nigh depopulated. We are told that at the
+great slave-market in the island of Delos, off Greece, as many as ten
+thousand slaves were disembarked in the morning and bought up before
+the evening of the same day. Chained gangs worked under overseers and
+were confined in prison at night. To take an instance of the extreme
+rigour of the laws regulating the traffic, it is recorded by the
+historian Tacitus, that once, when the Prefect of Rome had been killed
+by one of his slaves, of whom he owned a vast number, the whole of his
+slaves, many of them women and children, were executed together, in
+accordance with an ancient law. That event took place about the time,
+apparently, at which the Apostle Paul arrived at Rome.
+
+But not only were the nations ground down by slavery, the pages of Roman
+history abound in records of wholesale massacre and butchery. We may
+note, for instance, Luke's statement of Pilate's slaughter of Galilæans
+while they were sacrificing (Luke 13. 1). Records abound, too, of
+grossly burdensome taxation and financial exactions, in which the Romans
+outdid all tyrants that had preceded them. Usury flourished in the last
+century as it had never done before. Four per cent. per month was an
+ordinary exaction for a loan to a community. On one occasion a Roman
+banker, who had a claim on the municipality of Salamis, in Cyprus, kept
+its council blockaded until five of its members died of hunger.
+
+By these methods the provinces of the empire were at one period reduced
+to a condition of unsurpassed misery. Nothing could more vividly
+describe the course of such a kingdom and the control exercised by it
+than the words of Daniel quoted above.
+
+
+The Twofold Division.
+
+This fourth kingdom was destined to be divided; and in two respects,
+territorial and constitutional. The territorial division was indicated
+by the symbolism of the legs and feet of the image of Nebuchadnezzar's
+vision; the constitutional division was declared in Daniel's
+interpretation concerning the iron and clay (v. 40). The former of these
+divisions claims our consideration first. Territorially the kingdom
+would be first divided into two parts corresponding with the legs of the
+image. This actually took place in the fourth century of the present
+era.
+
+The Roman Empire had continued in a more or less united condition for
+over three centuries after the accession of its first Emperor, Augustus,
+in 27 B.C., though various signs of a coming division manifested
+themselves. It was not unusual, for instance, for an emperor to appoint
+an associate with himself in the imperial rank, and on one occasion
+Maximian, who thus became associated with Diocletian in A.D. 288,
+actually established his seat of government at Nicomedia, in Asia Minor.
+Constantine (323-337) united the empire under his sole rule, but paved
+the way for the final separation of east from west by founding, in 328,
+the city of Constantinople as a second Rome, after his own name, and
+establishing it as an eastern centre of government with its own
+legislative institutions. This arrangement was favoured by several
+conditions, national and otherwise, which characterised the countries of
+the eastern half as distinct from those of the western.
+
+At the death of Constantine, in 337, his dominions were divided among
+his three sons, a division, however, which lasted but a brief time. The
+empire was in 353 again united under Constantius, the survivor of the
+three. The long impending division into two parts took place under
+Valentinian I., in the year of his accession, 364. Yielding to the wish
+of his soldiers that he should associate a colleague with himself, he
+placed his brother Valens in power in the east, with headquarters at
+Constantinople, he himself retaining control over the west.
+
+
+The Tenfold Division.
+
+Prophetic Scriptures show that the Roman Empire would be further
+divided. Now while the ten toes of the image in Nebuchadnezzar's dream
+have not improperly been regarded as indicative of a tenfold division,
+the fact that the image had ten toes would be insufficient of itself to
+signify this, for the toes are naturally essential to a complete human
+figure. Moreover, the hands and their fingers, equally essential parts,
+have no territorial significance attached to them. The conclusion
+regarding the toes is, however, justified when we find the tenfold
+division abundantly confirmed by other Scriptures.
+
+Thus the fourth beast in the vision in chapter 7, which, as we have
+seen, likewise symbolised the Roman kingdom, is described as having _ten
+horns_ (v. 7). The interpretation clearly tells us what these are: "And
+as for the ten horns, out of the kingdom (the fourth) shall _ten kings_
+arise" (v. 24). The Apocalypse gives us further information regarding
+this division, unfolding with increasing clearness the details connected
+with it. In one of the visions given to the apostle John, he sees "a
+great red dragon, having seven heads and _ten horns_" (Rev. 12. 3). The
+meaning of the ten horns is not there explained. We are told that the
+great dragon is "the old serpent, he that is called the Devil and Satan,
+the deceiver of the whole world" (v. 9). Turning now to the next
+chapter, we find another vision recorded, giving a fresh view of the
+same subject. A beast was seen "coming up out of the sea, having _ten
+horns_ and seven heads, and on his horns ten diadems, and upon his heads
+names of blasphemy" (chap. 13. 1). Again an explanation of the ten horns
+is withheld, but that they are identical with those of the twelfth
+chapter is undeniable. The Apostle receives, however, a further vision,
+recorded in chapter 17: "I saw a woman sitting upon a scarlet-coloured
+beast, full of names of blasphemy, having seven heads and _ten horns_"
+(chap. 17. 3). And now the symbolism of the horns is explained: "the ten
+horns that thou sawest are _ten kings_, which have received no kingdom
+as yet; but they receive authority as kings, with the beast, for one
+hour. These have one mind, and they give their power and authority unto
+the beast" (vv. 12, 13).
+
+We are now concerned, of course, solely with the tenfold division of the
+empire; other details of the visions just referred to remain for later
+consideration. We cannot fail to see that what is symbolised by the ten
+toes of the image, and by the ten horns of the fourth beast as revealed
+to Daniel, is identical with what is symbolised by the ten horns of the
+dragon and of the beast seen by John, namely, the Roman kingdom in its
+ultimately divided condition.
+
+
+A Comparison of the Visions.
+
+The following points are noteworthy in comparing these visions
+relatively to the tenfold division. First, there is a parallelism in the
+order of the revelations given to the two seers, Daniel and John. A
+preliminary vision is given to each--more than one in the case of
+John--in which, in the matter of this territorial partition, symbols
+occur without explanation. Each then receives a further vision, in the
+interpretation of which the eventual division into ten kingdoms is
+plainly disclosed. To Daniel it is said: "As for the ten horns, out of
+the kingdom shall ten kings arise;" and to John: "The ten horns that
+thou sawest are ten kings, ... which receive authority as kings with
+the beast for one hour."
+
+Second, the ten kingdoms are seen to be contemporaneous, as is indicated
+by the co-existence of the ten horns of the beast, and further, by the
+fact that the ten kings mutually agree to a certain line of policy in
+handing over their authority to a supreme potentate (Rev. 17. 12, 13).
+
+Third, it is evident that the fourth kingdom is the last of the Gentile
+world-powers, and that it will exist in its tenfold state at the end of
+the times of the Gentiles. We observed this above in the case of the
+image, from the fact that the stone, symbolising the kingdom of Christ,
+smote the image upon its toes. So now, in the vision of the four beasts,
+it is the fourth beast that is slain, his body destroyed, and given to
+be burned (Dan. 7. 11). The Personal Agent of this destruction is here
+made known: "I saw in the night visions, and, behold, there came with
+the clouds of Heaven One like unto a son of man, and He came even to the
+Ancient of Days, ... and there was given Him dominion, and glory, and a
+kingdom, that all the peoples, nations, and languages should serve Him:
+His dominion is an everlasting dominion, which shall not pass away, and
+His kingdom that which shall not be destroyed" (vv. 13, 14). The
+finality of the fourth kingdom is clearer still from the interpretation
+given in the remainder of the chapter. The final world-ruler is, of
+course, prominent in this vision; in his destruction is involved the
+destruction of his kingdom; his power and aggression are terminated when
+the Ancient of Days comes (v. 22); then it is that "the judgment shall
+sit, and they shall take away his dominion, to consume and to destroy it
+unto the end. And the kingdom and the dominion, and the greatness of the
+kingdoms under the whole heaven, shall be given to the people of the
+saints of the Most High: His kingdom is an everlasting kingdom, and all
+dominions shall serve and obey Him" (vv. 26, 27). Similarly, again, in
+Revelation 13 and 17, in the corresponding visions of the beast and its
+ten horns, the ten kings and their federal head, ruling at the time of
+the end, "shall war against the Lamb, and the Lamb shall overcome them,
+for He is Lord of lords, and King of kings; and they _also shall
+overcome_ that are with Him, called and chosen and faithful" (Rev. 17.
+14).
+
+The crushing of the image by the stone, the slaying of the fourth beast
+before the Ancient of Days, and the conquest of the ten kings and their
+chief by the Lamb, are therefore different views of the same event. The
+tenfold division of the fourth kingdom is obviously still future, and
+marks the condition of the world-government at the close of the times of
+the Gentiles, and immediately prior to the kingdom of Christ.
+
+
+The Testimony of Early Christian Writers.
+
+That the Roman Empire would in its final form be divided into ten
+kingdoms was held by Christian writers of the earliest post-apostolic
+times. Their opinions are here given, not as forming any basis of
+exposition, but as expressions of early Christian conception of the
+Scriptures under consideration.
+
+What is known as "_The Epistle of Barnabas_," probably written early in
+the second century A.D., quotes from Daniel concerning the ten kingdoms
+to show that they would exist at the consummation of the present age.
+_Irenæus_ (circa A.D. 120-202), a disciple of Polycarp, who had been a
+companion of the apostle John, observes that "the ten toes are ten
+kings, among whom the kingdom will be divided." _Tertullian_, a
+contemporary of Irenæus, remarks that "the disintegration and dispersion
+of the Roman State among the ten kings will produce Antichrist, and then
+shall be revealed that Wicked One, whom the Lord Jesus shall slay with
+the breath of His mouth and destroy by the brightness of His
+manifestation." _Hippolytus_, who was a follower of Irenæus, and
+flourished in the first half of the third century, makes similar
+reference to the ultimate division. _Lactantius_, of the latter half of
+the third and the early part of the fourth centuries, writes as follows:
+"The Empire will be sub-divided, and the powers of government, after
+being frittered away and shared among many, will be undermined. Civil
+discords will then ensue, nor will there be respite from destructive
+wars, until ten kings arise at once, who will divide the world among
+themselves to consume rather than to govern it." _Cyril_ (circa
+315-386), who became bishop of Jerusalem in 350, quoting from Daniel,
+and speaking of the Empire and its future division, implies that
+teaching on the subject was customary in the churches. _Jerome_
+(342-420) observes that "at the end of the world, when the kingdom of
+the Romans is to be destroyed, there will be ten kings to divide the
+Roman world among themselves." Similarly writes _Theodoret_ in the fifth
+century, and others of that time make more or less direct reference to
+the subject. While the views of these writers differ considerably on
+other points of detail, all are unanimous as to the eventual division of
+the Empire among ten contemporaneous potentates.
+
+
+Processes at Work Since the Twofold Division.
+
+The mediæval and modern history of the lands originally constituting the
+Roman Empire is a history of the formation of independent states in such
+a way as to point to the eventual revival of the Empire in the tenfold
+division we have been considering. The process has been a long and
+involved one, for the counsels of God have had a far wider range than
+the mere shaping of national destiny. It has been the Divine pleasure,
+for instance, that the Gospel should be spread among all nations for the
+purpose of taking out from among them a people for the Name of Christ,
+and for the formation thereby of His Church. In contradistinction to
+this, and from the standpoint of the world itself, which, though under
+God's control, remains in alienation from Him, there has been a gradual
+development of the political, social, and religious principles which are
+ultimately to permeate the nations.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+THE OVERTHROW IN THE WEST: GERMANIC INVASIONS.
+
+
+In the interpretation of his vision of the beast, John is told of its
+rise, temporary removal, and reappearance: "The beast that thou sawest
+was, and is not; and is about to come up out of the abyss, and to go
+into perdition" (Rev. 17. 8). Here the Roman world-power, the imperial
+dominion, is in view. In verse 11 the final king himself is similarly
+described. The symbol of the beast is thus employed to describe first
+the dominion and then its imperial head. This symbolic association of
+locality and ruler is found elsewhere in Scripture, and is illustrated
+in this very chapter. The seven heads of the beast, for example, are
+interpreted in both ways: "The seven heads are seven mountains, ... and
+they are seven kings" (v. 9, R.V. ) The distinction between verses 8 and
+11 may be observed in this way: in the first part of the chapter,
+verses 1-8, the beast is viewed as a whole, indicating world-wide
+government; in verse 11 the scope of the symbol is limited, the beast is
+a person, and is identified with one of the seven heads, or kings, he is
+"himself also an eighth, and is of the seven." With this individual we
+shall be occupied later.
+
+A striking illustration of the symbolic use of the word "beast" to
+denote both a kingdom and the ruler over it is to be found in Dan. 7,
+where the following statements are made: "These great beasts, which are
+four, are four kings" (v. 17), and "The fourth beast shall be the fourth
+kingdom" (v. 23).
+
+[Illustration: THE WESTERN ROMAN EMPIRE UNDER GERMANIC TRIBES]
+
+The statement of verse 8 seems, then, undoubtedly to refer to the
+Empire; it did exist, it ceased to be, and it will reappear. The
+assertion that it "is not" must not be taken to mean that the beast had
+ceased to exist in John's time. The present tense is to be regarded as
+prophetic. The verb "to be" often has the force of continuance of
+existence. The whole statement implies a past existence, a
+discontinuance of that existence, a future reappearance. In the vision
+recorded in the thirteenth chapter, John saw one of the heads of the
+beast "as though it had been smitten unto death." If, as seems probable,
+this head is imperialism, then the overthrow of imperial Rome is
+likewise indicated in that passage.
+
+In the light, then, of the words: "The beast that thou sawest was, and
+is not," we may now consider how the Roman Empire was overthrown.
+
+
+Disintegration of the Western Half.
+
+We have seen that, at the accession of the Emperor Valentinian I. in
+A.D. 364, the Empire was divided into two parts. The succeeding century
+witnessed the disintegration of the western half. The cause was
+primarily from within. Augustus, the first Emperor, had instituted a
+policy of settling colonies of "barbarians" from northern Europe within
+the frontiers of the Empire. Later Emperors adopted the policy more
+generally. The significance of this lies in the fact that by the
+barbarians who had already been thus established in the Empire, the
+attacks were commenced which resulted in the dismemberment of its
+western provinces.
+
+
+Alaric and the Goths.
+
+At the close of the fourth century hordes of Gothic tribes from
+north-eastern and eastern Germany set out, under Alaric their chief, in
+quest of new lands. Settlements of these very Goths had already been
+established south of the Danube by the Imperial Government as allies of
+the Romans. After an excursion into Italy, in which they were
+temporarily checked, they poured, in 406, into defenceless Gaul. From
+thence Alaric returned to invade Italy, and three times in three years
+besieged Rome (408-410), eventually sacking the city. After his death,
+in 410, the Goths retired from Italy, entered Gaul, and permanently
+occupied the southern part of that country and a large part of Spain,
+where they were known as =Visigoths= (_i.e._, Western Goths).
+
+Other Germanic tribes also streamed into Gaul. Of these, the =Franks=
+(whence the name France) issued from districts around the middle and
+lower Rhine and occupied northern Gaul; the =Suevi=, from north and
+north-west Germany, passed through into Spain; the =Alani=, formerly
+from eastern Europe, settled in west France and Spain; the
+=Burgundians=, from eastern Germany, seized that part of Gaul which
+eventually was named after them, Burgundy. The =Vandals=, from northern
+and central Germany, after being defeated by the Franks, crossed into
+Spain under their leader Genseric, and from thence established
+themselves in the province of Africa, in 429. This occupation of Gaul
+and Spain was soon perforce recognised by the Emperor at Rome. At the
+death of the Emperor Honorius, in 423, Rome exercised little more than a
+nominal authority over the greater part of the west.
+
+From Britain the Roman troops were withdrawn by Honorius, in 409, though
+the final abandonment of the island province did not take place till
+436. Teutonic tribes from North Europe were soon engaged in invading
+this part of the Empire. The =Jutes=, from Jutland, landed in 449, the
+=Saxons= in 477, and about the same time the =Angles=.
+
+
+Attila and the Huns.
+
+Toward the close of the reign of Valentinian III. (433-455), Gaul and
+Italy were invaded by the =Huns= under Attila. The Huns originally
+inhabited a large part of central and northern Asia. In the latter part
+of the fourth century they moved west into Scythia and Germany, driving
+the Goths before them. Attila's dominions thereafter extended over a
+vast area of eastern, central, and northern Europe, and he was regarded
+as of equal standing with the Emperors at Constantinople and Rome. After
+a gigantic but futile incursion into Gaul, in 451, the Huns rushed into
+Italy, ravaging its northern plains. An embassy from Rome and an immense
+ransom saved the situation. Attila died in 453, and Italy was evacuated.
+The Huns eventually settled in south-eastern Europe, and their dominion
+dwindled away. A trace of their name may be found in the word Hungary.
+
+
+Genseric and the Vandals.
+
+In North Africa Genseric the Vandal established a powerful dominion, and
+set about preparing an invasion of Italy by sea. In 455 (the last year
+of the reign of Valentinian III.) his army of Vandals and Moors attacked
+Rome, which was again given over to pillage. Its wealth and treasures
+were transported to Carthage, and with them the vessels of the temple at
+Jerusalem; these had been brought to Rome in A.D. 70 by Titus, the
+conqueror of Jerusalem. For twenty years after Genseric's achievement
+Roman Emperors existed in little else than name, the real power being
+in the hands of a barbarian officer. In 476 the last Emperor was deposed
+by Odoacer, the king of the Heruli, a tribe which, issuing from the
+shores of the Baltic, made successful inroads into Italy and occupied
+much of the country. Odoacer was, at the request of the Roman Senate,
+given the reins of government by the eastern Emperor Zeno, and news was
+despatched to the court at Constantinople that no longer was there an
+Emperor of the west. Subsequently, in 493, Odoacer was slain by
+Theodoric, the king of the =Ostrogoths=, who then became predominant in
+the Italian peninsula. The Ostrogoths (_i.e._, Eastern Goths) had broken
+off from the main body of their nation, and after settling south of the
+Danube moved into the province of Dalmatia.
+
+
+Northern Limits of the Empire.
+
+Other Germanic tribes, in addition to those named above, firmly
+established themselves within the northern limits of the Empire. Of
+these, two are worthy of mention, the =Alemanni=, who occupied most of
+what is now Switzerland and districts northward, and the =Lombards=, who
+settled in north Italy and the territory north-east of it.
+
+
+The Ten Kingdoms not Formed by the Germanic Invasions.
+
+There have been various attempts to identify with the ten prophetic
+kingdoms the states formed from the western half of the Roman Empire by
+the Germanic tribes from the north. Such attempts fail from the
+standpoints both of history and of prophecy. To group the tribes so as
+to make ten kingdoms out of them is, of course, possible in several
+ways, for there were at least eighteen such tribes. Accordingly lists
+put forward differ considerably. But such grouping is manifestly
+arbitrary. Again, since these invading nations occupied only the western
+half of the Empire, the above allocation of the ten kingdoms necessarily
+leaves the eastern half out of consideration, and therefore excludes the
+land of Palestine from this stage of the prophetic forecast.
+
+Now the prophecies concerning the times of the Gentiles are invariably
+focussed upon the Jews and their land. The dealings of God with the Jews
+form the pivot of His dealings with other nations. Thus no scheme of
+prophetic exposition relative to this subject is to be regarded as
+Scriptural which excludes Palestine from its scope. To endeavour to
+make the Word of God square with facts of history is to tamper with
+Scripture and to run the risk of obscuring its meaning and force.
+
+The idea that the formation of the ten kingdoms took place in the fifth
+century fails to stand the test of Scripture in other respects. Of the
+ten kings prophecy foretells that "they receive authority as kings with
+the beast for one hour," that they "have one mind, and they give their
+power and authority unto the beast" (Rev. 17. 13, 14). No such tenfold
+confederacy has existed in Europe; it certainly never existed among the
+chieftains of the Germanic tribes which invaded the west of the Roman
+Empire in the fifth century, neither is there any record of such an
+agreement among them. Nor, again, can it be said that they made war with
+the Lamb and were overcome by Him (v. 14). These prophecies still await
+fulfilment. Similar considerations apply to the passage in Daniel 7 in
+reference to the fourth kingdom. The ten kings, it is said, would arise
+out of that kingdom, and after them another king who would make war with
+the saints and prevail against them until the Ancient of Days came (vv.
+21, 22, 24).
+
+Again, since the persecution under the king who arises after the others
+continues until the Ancient of Days comes (v. 22), his war against the
+saints must have lasted from the fifth century until the present time,
+if he arose in that century. Moreover, as he was said to be going to
+subdue three kingdoms (v. 24), the seven kingdoms not so subdued must
+likewise have continued. This has obviously not been the case. From
+every point of view it is impossible to assign the tenfold division to
+any time in the past.
+
+[Illustration: The Turkish Empire in the 16th Century.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE OVERTHROW IN THE EAST: THE TURKISH EMPIRE.
+
+
+Having narrated the disintegration of the western half of the Empire, we
+will now recount the events which involved the overthrow of the eastern
+half. The impoverishment of the imperial power at Rome, and the
+weakening effect of the Germanic attacks upon it, tended to enhance the
+power of the Emperor at Constantinople. Indeed the eastern Empire was
+soon regarded as the more important of the two, and for some time after
+the barbarian invasions in Italy the Emperors at Constantinople
+claimed supremacy over the west.
+
+
+Mohammed and the Khaliphs.
+
+The seventh century saw the ascendency of Mohammed (born A.D. 570) in
+Arabia, to which country his personal power, temporal and religious, was
+limited. Upon his death, in 632, his followers determined on the
+invasion of Persia and the Asiatic dominions of the Emperor at
+Constantinople. Mohammed's successor, Abubekr, the first of the Khaliphs
+(_i.e._, "representatives" of the prophet), at once waged war in both
+directions. Persia speedily succumbed; Syria and Palestine were
+subjugated after seven years by the Khaliph Omar. The reduction of Egypt
+followed, and during the remainder of this century the Saracens, the
+name by which the followers of Mohammed became termed in Christendom,
+extended their territory across the entire length of North Africa, and
+shortly afterwards even into Spain, where they overpowered the then
+disunited Visigoths.
+
+The Saracen power in Western Asia was distracted during the next century
+by civil war, and was further weakened by unsuccessful wars against the
+Greeks. At length, in 750, the seat of government was moved from
+Damascus to Bagdad. From the eighth century onward, though the religion
+of Mohammed gained ground, and continues to do so to-day, the empire
+established by his followers dwindled rapidly, one province after
+another shaking off its allegiance until at the end of the tenth century
+its shattered dominions lay open to the nearest invader. The foe
+appeared in the shape of the formidable Turk.
+
+
+Eastern Empire at End of 10th Century.
+
+In view of the entrance of this new enemy we may note the extent of the
+territory belonging at this time to the eastern branch of the old Roman
+world, the Byzantine Empire, as it is termed (from Byzantium, the
+ancient name of Constantinople). The Eastern Emperors had recovered some
+of their lost ground in Asia, and at the close of the tenth century they
+held all Asia Minor, Armenia, a part of Syria, a considerable portion of
+Italy, and all the Balkan Peninsula.
+
+
+The Appearance of the Turks.
+
+Beyond the north-eastern border of the Saracen dominions lay the country
+of Turkestan, inhabited by the Turks, a branch of the warlike nation of
+the Tartars of Central Asia. With them the Saracens, after the
+establishment of their Government at Bagdad, waged successful warfare
+for a time, taking numbers of Turks captive and dispersing them over the
+Empire. This only facilitated the eventual downfall of the Saracen
+sovereignty. The Turks in Western Asia grew in influence, and at length
+the Turkish troops, breaking into open revolt, assumed control over the
+Khaliphate, deposing and nominating the Khaliphs at their will.
+
+
+The Turks Embrace Mohammedanism.
+
+Early in the eleventh century the bulk of the Turkish nation, under its
+leader Tongrol Bek, moving out from Turkestan, swept down upon Persia.
+The Khaliphate at Bagdad was, however, permitted to remain, and not only
+so, but Tongrol Bek and all his tribes embraced the Mohammedan religion.
+The invaders then marched west in vast numbers to make an attack upon
+Christendom, and in the course of time subdued Armenia and most of Asia
+Minor. Europe became alarmed, and the Byzantine Emperors eagerly sought
+the assistance of the nations of the west. Hence arose the Crusades,
+which had as their chief object the deliverance of Palestine from both
+Saracens and Turks, and which served to retard, though not to prevent,
+the advance of the Turkish power in Europe.
+
+
+The Turks Enter Europe.
+
+Early in the thirteenth century a mighty movement of Mongols south-west
+from Central Asia, involving the immediate destruction of the Khaliphate
+at Bagdad, exerted an important influence upon the Turks, in driving
+those Turkish tribes which had remained east of Armenia westward into
+Asia Minor. This resulted in the establishment of various Turkish
+dynasties in that country. At the close of the thirteenth century the
+paramount power over these was exercised by Osman (or Othman, whence the
+name Ottoman), who seized all that remained of the ancient Roman world
+in Asia, and thus practically founded the Ottoman Empire. In the middle
+of the fourteenth century the way was opened for the Ottomans to advance
+into Europe. They were invited by one of the rival factions at
+Constantinople to undertake their cause. The Turks accordingly crossed
+the Hellespont and seized Gallipoli and the territory in the vicinity of
+the capital. Constantinople itself was left unattacked for the time.
+Under Murad I., the grandson of Osman, Roumania and several kingdoms
+south of the Danube, including Bulgaria, were subdued. The kings of
+Hungary, Bosnia and Serbia rose against the invader, but were severely
+defeated, and by the decisive victory of Kosovo, in 1389, Serbia and
+Bosnia were annexed.
+
+
+Constantinople Taken.
+
+Constantinople was temporarily saved by another advance of the Mongol
+Tartars upon the Turkish dominions in Asia, where, in 1402, the Ottomans
+suffered a severe defeat. From this check they recovered, and during the
+first part of the fifteenth century were at war with the Hungarians and
+neighbouring races, whom they eventually overthrew. In 1451 Mohammed II.
+ascended the Ottoman throne, and in 1453 led an immense army against
+Constantinople. The city was taken by storm, the last of the Roman
+Emperors of the east died fighting, and Mohammed II. rode in triumph to
+the cathedral of St. Sophia, where he established the Moslem worship.
+
+For over a hundred years after this the Turkish Empire continued to
+extend. Egypt was annexed in 1517, and in the middle of this century
+Tripoli and Algeria were added, as well as considerable districts in
+Europe and Asia. The Turks were now at the zenith of their power.
+
+
+A Comparison of the Two Divisions.
+
+Recapitulating, we may compare the two divisions of the Roman Empire
+since their overthrow, from the _prophetic_, _religious_ and _political_
+standpoints. From the _prophetic_ point of view our interest in the west
+has thus far centred in the fact that the ten kingdoms were not formed
+by the fifth century invasions; our interest in the east centres chiefly
+in the land of Palestine, wrenched, as we have seen, from the eastern
+Emperor by the Saracens, and then occupied by the Turks, who still
+possess it. From the _religious_ standpoint, the Germanic tribes in the
+west accepted Roman Catholicism, hence its progress in that part of
+Europe; in the east the Turks had accepted Mohammedanism when invading
+the Empire of the Khaliphs, hence the establishment of Islamism
+throughout the Turkish dominions. _Politically_, the western invasion in
+the fifth century, and the consequent amalgamation of the Teutonic
+tribes with the peoples formerly under Roman control, led eventually to
+the formation of the various mediaeval monarchies of Western Europe
+which are to-day either kingdoms or republics. Affairs in the eastern
+half of the Roman world have moved more slowly in this respect, owing to
+the prolonged existence of the Ottoman Empire. The slow decay of the
+Turkish power from the middle of the sixteenth century onward has
+already resulted in the formation of some Eastern States, and the
+process still continues.
+
+
+The Decline of the Turkish Empire.
+
+The decline of the power of the Turks set in during the latter half of
+the sixteenth century, when their dominions passed under incapable
+rulers. In the reign of Selim II. (1566-1574) occurred the first
+conflict between the Turks and Russians, the former being driven back
+from Astrakkan. In 1593, during a war between Turkey and Austria, the
+provinces of Transylvania, Moldavia, and Wallachia rose in revolt. As
+the result of intermittent wars in the latter half of the seventeenth
+century Austria acquired almost the whole of _Hungary_. In 1770 Russia
+occupied _Moldavia_ and _Wallachia_, which though nominally for a time
+under Turkey were practically Russian protectorates. During the next
+few years Russia regained the Crimea and all the neighbouring district
+north of the Black Sea. At the commencement of the nineteenth century
+the Ottoman Empire was in a perilous condition. Napoleon had plans for
+its partition. Provincial governors were everywhere acting independently
+of the Sultan. In 1804 _Serbia_ revolted, and after a few years of
+persistent struggle obtained its autonomy. _Greece_ revolted in 1820,
+and, though subdued for a time, gained its independence in 1829 through
+the intervention of England, France, and Russia, and chiefly as the
+result of the naval battle of Navarino, in which the Turco-Egyptian
+fleet was annihilated. In the same year _Algeria_ was annexed by the
+French. European rivalries prevented for a time any rapid diminution of
+the Empire.
+
+The Crimean War of 1854-5 had important consequences for the Balkan
+peoples. It gave them, under the slackening grasp of the Porte, twenty
+years of comparatively quiet national development. In 1860 Wallachia and
+Moldavia formed themselves into the single state of _Roumania_. In 1866
+the Pasha of Egypt assumed the title of Khedive (_i.e._, king), thereby
+securing a measure of independence for the country. In 1875 the misrule
+of the Sultan led to the insurrection of Bosnia, Herzegovina, and
+Bulgaria. Serbia and Montenegro then took up arms. In 1877 a war with
+Russia saw Turkey without an ally. A complete Russian victory in 1878
+issued in the treaties first of San Stefano and then of Berlin, by which
+Turkey yielded to Russia the state of _Bessarabia_ and districts south
+of the Caucasus, the independence of _Serbia_, _Montenegro_, and
+_Roumania_ were recognised by the Porte, _Bulgaria_ was constituted an
+autonomous state, _Bosnia_ and _Herzegovina_ were ceded to Austria,
+_Thessaly_ to Greece, and _Cyprus_ to Britain. In 1885, as the result of
+a revolution, Eastern _Roumelia_ became united to Bulgaria. Shortly
+after that date German influence began to gain ascendancy at the court
+of the Sultan, and, among other affairs, largely dominated the granting
+of railway concessions in Western Asia. The effects of that influence
+have been evidenced in the present war. In 1912 Italy annexed _Tripoli_
+after a brief war. In 1913 a short but sanguinary war with the Balkan
+States deprived Turkey of all her European dominions save for a small
+piece of territory in the vicinity of Constantinople. _Egypt_, which
+has been chiefly under British control for a considerable period, has in
+1915 been practically annexed by Britain as a protectorate, the Khedive
+being deposed and a nominee of the British Government being placed in
+authority. Britain has likewise annexed a district north of the Persian
+Gulf.
+
+
+The Coming Overthrow.
+
+The continual decrease of the Turkish Empire, and more especially during
+the past hundred years, affords ground, apart from other considerations,
+for the expectation of its overthrow and the eventual cession of
+Palestine to the Jews, perhaps by a general agreement among the European
+Powers, events which seem not far distant. National jealousies would not
+permit the permanent annexation of Palestine by any one of these Powers,
+in whatever way the remaining Asiatic Turkish dominions may be divided.
+A proposal has already been put forward for its annexation to Egypt.
+Such an arrangement would in any case be merely temporary. To the Jews
+the land belongs, and by Divine decree the Jews are to possess it
+again.
+
+[Illustration: The Turkish Empire in 1914.]
+
+
+A Blank in Prophecy.
+
+It should be observed, in passing, that Scripture is apparently silent
+concerning the occupation of Palestine by the Saracens and Turks. Such
+silence is noticeable when we remember how definitely the occupation by
+the other Gentile powers, the Chaldean, Medo-Persian, Greek, and Roman,
+and the order and character of their rule, were predicted. The cause of
+the silence is not difficult to ascertain. The four Gentile powers just
+mentioned had to do with the Jews as the recognised possessors of
+Palestine, either by way of removing them from their country or
+restoring them to it, or during such time as they were permitted to
+remain in it with liberty to continue their temple worship and
+sacrifice. The Chaldeans removed the Jews from the land, the
+Medo-Persians repatriated them, the Greeks permitted their continuance
+in it, the Romans did so too, until A.D. 70, when they crushed them.
+When, however, the Saracens and the Turks seized the land the Jews had
+been scattered, nor have they received national recognition while under
+them. Gentile occupation of Palestine during such times as the Jews
+remain in their present condition seems therefore to receive no direct
+notice in prophecy.
+
+The restoration of Palestine to the Jews is closely connected with the
+revival of the Roman Empire in its tenfold form. Prior to considering
+the manner of this revival we must notice how during the period between
+the overthrow of that Empire and its coming resuscitation, its dominions
+and their government have remained Roman in character, thus affording a
+further proof that the coming and final world-power will not be entirely
+a new one, but will be a revival of the ancient Roman or fourth empire
+indicated in the prophecies of Daniel.
+
+
+The Continuation of Roman Government and Influence.
+
+Such was the prestige of the Roman name and authority that the
+chieftains of the Germanic tribes which in the fifth century subdued the
+western half of the Empire governed the conquered territories, not so
+much as tribal chiefs, but as successors to, and in continuation of, the
+imperial rule; they introduced no radical changes in the provincial and
+municipal forms of government of their predecessors. Civil organisation
+remained distinctly Roman, and has continued so; upon it are based some
+of the chief municipal institutions of modern life. Indeed Roman civil
+law still remains the foundation of modern jurisprudence.
+
+In south-eastern Europe, too, countries which were for centuries under
+the power of the Turk retained, in their municipal institutions and
+organisation, the impress of Roman authority. It should be remembered
+that though the eastern or Byzantine portion of the ancient Roman Empire
+was distinct from the western, its emperors being designated as Grecian
+in contrast to the Roman, yet its legislative foundations were laid in
+the Roman Empire prior to the division of the east from the west.
+Byzantine imperialism was therefore really Roman under an eastern title.
+According as the states in the east have become freed from the Turkish
+yoke, so the character of their government and legislation has conformed
+in a large degree to those of the west. The further diminution of the
+Turkish Empire will doubtless see a corresponding revival of western
+conditions and methods.
+
+
+Roman Imperialism Continued.
+
+It is important also to observe that notwithstanding the passing away of
+the Roman Empire as such, the principle of imperialism remained, and,
+amidst the vicissitudes of national government in Europe, has continued
+to the present time. The imperial power in the west was not abolished
+when in 476 the last Roman Emperor was deposed. On the contrary, there
+was a kind of reunion imperially of the west with the east. For a
+considerable time the tribal kings of the west received recognition from
+the eastern emperors, and were regarded as their associates in imperial
+control. This was the case even with the Saxon kings in Britain, and on
+Saxon coins may be seen to-day the same title, _basileus_ (_i.e._,
+king), as was borne by the emperors at Constantinople. Italy itself was
+wrested from the Teutons by the eastern Emperor Justinian in the sixth
+century, and remained under the Byzantine Caesars till 731.
+
+Meanwhile the Roman Senate continued to exercise its authority, and in
+800 chose the Frankish king Charlemagne as their sovereign. He was
+already ruling over the greater part of Western Europe, and was now
+crowned as Emperor at Rome by the Pope. Though his empire fell to pieces
+after his death, his dominions retained, and have since retained, their
+Roman character.
+
+Consideration of space forbids our tracing here the further continuance
+of imperialism as a factor in European politics. Recent history and
+present-day events indicate how rapidly we are approaching its final
+development at the close of the times of the Gentiles. The coming
+confederacy of European states will not result in the formation of a new
+empire, but will be the revival of the Roman in an altered form.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+THE COMING REVIVAL OF THE ROMAN EMPIRE.
+
+
+(1) _The Geographical Standpoint._
+
+The coming revival of the Roman Empire will for our present purpose be
+best considered from the geographical, political, and religious
+standpoints.
+
+
+Geographical Considerations.
+
+Any forecast of the exact delimitations of the ten kingdoms constituting
+the reconstructed Empire must necessarily be largely conjectural. That
+their aggregate area will precisely conform to that of the ancient Roman
+Empire does not necessarily follow from the fact of its revival, and
+cannot be definitely concluded from Scripture. An extension of the
+territories of the Empire in its resuscitated form would be quite
+consistent with the retention of its identity. Moreover, if Roman
+imperialism may be considered to have continued in the hands of Teutonic
+monarchs after the fall of the western part of the Empire in 476, if,
+for instance, Charles the Great, of whom we have spoken (p. 58), ruled
+as a Roman Emperor, despite the passing away of the actual Empire
+itself, then the dominions which were under the rule of these later
+monarchs may yet be found incorporated in the Empire, and so form parts
+of the ten kingdoms. In that case Germany and Holland would be included.
+Possibly, too, the Empire will embrace all the territories which
+belonged to the three which preceded it, the Grecian, Medo-Persian, and
+Chaldean. Certainly when the stone fell on the toes of the image, the
+whole image, representing these former three as well as the fourth, was
+demolished. Suggestive also in this respect is the fact that the beast
+in the vision recorded in Revelation 13. 2 was possessed of features of
+the leopard, the bear, and the lion, the same beasts which represented
+in Daniel's vision the Grecian, Medo-Persian, and Chaldean kingdoms
+(Dan. 7. 4-6), the order in Revelation 13 being inverted. While
+political characteristics are doubtless chiefly in view in these
+symbols, there may at the same time be an indication of the eventual
+incorporation of the first three empires in the fourth. It must be
+remembered, too, that the authority of the federal head of the ten
+kingdoms is to be world-wide: "There was given to him authority over
+every tribe and people and tongue and nation" (Rev. 13. 7). It is
+probable, therefore, that while the ten kingdoms will occupy a well
+defined area, their dependencies and the countries which are allied with
+them will embrace practically the remainder of the world.
+
+If, on the other hand, the Roman Empire is to be reconstructed in exact
+conformity territorially with its ancient boundaries--such a
+reconstruction is, of course, not inconceivable--we must consider what
+period of the conquests of the ancient Empire to take, whether under the
+first emperor, Augustus, or during the Apostolic Age, or later. We may,
+perhaps, be helped by the facts already mentioned, that prophecy
+relating to Gentile dominion is focussed upon the Jews and Palestine,
+and has especially in view the presence of the nation in their land.
+Now, shortly after their overthrow, in A.D. 70, their national
+recognition as possessors of the land ceased. This period, moreover,
+corresponds broadly to the close of the Apostolic Age. The dispersion of
+the Jews among the nations was completed by Adrian in the next century.
+He desolated the whole of Palestine, expelling all the remaining Jewish
+inhabitants.
+
+
+A Review of the Ancient Territories.
+
+We will therefore now review the limits of the Empire and of some of its
+provinces at that time, noticing certain circumstances of past and
+present history suggestive of future issues. In doing so we are not
+predicting that the boundaries of the revived Empire will be those of
+the ancient.
+
+Commencing with North Africa, it will be observed, on referring to the
+map, that practically the same strip of territory which belonged to the
+Roman Empire in the times of the apostles has passed directly under the
+government of countries which were themselves then within the Empire.
+For Spain rules over Morocco, France over Algeria and Tunis, Italy
+recently seized Tripoli, and Britain has, since Turkey's entrance into
+the great war, virtually taken possession of Egypt. It seems not a
+little significant that no country which was outside the limits of the
+Empire at the time under consideration has been permitted by God to
+annex these North African territories since the Saracens and the Turks
+were dispossessed of them.
+
+Passing now to Asia, the territory in that continent which belonged to
+Rome in the first century is approximately what remained to Turkey
+immediately prior to the present war. Mesopotamia and most of Armenia
+were included. The war has already seen Turkey dispossessed of portions
+of these. The downfall of the Turkish Empire would almost certainly
+involve territorial rearrangements of deepest import in the light of
+prophecy, especially as regards Palestine.
+
+
+Divisions of the Greek Empire: A Possible Renewal.
+
+The 8th chapter of Daniel apparently indicates that the Asiatic
+territories of the Empire will be divided much as they were under the
+Greeks after the death of Alexander the Great. He was obviously
+symbolised by the great horn (v. 22). The four horns which came up in
+its place (v. 8) are clearly, too, the four generals who succeeded
+Alexander, and among whom his dominions were divided, Cassander ruling
+over Macedonia and Greece, Lysimachus over part of Asia Minor and Thrace
+(the extent of the latter province was almost exactly what now belongs
+to Turkey in Europe), Seleucus over most of Syria, Palestine,
+Mesopotamia, and the east, and Ptolemy over Egypt. Next follows a
+prediction carrying us to events which are evidently yet future. It is
+said, for instance, that these events will take place "in the latter
+time of their kingdom (not, it will be observed, in the time of the four
+kings themselves who succeeded Alexander, but of the kingdoms over which
+they ruled), when the transgressors are come to the full" (v. 23). The
+expressions in this chapter, "the time of the end" (v. 17), "the latter
+time of the indignation," "the appointed time of the end" (v. 19), and
+"the latter time of their kingdom" (v. 23), all point to a period still
+future, namely, to the close of the present age. Again, in reference to
+the "king of fierce countenance," while much of the prophecy can be
+applied to Antiochus Epiphanes in the second century B.C., yet no man
+has hitherto arisen whose character and acts have been precisely those
+related in verses 9-12 and 23-25. We may also compare what is said of
+"the transgression that maketh desolate" (v. 13) with the Lord's
+prophecy concerning the abomination of desolation (Matt. 24. 15-22), a
+prophecy which also manifestly awaits fulfilment.
+
+Possibly, therefore, these Asiatic territories will be similarly divided
+in the coming time. In regard to the first of the above-mentioned four
+divisions, the recent extension of Greece to include the ancient
+province of Macedonia is remarkable. This was an outcome of the Balkan
+War of 1912. The boundaries of Greece are now approximately what they
+were under Cassander in the time of the Grecian Empire, what they were
+also later as the provinces of Macedonia and Achaia in the Roman Empire.
+There has lately, therefore, been a significant reversion to ancient
+conditions in this respect.
+
+
+Other European Territories.
+
+Coming now to the dual-monarchy of Austria-Hungary, reference to the map
+of the Roman Empire in the Apostolic Age will show that what are now
+Hungary, Transylvania, Bessarabia, and other states of the present
+monarchy were without the Roman boundaries, while Pannonia, or what is
+now Austria west of the Danube, was within; even when in the next
+century Dacia (now Transylvania, Bessarabia, &c.) was annexed, the two
+parts of the present dual kingdom were separate. The separation of
+Hungary from Austria has for a considerable time been a practical
+question of European politics, and may be hastened by present events.
+
+The northern and north-eastern boundaries of Italy embraced the Trentino
+and the peninsula of Istria. Noticeable, therefore, are the present
+efforts of Italy to acquire these very districts, efforts which seem
+likely to achieve success. Roman states north of Italy covered what are
+now Baden, Wurtemberg, Luxemberg, and a large part of Bavaria. The
+possibility of an eventual severance of these from Prussian domination
+has been much discussed of late.
+
+The Rhenish provinces of Alsace and Lorraine, originally portions of the
+Roman province of Gallia (now France), were snatched from France by
+Germany in the Franco-Prussian war of 1870-71. Their recovery is a
+supreme object of the efforts of the French in the present war, and not
+without hope of success.
+
+
+The British Empire.
+
+As to Britain, at the time under consideration the greater part of the
+island was definitely included in the Roman Empire. Ireland and most of
+Scotland were never conquered by the Romans. Should Britain form one of
+the ten kingdoms, there is nothing to show that Ireland or any other
+part of the British Empire must of necessity be absolutely separated
+from it. Self-government may yet be possessed by those territories which
+have not yet received it, and it is significant that Ireland has now
+practically obtained it. That the lands which are linked with Britain as
+dependencies, or as in possession of self-government, should remain as
+integral parts of the Empire is but consistent with the coming
+world-wide authority of the potentate who will be the federal head of
+the ten kingdoms. And that each state in the British Empire should have
+its own local government is, on the other hand, consistent with the
+establishment of a closer and complete confederacy of ten kingdoms, the
+area of which may correspond largely to that of the ancient Roman
+Empire. In contrast to the self-government of the other countries of the
+world at the coming period, the ten united kingdoms will eventually be
+absolutely under the control of the final emperor just mentioned, for
+the ten kings over these states, who receive authority as kings with
+him, will be of one mind to give their power and authority and their
+kingdom to him (Rev. 17. 12, 13, 17).
+
+What has been said of the British Empire may be true also of others of
+the ten kingdoms which have colonies or dependencies, and thus, while
+the ten kingdoms will themselves constitute an Empire, their alliances
+and treaties with other countries of the world will apparently involve
+an extension of the authority of the controlling despot "over every
+tribe and people and tongue and nation" (Rev. 13. 7). If, for instance,
+the United States of America were at that time in alliance with Britain
+(quite a possible contingency), their joint influence would probably
+extend to the whole of the American continents, which would thereby
+acknowledge his authority.
+
+We may observe, too, the way in which the continent of Africa has come
+under certain European influences in modern times. The mention of this
+is simply suggestive. That the Scripture will be absolutely fulfilled
+is beyond doubt; the exact mode of its accomplishment is known to God.
+
+
+(2) _The Political Standpoint._
+
+
+European Federation.
+
+Agencies are already at work for the establishment of a confederacy of
+European States--not the least significant of the many signs that the
+end of the age is approaching. The movement towards confederacy is
+doubtless receiving an impetus from the great upheaval in Europe. A
+circular issued in December, 1914, and distributed far and wide,
+announced the formation of a committee of influential men with the
+object of promoting a "European Federation." The circular says: "In
+sight of the present situation of ruin it ought to be the general
+opinion that a firmer economical and political tie is of utmost
+importance for all nations without exception, and that particularly for
+Europe the narrower bond of a federation, based on equality and interior
+independence of all partaking states, is of urgent necessity, which
+public opinion ought to demand."
+
+A pamphlet published by the Committee recommends that the union of
+states shall be economical, political, and legal, with an international
+army as a common guarantee, and that European Federation should become
+the principal and most urgent political battle-cry for the masses of all
+European nations, and declares that "when the Governments are willing,
+when the public opinion of all peoples forces them to be willing, there
+is no doubt but that a reasonable and practical union of nations will
+prove to be as possible and natural as is at present a union of
+provinces, cantons, territories, whose populations often show more
+difference of race and character than those of nations now at
+hostilities." The Committee calls upon the peoples of Europe to suffer
+the diplomatists no longer to dispose of them like slaves and by
+militarism to lash them to fury against each other. It calls upon them
+to see to it that never and nowhere should a member of any body or
+Government be elected who is not an advocate of the Federation, and that
+the trade union, society, or club to which any individual belongs should
+express sympathy with the movement in meetings and in votes. "The
+people," it is said, "have it now in their power, more than ever before,
+to control the Powers."
+
+
+Two Possible Ways of Federation.
+
+The formation of ten federated states, covering at least the area of the
+ancient Empire at the end of the first century of the present era, may
+be effected in two ways, either by the peaceful methods of arbitration
+and treaty, or as a result of strife and confusion. That the present
+European War will be succeeded by efforts for the creation of permanent
+international harmony and universal peace is probable, as is also some
+attempt at such a federation as is proposed by the above-mentioned
+Committee. On the other hand, sinister indications abound to-day which
+point to industrial strife and revolution rather than peace. The
+condition of the industrial world presents a gloomy prospect indeed.
+There are ominous signs of keener conflict than ever between capital and
+labour. The forces of Socialism, Syndicalism, Communism, &c., are
+rapidly increasing in power and in international activity, and their
+avowed aims presage anything but peace in the near future. We may take,
+for example, the declared objects of "The Alliance of the Social
+Democracy"--now incorporated in the International Working Men's
+Association--"To destroy all States and all Churches with all their
+institutions and laws, religious, political, juridical, financial,
+magisterial, academical, economical, and social, and to establish in
+their place industrial co-operation and collective ownership of land and
+capital." All this sounds very pretentious, and would probably fail of
+complete accomplishment, but the agencies at work for it are strong.
+Attempts on a large scale would certainly lead to unprecedented disorder
+and chaos.
+
+
+The Sea Symbolic of National Unrest.
+
+Not improbably the ten kingdoms of the reconstructed Roman Empire will
+arise as a result of political and social confusion. Thus it was in the
+case of the French Revolution and the consequent uprising of Napoleon. A
+repetition of such events on a far wider scale in the future is quite
+conceivable. In the prophetic vision given to the Apostle John, the
+beast was seen "coming up out of the sea" (Rev. 13. 1). Now the sea is
+in Scripture used figuratively of the nations, its characteristic
+restlessness symbolising their commotion and strife. Compare the words
+of Isaiah: "Ah, the uproar of many peoples, which roar like the roaring
+of the seas; and the rushing of nations, that rush like the rushing of
+many waters! The nations shall rush like the rushing of many waters: but
+He shall rebuke them" (Isa. 17. 12, 13; see also Psa. 65. 7; and Ezek.
+26. 3). To national unrest the Lord Jesus applied similar language when
+He foretold to the disciples that there would be "upon the earth
+distress of nations, in perplexity for the roaring of the sea and the
+billows; men fainting for fear, and for expectation of the things which
+are coming on the world" (Luke 21. 25, 26). So also the waters which
+John had seen in his vision are described by the angel as "peoples, and
+multitudes, and nations, and tongues" (Rev. 17. 15). Daniel, too, saw
+the four great beasts come up from the sea as a result of the breaking
+forth of the four winds of the Heaven upon it, an undoubted
+representation of a condition of national disturbance (Dan. 7. 2, 3).
+That the beast of Revelation 13. 1 was seen coming up out of the sea
+points, therefore, to the probability that the ten kings who will have
+brief authority over the revived Empire will be raised to their kingdom,
+not by constitutional methods, but as the result of revolutions and the
+collapse of present-day governments and institutions.
+
+
+Revolutions and their Issues.
+
+Should any great measure of success attend the syndicalist and communist
+movements of the day, and especially if they are internationalised, the
+inevitable revolutions and disorder would almost certainly issue, as
+revolutions have so frequently issued, in despotism and autocracy, and
+perhaps in this way the ten kings would arise. The overthrow of the
+governments in the countries involved would remove what has certainly
+been the great restraint upon lawlessness[A] from the times of the
+apostles until now. Everything would be ripe for the appearance of a
+universal potentate. The cry would arise for "a man," a controlling
+organiser to bring order out of chaos. The unstable character of the
+rule of the ten kings, and the impoverishment of their kingdoms, would
+lead them, as a matter of diplomacy, to hand over their authority to
+him.
+
+  [A] See "The Epistles to the Thessalonians, with Notes Exegetical and
+  Expository," by C. F. Hogg and W. E. Vine, note _c._ pp. 259, 260.
+  (Glasgow: Pickering & Inglis. 3/9, p.f.)
+
+
+The Iron and the Clay.
+
+The political constitution of the successive empires during "the time of
+the Gentiles" was indicated in the image of Nebuchadnezzar's vision by
+the various substances of which the parts of the image were composed.
+While the regular deterioration in the relative value of these
+substances is noticeable, we are concerned now with those of the legs
+and feet. The legs were of iron, and the feet part of iron and part of
+potter's clay, not moist or miry clay, but "earthenware" (Dan. 2. 41,
+R.V., margin), and consequently brittle (v. 42, margin).
+
+That the iron symbolised militarism seems clear from what is said of the
+fourth kingdom, that "as iron breaketh in pieces and subdueth all
+things: and as iron that crusheth all these, shall it break in pieces
+and crush" (v. 40). Nations are broken and crushed by military power,
+and thus the nations were treated by the Romans. This was further
+signified by the iron teeth of the fourth beast, as is definitely stated
+in Daniel 7. 19, 23: "And shall devour the whole earth, and shall tread
+it down, and break it in pieces."
+
+The supposition that the clay represents democracy is gratuitous and
+arbitrary. The early Roman Empire, symbolised by the legs of the image,
+was built up under democratic rule. When republicanism was superseded
+by imperialism, democratic principles still prevailed. Democracy,
+therefore, played its part from the very commencement of the fourth
+kingdom, and had it been symbolised by the clay, not only the feet and
+toes but the legs themselves would have consisted of mingled iron and
+clay. Moreover, democracy in the generally accepted sense of the term
+has not always been found to be of an unstable or brittle character;
+witness the republicanism of the United States. Democracies, too, may be
+established on strictly constitutional principles.
+
+Another explanation, therefore, of the symbolism of the clay must be
+sought, and it is not unlikely to be found in those revolutionary
+principles to which we have already referred, which were evidenced at
+the time of the French Revolution, and are finding expression, though in
+greater variety to-day, in such projects as those of the International
+Working Men's Association. Certainly the masses of the people of Europe
+are being permeated both by militarism and by the revolutionary
+doctrines of which we have spoken. Should these principles spread among
+the civil services and forces, everything would be in a complete state
+of preparedness for Unprecedented Political and Social Upheaval
+
+which would effect the overthrow of present forms of government. From
+the world's point of view the situation would require a consummate
+genius with powers of world-wide organisation. Doubtless Satan's
+masterpiece of infidel ingenuity would be at hand for the occasion.
+
+We are not predicting that this is to be the manner of the revival of
+the Empire and of the advent of its imperial head. We have merely
+suggested possible circumstances in the light of Scripture and
+present-day movements. The actual circumstances attending the rise of
+the ten kings and their Emperor must for the time remain conjectural.
+Certainly these kings will receive authority with him for one hour (Rev.
+17. 12), a phrase which may be translated "at the same time;" and
+certainly they will agree to give their power and authority to him (v.
+13).
+
+(3) _The Religious Standpoint._
+
+We will now note the religious conditions which are to prevail for a
+time upon the resuscitation of the Empire. These are plainly indicated
+for us in Revelation 17. The apostle sees a woman sitting on the
+seven-headed and ten-horned beast. The woman is gorgeously arrayed,
+holds in her hand a golden cup full of abominations, and is drunken with
+the blood of the saints. Her name, written on her forehead, is
+
+
+"Mystery, Babylon the Great,"
+
+"the mother of the harlots and of the abominations of the earth" (vv.
+3-6). The woman is symbolically described as the city of Rome (v. 18),
+and that leads on to a second mention of Babylon, in chapter 18, and a
+new description. Now to the description of the woman in chapter 17
+nothing more closely corresponds than the Papacy. But if the Babylon of
+chapter 17 is to be identified with that of chapter 18, the Papacy
+answers to the whole description only to a limited extent. While,
+however, there is much in common in the two descriptions in these
+chapters, yet the two Babylons are possibly to be distinguished. The
+Babylon of chapter 17 is a "mystery," not so that of chapter 18. Again,
+the destruction of the one is different from that of the other. The
+first will be destroyed by the ten kings and their emperor (17. 16), the
+second by the direct judgment of God (18. 5, 8, 20); the first as the
+result of human antagonism, the second by famine, fire and earthquake.
+We are perhaps, therefore, justified in taking the more limited view in
+connection with the circumstances of chapter 17. Even so the woman may
+be regarded as representing the apostate sacerdotal systems which have
+sprung from the Papacy as well as that system itself.
+
+The position of the woman indicates an exercise of power which is
+voluntarily supported by the beast. That she sits upon the waters
+implies her religious dominion over the nations; that she is carried by
+the beast, who rules over the nations politically, implies that there
+will be a complete alliance between her and the ten kings with their
+chief, and that the sphere of her influence will be co-extensive with
+the dominions of the beast.
+
+
+The Papacy: Its Present Power.
+
+Now though the Papacy lost its temporal power in 1870, it is far from
+having lost its political influence. Ecclesiastically, too, though it
+has received various set-backs, it is manifestly gaining power. This is
+especially observable, for example, in Britain, the overthrow of which
+as a Protestant Power is undoubtedly the object of the persistent
+aggressiveness of Romanism. This aggressiveness is manifest in all the
+dominions of the British Empire, as well as in other lands.
+
+Again, while certain governments have of late shaken off the
+ecclesiastical yoke, and infidelity has spread among the people of Roman
+Catholic lands, the number of Roman Catholics has increased with great
+rapidity. They were estimated at somewhat over 200,000,000 twenty years
+ago, they are now said to number about 300,000,000.
+
+Indications are not wanting of a tendency towards
+
+
+A Reunion of Christendom,
+
+which would be facilitated by a willingness on the part of the Papacy to
+adapt itself to the impulse of the time.
+
+Present events, therefore, point to a great renewal of Papal power
+involving the fulfilment of the prophecy relating to the woman and the
+beast that carries her. This renewed alliance between the political and
+the ecclesiastical powers will, however, be of brief duration. The
+successful efforts of governments in recent times to liberate themselves
+from Papal authority, as in the case of France and Portugal, are but
+foreshadowings of the eventual entire destruction of ecclesiasticism and
+sacerdotalism under the revived Roman Empire. "The ten horns ... and the
+beast, these shall hate the harlot, and shall make her desolate and
+naked, and shall eat her flesh, and shall burn her utterly with fire"
+(Rev. 17. 16). Thus it would seem that, when at the very zenith of its
+power and ambition, the Papacy, at the head of amalgamated Christendom,
+will suddenly meet its doom.
+
+
+The Doom of Religious Babylon.
+
+Its accumulated wealth would probably be an incentive in determining the
+ten kings to take this step, owing possibly to the impoverishment of
+their kingdoms as a result of wars and political and social upheavals.
+An additional cause will doubtless be the widespread spirit of
+antagonism against all religion.
+
+Submission to the Papal yoke has invariably had an aftermath of
+infidelity; similarly the temporary subservience of the beast to the
+woman will issue in the casting off of all religious restraint and in
+the universal acknowledgment of the presumptuous claims of the
+world-ruler.
+
+
+Satanic Authority of the Emperor.
+
+The authority of this final emperor of the Roman kingdom will be
+Satanic. "The dragon gave him his power, and his throne, and great
+authority" (Rev. 13. 2); "the beast ... was, and is not; and is about to
+come up out of the abyss, and to go into perdition" (Rev. 17. 8). This
+implies that he has been on the earth in the past. The same thing is
+indicated in the interpretation of the seven heads. Topographically they
+are described as seven mountains, personally as seven kings (v. 9). Of
+these, five had fallen, the sixth was in power in John's time, the
+seventh had not then come (v. 10). The beast (clearly here symbolising,
+not a kingdom, but a person) would be an eighth, and yet would be of the
+seven (v. 11). These heads have been regarded by some as forms of
+government, by others as empires, or again, as emperors. There seems to
+be no reason why they are not to be regarded as emperors, though
+doubtless their empires are in view, as being associated with them.
+Accordingly, the fact that the eighth is also one of the seven indicates
+his reappearance on the scene. Various suggestions have been made as to
+his identification, but this must remain uncertain until his advent.
+With him the ten kings for a time receive authority (v. 12),
+subsequently handing it over to him with their kingdom (v. 17), but not
+before they have together with him crushed the great religious system
+symbolised by the woman (v. 16). His stupendous power and brilliant
+abilities, the evidence of his superhuman origin, his phenomenal
+capacity for organisation, and the consolidation of the empire under his
+absolute control will cause the whole world to marvel at him (Rev. 13.
+3; 17. 8). To the world, in its divinely inflicted and therefore
+retributive delusion, he will appear like a god who has come to deliver
+from woe, and to introduce the long-looked-for age of peace and
+prosperity. Wonder will be succeeded by worship, both of the man and of
+Satan. "They worshipped the dragon, because he gave his authority unto
+the beast; and they worshipped the beast, saying, Who is like unto the
+beast? and who is able to war with him?" (13. 4).
+
+The world is now in course of rapid preparation for all this:
+
+
+The "Superman"
+
+has of late become a much discussed topic in various classes of society
+and in the press, and the idea is supported by the theories of
+evolution which are receiving increasingly wide acceptance. A spirit of
+expectancy is being thus aroused which will undoubtedly facilitate the
+recognition of the man himself at his advent, and the acknowledgment of
+his claims to divine honour. But this will involve the worship of Satan,
+and to this end the effective agency of
+
+
+Spiritism
+
+has been long at work. Spiritism leads to devil worship. It must do so;
+its energising power is Satan himself. Both spiritism and theosophy, and
+similar forms of error, all of which are rapidly on the increase to-day,
+are paving the way for world-wide worship of the dragon.
+
+The imperial power and worship of this emperor will be promoted by
+another potentate similarly energised by Satan. This latter is the
+second beast, described in Revelation 13. 11-end. Later on in the book
+he is called
+
+
+The False Prophet
+
+(Rev. 16. 13; 19. 20; 20. 10), indicating that his activities are
+chiefly of a religious character, and perhaps that he will be more
+closely connected with Jewish affairs. He will make "the earth and them
+that dwell therein worship the beast," the emperor of the ten kingdoms
+(13. 11), deceiving the world by supernatural signs wrought in the
+presence of the first beast (v. 12), and enforcing the worship of his
+image (v. 15), the abomination of desolation set up in the temple at
+Jerusalem (Matt. 24. 15). With the worship of an image the times of the
+Gentiles began (Dan. 3. 1), and with similar idolatry they will end. In
+the days of the early Roman emperors their deification was celebrated by
+the adoration of their images. Then, as formerly under Nebuchadnezzar,
+those who refused to worship suffered death. So will it be under the
+final emperor and his colleague.
+
+Various opinions are held regarding these two beasts of Revelation 13,
+as to which is the Man of Sin spoken of by Paul in 2 Thessalonians 2,
+which the Antichrist mentioned in John's Epistles, and which of the two
+is the wilful king described in Daniel 11. Limitations of space preclude
+our entering into the subject in detail here. The present writer holds
+the view that all three are the same person, and that they are also the
+same as the horn in Daniel 7. 8, 11, and as the first beast of
+Revelation 13, and that these are all different descriptions of the
+final head of the revived Empire. The Old Testament passages somewhat
+briefly announce the arising of this world-wide ruler; the New Testament
+passages unfold and expand the preceding predictions concerning him,
+among the additional details given in the New Testament being the fact
+that he is to have a prophet who will assiduously support his claim to
+deity and his administration. It is the world-emperor, and not his
+prophet, who is to be worshipped, and who therefore proclaims himself as
+God (2 Thess. 2. 4). His prophet, the second beast of Revelation 13, in
+the exercise of all the power of the first, will cause the world to
+worship him (13. 12). As his prophet and prime minister he would not
+himself endeavour to usurp the position of him whose avowed deity he
+seeks to support.
+
+The similarity of the details in the above-mentioned passages indicates
+that the same person is in view in each case. His blasphemies, for
+instance, and his assumption of deity are mentioned in Daniel 7. 25; 11.
+36, 37; 2 Thessalonians 2. 3, 4, and Revelation 13. 5, 6, and his war
+with the saints in Daniel 7. 21, 25 and Revelation 13. 7. Further, the
+blasphemous proclamation of himself as God is consistent with what is
+said in John's Epistles concerning the Antichrist. For in his
+self-deification he is directly "antagonistic to Christ," he denies that
+Jesus is the Christ, and therefore denies the Father and the Son (1 John
+2. 22).
+
+The two potentates will establish not only a universal religion, but
+also a
+
+
+Universal System of Commerce.
+
+The second beast "causeth all, the small and the great, and the rich and
+the poor, and the free and the bond, that there be given them a mark on
+their hand, or upon their forehead; and that no man should be able to
+buy or to sell, save he that hath the mark, even the name of the beast
+or the number of his name" (Rev. 13. 16, 17). This indicates a
+world-wide protectionist system, such a system as, for instance, might
+conceivably be established under some form of syndicalism. Undeniably,
+circumstances in the industrial world to-day manifest an increasing
+tendency in this direction. The principles previously mentioned, as now
+making for industrial and international revolution, and the present
+stupendous movements towards amalgamation, are clearly preparing for
+the fulfilment of this prophecy by facilitating the eventual
+establishment of the unrighteous commercial system of the reconstituted
+Empire.
+
+[Illustration: Palestine, to illustrate Psalm 29.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+THE EVERLASTING KINGDOM.
+
+
+We have now to consider the dealings of the two beasts, the final Roman
+emperor and his false prophet, with
+
+
+The Jews.
+
+With the Romans the Jews joined in the death of Christ, and with the
+rulers of this fourth empire they will be in agreement for a time at the
+close of their long course of apostasy. This was especially made known
+to Daniel in the prophecy of
+
+
+The Seventy Weeks
+
+(Dan. 9). These weeks (lit., _hebdomads_, or periods of seven, _i.e._,
+seven years each) had been divinely decreed (or "cut off," _i.e._, from
+the period of "the times of the Gentiles") upon his people and his city.
+From the going forth of the commandment to restore and to build
+Jerusalem unto the Anointed One (the Messiah), the Prince, would be
+seven weeks and threescore and two weeks. After this the Anointed One
+would be cut off, and would have nothing (Dan. 9. 24-26). This period is
+69 times 7, or 483 years, and to the very day this was the period
+commencing with the command of Artaxerxes Longimanus, King of Persia,
+for the restoration of Jerusalem (Neh. 2. 1-9), and ending with the
+triumphal entry of Christ into the city (Matt. 21. 1-11).[B] Four days
+later He was crucified, "the Anointed One was cut off and had nothing,"
+_i.e._, He did not enter then upon His Messianic kingdom. The prophecy
+predicted that the people of the prince (lit., "a prince") that would
+come would destroy the city and the sanctuary. That took place in A.D.
+70, under Titus Vespasianus. But Titus is not "the prince that shall
+come." This, apart from other considerations, is clear from what
+follows: "And his (the prince's) end shall be with a flood (or rather,
+'in the overflowing,' _i.e._, of the wrath of God)," a prediction at
+once inapplicable to Titus. The mention of
+
+
+The Last "Week"
+
+is deferred, indicating an interval between the sixty-ninth and the
+seventieth. Now the events predicted for the seventieth had no
+historical fulfilment immediately after the sixty-ninth. The one,
+therefore, did not follow the other consecutively. At the commencement
+of the intervening period the Jews were scattered from their land. At
+the seventieth they will have been restored, and the events of that week
+concern "the prince that shall come," the last world-emperor, and his
+dealings with them. "He shall make a firm covenant with many (lit., 'the
+many,' _i.e._, the great majority of the nation) for one week" (v. 27).
+This covenant is described in Isaiah's prophecies as a "covenant with
+death" and an "agreement with Hell." The covenant, he says, "shall be
+disannulled," and the agreement "shall not stand; when the overflowing
+scourge shall pass through, then ye shall be trodden down by it" (Isa.
+28. 18). That this refers to a time yet future and not to past
+Israelitic history may be gathered from verse 22, where the theme and
+the language are similar to those of the passage in Daniel now under
+consideration. Daniel tells us the mode of the disannulling. "In the
+midst of the week (R.V., margin) he shall cause the sacrifice and
+oblation to cease." Accordingly after three and a half years the
+Antichrist, manifesting his real character, will prove himself a traitor
+and break the covenant, and thus Isaiah's prediction will be fulfilled.
+
+  [B] See "The Coming Prince," by Sir Robert Anderson. Price, 5/.
+
+Apparently at the very time when he thus breaks his league with the Jews
+the Antichrist will determine upon his public deification and the
+establishment of his worship in the Temple. For he it is who "opposeth
+and exalteth himself above all that is called God, or that is
+worshipped; so that he as God sitteth in the Temple of God, showing
+himself that he is God" (2 Thess. 2. 4). This, with the setting up of
+his image, will doubtless be the fulfilment of the prophecies recorded
+by Daniel, that "upon the wing (or pinnacle) of abominations shall come
+one that maketh desolate" (Dan. 9. 27, cp. 11. 31 and 12. 11), and "they
+shall profane the sanctuary, even the fortress, and shall take away the
+continual burnt offering, and they shall set up the abomination that
+maketh desolate" (11. 31, cp. 12. 11); a fulfilment also of the Lord's
+prediction that "the abomination of desolation, which was spoken of by
+Daniel the prophet," will "stand in the holy place" (Matt. 24. 15). In
+the establishment of this blasphemous worship of the emperor, the false
+prophet will play a prominent part, as we have seen from the latter part
+of Revelation 13.
+
+The many references to the desolator and the desolations are indicative
+of the
+
+
+Fierce Persecution
+
+which will follow. This will be at first directed against "the remnant,"
+the large numbers of Jews who will repudiate allegiance to the beast and
+to the false prophet, many doubtless having been converted to their
+coming Messiah through the testimony of two witnesses who will be sent
+from God to the nation. "They shall prophesy a thousand two hundred and
+threescore days, clothed in sackcloth" (Rev. 11. 3-13). The success of
+their ministry will apparently arouse the bitter antagonism of Satan and
+his human instruments. The breaking of the covenant with the people as a
+whole indicates that an effort will also be made to crush the entire
+nation. Thus the latter half of the seventieth week will be the time of
+"Jacob's trouble," "a time of trouble, such as never was since there was
+a nation even to that same time" (Dan. 12. 1), though the unprecedented
+tribulation will not be confined to the Jews only.
+
+
+Armageddon and After.
+
+The bitter antagonism of the man of sin, and his colleague, the false
+prophet, against God and His people will culminate in the gathering
+together of all the forces of the Empire in Palestine in final conflict
+for the complete domination of the world. This tremendous event is thus
+indicated by the apostle John: "And I saw coming out of the mouth of the
+dragon, and out of the mouth of the beast, and out of the mouth of the
+false prophet, three unclean spirits, as it were frogs: for they are the
+spirits of devils (correctly, "demons"), working signs; which go forth
+unto the kings of the whole world, to gather them together unto the war
+of the great day of God, the Almighty" (Rev. 16. 13, 14).
+
+In reality the issue at stake will be the supremacy of Christ or of
+Satan in the earth. The objective will be neither territorial conquest
+nor naval supremacy, nor commercial predominance. The war of the beast
+and the ten kings under him is against the Lamb (Rev. 17. 14). This the
+second Psalm had foretold: "Why do the nations rage, and the peoples
+imagine a vain thing? The kings of the earth set themselves, and the
+rulers take counsel together against the Lord, and against His Anointed,
+saying, Let us break their bands asunder, and cast away their cords from
+us." The issue is not uncertain: "He that sitteth in the Heavens shall
+laugh: the Lord shall have them in derision."
+
+
+The Scene of the Conflict
+
+is Har-Magedon, commonly known as Armageddon (Rev. 16. 16). The name,
+which is associated with Megiddo, a locality famed in Old Testament
+history for its decisive battles (Judges 5. 19; 2 Kings 23), doubtless
+stands here for a wider area, stretching, as we shall see, from the
+north to the south of the land.
+
+The combatants, the conflict and its conclusion, are described by John
+in vivid language of terrible grandeur in Revelation 19. 11-21: "And I
+saw the Heaven opened; and behold, a white horse, and He that sat
+thereon, called Faithful and True; and in righteousness He doth judge
+and make war. And His eyes are a flame of fire, and upon his head are
+many diadems; and He hath a name written, which no one knoweth but He
+Himself. And He is arrayed in a garment sprinkled with blood: and His
+name is called the Word of God. And the armies which are in Heaven
+followed Him upon white horses, clothed in fine linen, white and pure.
+And out of His mouth proceedeth a sharp sword, that with it He should
+smite the nations: and He shall rule them with a rod of iron: and He
+treadeth the winepress of the fierceness of the wrath of Almighty God.
+And He hath on His garment and on His thigh a name written, KING OF
+KINGS, AND LORD OF LORDS.
+
+"And I saw an angel standing in the sun; and he cried with a loud voice,
+saying to all the birds that fly in mid heaven, Come and be gathered
+together unto the great supper of God; that ye may eat the flesh of
+kings, and the flesh of captains, and the flesh of mighty men, and the
+flesh of horses and of them that sit thereon, and the flesh of all men,
+both free and bond, and small and great.
+
+"And I saw the beast, and the kings of the earth, and their armies,
+gathered together to make war against Him that sat upon the horse, and
+against His army. And the beast was taken, and with him the false
+prophet that wrought the signs in his sight, wherewith he deceived them
+that had received the mark of the beast, and them that worshipped his
+image: they twain were cast alive into the lake of fire that burneth
+with brimstone: and the rest were killed with the sword of Him that sat
+upon the horse, even the sword which came forth out of His mouth: and
+all the birds were filled with their flesh" (Rev. 19. 11-21). Ezekiel
+similarly describes the scene in his prophecy in chapter 30. 17-21.
+
+Thus it is that the climax of the world's rebellion against God is to
+meet its doom. This is the manner of the overthrow of the ten-kingdomed
+empire, the fourth of Daniel's visions. Accordingly, what we have now
+read from Revelation 19 is identical with (1) the falling of the stone
+upon the feet of the image in Nebuchadnezzar's vision, the annihilation
+of all Gentile government (Dan. 2. 45); (2) the consuming of the
+dominion of the fourth beast in Daniel's subsequent vision (Dan. 7. 26);
+(3) the pouring out of God's wrath upon the Antichrist, the desolator
+(Dan. 9. 27); and (4) the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of
+Heaven with power and great glory (Matt. 24. 30). The great emperor, the
+man of sin, is to be crushed by the Lord Jesus, "with the breath of His
+mouth," and brought to nought "by the manifestation of His coming" (2
+Thess. 2. 8).
+
+Now this "manifestation of His coming" is, to transliterate the Greek
+words,
+
+
+The Epiphany of His Parousia.
+
+An epiphany is, literally, the 'shining forth' of that which has been
+hidden; and the word Parousia is, literally, 'presence' (see margin of
+R.V. and Phil. 2. 12). This latter word is used of the coming of Christ
+to the air for His saints, 'to receive them unto Himself,' and of their
+consequent presence with Him (1 Thess. 2. 19). They are thus to be "ever
+with the Lord" (1 Thess. 4. 17), and with Him they will come when He
+descends at His revelation "from Heaven with the angels of His power in
+flaming fire, rendering vengeance to them that know not God, and to them
+that obey not the Gospel of our Lord Jesus" (2 Thess. 1. 7, 8). The
+sudden bursting forth of His glory thus "to execute judgment" (Jude 15)
+will be the 'Epiphany, or shining forth, of His Parousia,' and by it the
+Man of Sin is to be brought to nought and his empire demolished. He and
+his false prophet will be "cast alive into the lake of fire," and his
+armies will perish (Rev. 19. 20, 21).
+
+This is to be the issue of the world's attempts to establish a
+millennium of its own by schemes of federation and amalgamation. This
+is the upshot of its fancied progress and improvement without God and
+His Christ.
+
+We must now see what other Scriptures have to say concerning this scene.
+The instrument which the Lord uses for the destruction of His foes is a
+sword which proceeds _out of His mouth_; the destruction is described as
+the treading of the winepress.
+
+
+The Voice of the Lord.
+
+First, as to the instrument. The sword is symbolic of the utterance of
+the Lord's voice. No material instrument is needed, a word is enough.
+This is clear from many passages. In the second Psalm the overthrow of
+the foe is thus described: "Then shall He _speak_ unto them in His
+wrath, and vex them in His sore displeasure" (v. 5). Joel prophesies of
+the same event: "The sun and the moon are darkened, and the stars
+withdraw their shining: and the Lord _uttereth His voice_ before His
+army; for His camp is very great; for He is strong that executeth His
+word: for the day of the Lord is great and very terrible; and who can
+abide it?" (Joel 2. 10, 11; and see 3. 16. With this compare Isa. 11. 4
+and 30. 30-33.) The same voice of judgment is implied in Paul's
+prediction of the doom of the lawless one, that "the Lord Jesus will
+slay him _with the breath of His mouth_" (2 Thess. 2. 8). In the same
+connection we are doubtless to read Psalm 29, the Psalm which describes
+the terrible majesty and effect of the _voice of the Lord_.
+
+We must presently dwell more fully upon this Psalm in order to observe
+its application to the circumstances under consideration, and its
+connection with the passages which describe the judgment of the foe as
+
+
+The Treading of the Winepress.
+
+These passages are Isaiah 63. 1-6; Joel 9. 16; Revelation 14. 17-20, and
+the one already quoted in Revelation 19. It is observable, too, that in
+the first of these the voice of the Lord is mentioned again, for the
+Deliverer describes Himself as "I that _speak in righteousness_."
+
+We shall first refer to Revelation 14. 17-20. Two angels appear coming
+forth, the one from the temple in Heaven with a sickle in his hand, the
+other from the altar. The latter calls to the one with the sickle to
+gather "the clusters of the vine of the earth," symbolic of the Man of
+Sin and his gathered armies. The angel then casts his sickle into the
+earth, gathers the vintage, and casts it into the winepress of the wrath
+of God. The winepress is "trodden without the city," and "there came out
+blood from the winepress, even unto the bridles of the horses, as far as
+a thousand and six hundred furlongs" (_i.e._, 200 miles). The great
+emperor and his prophet, and their vast forces, will thus be gathered in
+dense battle array throughout the length of Palestine, Jerusalem being
+their objective. Joel calls the scene of the battle "the Valley of
+Decision." "Come, tread ye," says the prophet, "for the winepress is
+full, the fats overflow; for their wickedness is great. Multitudes,
+multitudes in the valley of decision! for the day of the Lord is near in
+the valley of decision" (Joel 3. 13, 14). The multitudes are the forces
+of the Man of Sin.
+
+The first six verses of Isaiah 63 narrate in the form of a dialogue
+
+
+The Overthrow of the Man of Sin
+
+and his forces. The dialogue is between Messiah the Deliverer and the
+Jews. Having just overthrown the foe in the treading of the winepress,
+and the armies of the Empire being destroyed throughout the battle line
+from the north of the land to the south, the Messiah, in the fruits of
+His victory, reveals Himself to His astonished earthly people. In
+wondering admiration they exclaim: "Who is this that cometh from Edom,
+with dyed garments from Bozrah? this that is glorious, marching in the
+greatness of His strength?" To this their Deliverer answers, "I that
+_speak in righteousness_, mighty to save." The significance of this is
+at once apparent to the reader who calls to mind the various passages
+mentioned above in reference to the voice of the Lord. "I that speak in
+righteousness"--this is the voice uttered before His army (Joel 2. 10),
+"the sword that proceedeth out of His mouth" (Rev. 19. 15); the "breath
+of His mouth," by which the Man of Sin is crushed (2 Thess. 2. 8), and
+the "voice" of Psalm 29.
+
+The people, struck by the appearance of the Victor, next ask: "Wherefore
+art Thou red in Thine apparel, and Thy garments like him that treadeth
+in the winefat?" The language is doubtless symbolic. Messiah explains in
+reply how the threatening foes have been crushed: "I have trodden the
+winepress alone; and of the peoples there was no man with Me: yea, I
+trod them in Mine anger, and trampled them in My fury; and their
+lifeblood is sprinkled upon My garments, and I have stained all My
+raiment. For the day of vengeance was in Mine heart, and the year of My
+redeemed is come. And I looked, and there was none to help; and I
+wondered that there was none to uphold: therefore Mine own arm brought
+salvation unto Me; and My fury, it upheld Me. And I trod down the
+peoples in Mine anger, and made them drunk in My fury, and I poured out
+their lifeblood on the earth" (vv. 3-6). The words of a previous
+prophecy express the joyful recognition of the delivered nation: "And it
+shall be said in that day, Lo, this is our God; we have waited for Him,
+and He will save us: this is the Lord; we have waited for Him, we will
+be glad and rejoice in His salvation" (Isa. 25. 9).
+
+Turning now to Psalm 29 we find
+
+
+The Scene of Judgment
+
+strikingly depicted; the very length of the battle line is indicated, in
+agreement with the later and clearer description in Revelation 20. 14.
+Indeed, the passages which foretell the events of this coming terrible
+day afford a remarkable illustration of the progressive character of the
+revelations of Scripture. The Psalm is divided into three parts: (1)
+The first three verses are a call to the saints in Heaven, the "sons of
+the mighty," to worship the Lord in view of the judgment He is just
+about to execute for the deliverance of His people the Jews, their land
+and their city. (2) The second part, verses 3-9, describes the actual
+judgment by means of "the voice of the Lord." The psalmist was doubtless
+thinking of a thunderstorm. The Spirit of God was giving prophetic
+utterance concerning a more terrible scene, and the geographical
+limitations of the Psalm are of prophetic import. The first place
+mentioned is Lebanon, in the north, with its mountain-spur Sirion (vv.
+5, 6). The last place is the wilderness of Kadesh, in the south, the
+centre of which is Bozrah, in Edom (v. 8), a point of connection with
+Isaiah 63. 1. Now the distance from Sirion to Bozrah, in the wilderness
+of Kadesh, is 200 miles, and this is the 1600 furlongs of Revelation
+14.20. Here, then, in one fell stroke of divine wrath the Man of Sin and
+his forces are overthrown, and the Jews are delivered. The later
+revelations of Scripture thus enable us to pass from the natural and
+physical setting of the Psalm to the veiled reality. Thus this portion
+of the Psalm is to be read in connection with the passage from
+Revelation 19 quoted above. (3) The last two verses describe the results
+of the conquest.
+
+
+The Jews in their Extremity
+
+were threatened with annihilation. But man's extremity is God's
+opportunity. The people now see their Deliverer in person, they "look on
+Him whom they pierced." They realise that their enemies were destroyed
+because "the Lord sat as King at the flood." And now "the Lord sitteth
+as King for ever." He whose right it is to reign has come to Zion. Hence
+the psalmist can next say: "The Lord will give strength unto His people;
+the Lord will bless His people with peace." Armageddon is over, the
+winepress of God's wrath has been trodden, and the war against the Lamb
+is ended. Psalm 30 follows on with the people's song of praise for
+deliverance.
+
+The judgments of God in the earth will be accompanied by
+
+
+Seismic Disturbances,
+
+including "a great earthquake such as was not since there were men upon
+the earth," the overthrow of the cities of the nations, and the
+displacement of islands and mountains (Rev. 16. 18-21). Then doubtless
+will be fulfilled the prophecy of Zechariah, that in the day when the
+Lord goes forth to fight against the nations that are gathered against
+Jerusalem, His feet will stand upon the Mount of Olives, and the
+mountain will be divided, leaving a very great valley east of the city
+(Zech. 14. 1-5).
+
+
+The Everlasting Kingdom.
+
+In this tremendous intervention in the affairs of the world for the
+termination of Gentile dominion the Son of God will be accompanied by
+all His saints. He will come "to be glorified in His saints, and to be
+marvelled at in all them that believed" (2 Thess. 1. 10). So from
+earliest times Enoch had prophesied: "Behold, the Lord came with His
+holy myriads, to execute judgment upon all" (Jude 14, 15, margin). And
+Zechariah: "The Lord my God shall come, and all the saints with Thee"
+(14. 5). They are to take an active part in the inauguration of His
+Kingdom, and in its government. For "the saints of the Most High shall
+receive the Kingdom, and possess the Kingdom for ever, even for ever and
+ever" (Dan. 7. 18). "The Kingdom and the dominion, and the greatness of
+the Kingdoms under the whole Heaven, shall be given to the people of the
+saints of the Most High" (v. 27).
+
+Then shall the Lord "be King over all the earth" (Zech. 14. 9). God's
+claims will be vindicated. His Christ will reign as King of
+Righteousness, and King of Peace, the centre of His government being the
+very place where once He was despised and rejected, and men cast Him out
+and crucified Him. Of the increase of His government and of peace there
+shall be no end, upon the throne of David, and upon His Kingdom, to
+establish it, and to uphold it with judgment and with righteousness from
+henceforth even for ever. The zeal of the Lord of hosts shall perform
+this (Isa. 9. 7). His saints "shall be priests of God and of Christ, and
+shall reign with Him a thousand years" (Rev. 20. 6). Then will be
+fulfilled the words of the Lord, "I am returned unto Zion, and will
+dwell in the midst of Jerusalem: and Jerusalem shall be called the city
+of truth; and the mountain of the Lord of hosts the holy mountain"
+(Zech. 8. 3). The days of Israel's mourning will be ended, the nation
+will be a "crown of beauty in the hand of the Lord, and a royal diadem
+in the hand of her God," and Jerusalem will be a praise in the earth
+(Isa. 60. 30; 62. 3, 7). "The Heavens shall rejoice and the earth be
+glad," and "the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord, as the
+waters cover the sea" (Psa. 96. 11; Isa. 11. 9). According to God's
+Eternal Counsel the despised Nazarene will yet be manifested and
+acknowledged by all as King of Kings and Lord of Lords.
+
+              "To Him be glory for ever and ever,
+
+                             AMEN."
+
+
+
+
+INDEX.
+
+
+                               PAGE
+
+  Adrian, 62
+
+  Alaric, 37, 38
+
+  Alexander the Great, 19
+
+  Alliance of Social Democracy, 71, 63
+
+  Alsace and Lorraine, 66
+
+  Antichrist, 85, 87, 91, 96
+
+  Antiochus Epiphanes, 20, 21, 64
+
+  Antiochus the Great, 19
+
+  Armageddon, 93
+
+  Attila, 39, 40
+
+
+  Babylon, 73
+
+  Bagdad, 46, 47
+
+  Balkan Peninsula, 46, 53
+
+  Barnabas, Epistle of 32
+
+  Beast, Twofold Symbolism of, 35, 36
+
+  Britain, 23, 39, 53, 62
+
+  British Empire, 67, 68
+
+  Bulgaria, 53
+
+  Byzantine Empire, 46, 57
+
+
+  Cæsar Augustus, 14, 22, 25, 37
+
+  Carthage, 16, 17, 18, 40
+
+  Chaldean Empire, 12, 55, 60
+
+  Charlemagne, 58, 60
+
+  Christendom, Reunion of, 80
+
+  Commercial System, 87
+
+  Comparisons of Symbols in Daniel and Revelation, 29
+
+  Constantine, 26
+
+  Constantinople, 26, 27, 40, 44, 45, 46, 58
+
+  Crimean War, 52
+
+  Crusades, 47
+
+  Cyprus, 53
+
+  Cyril, 33
+
+
+  Democracy, 75, 76
+
+  Diocletian, 26
+
+
+  Early Christian Writers, 32-34
+
+  Eastern Half of Empire Overthrown, 44
+
+  European Federation, 69
+
+
+  False Prophet, 84
+
+
+  Genseric, 39, 40
+
+  German Influence, 53
+
+  Germanic Tribes, 37-41, 56
+
+  Grecian Empire, 19, 63, 65
+
+  Grecian Empire Divided, 64
+
+  Greece, 19, 20, 52, 53, 65
+
+
+  Hannibal, 18
+
+  Hippolytus, 33
+
+  Hungary, 40, 49, 52, 66
+
+  Huns, 39
+
+
+  International Working Men's Association, 71
+
+  Ireland, 67
+
+  Irenæus, 32
+
+  Iron and Clay, 25, 74
+
+
+  Jerome, 33
+
+  Jews, 22, 54, 55, 56, 62, 68
+
+  Judæa Subdued by Romans, 23
+
+  Julius Cæsar, 22
+
+  Justinian, 58
+
+
+  Khaliphs, 45, 47
+
+  Kosovo, Battle of, 49
+
+
+  Lactantius, 33
+
+
+  Magnesia, Battle of, 19
+
+  Man of Sin, 85, 100
+
+  Medes and Persians, 13, 55, 60
+
+  Megiddo, 94
+
+  Mithradates, 21
+
+  Mohammed, 45, 46
+
+  Mohammed II., 49
+
+
+  Napoleon, 72
+
+  Navarino, Battle of, 52
+
+  Nebuchadnezzar, 9, 11, 75, 96
+
+  Northern Limits of Empire, 41
+
+
+  Odoacer, 41
+
+  Omar, 45
+
+  Osman, 48
+
+  Ottoman Empire, 48
+
+
+  Palestine, 20, 21, 54, 56
+
+  Papacy, 79
+
+  Parousia, The Epiphany of, 97
+
+  Psalm 29, 102
+
+  Pydna, Battle of, 20, 21
+
+
+  Roman Emperor, The Final, 67, 68, 77, 82, 89
+
+  Roman Empire--Decline of, 51
+    Extended in Final Form, 60
+    Final Destruction of, 30, 32, 60, 96
+    Still in Power at Close of Present Age, 14, 30, 56
+    Tenfold Division of, 27-34
+    Twofold Division of, 35
+
+  Roman Influence Continued, 56-58
+
+  Roumania, 52, 53
+
+
+  San Stefano Treaty, 53
+
+  Saracens, 45, 47, 55, 63
+
+  Scotland, 67
+
+  Sea Symbolic of National Unrest, 72
+
+  Serbia, 52, 53
+
+  Seventy Weeks, 88
+
+  Slavery Under the Romans, 23
+
+  Spiritism, 84
+
+  Superman, 83
+
+
+  Ten Kingdoms Foretold, 27-34
+    Not Formed in West, 42
+
+  Tertullian, 33
+
+  Theodoret, 34
+
+  Times and Seasons, 10
+
+  Titus, 40, 89
+
+  Tongrol Bek, 47
+
+  Trajan, 23
+
+  Trentino, 66
+
+  Tribulation, The, 92
+
+  Tripoli, 53
+
+  Turkish Empire, 44
+
+  Turkish Empire, Downfall of, 63
+
+  Turks, 46, 55, 63
+
+  Turks and Mohammedanism, 47, 50
+
+
+  United States, 67, 76
+
+
+  Valens, 26
+
+  Vandals, 38, 40
+
+  Valentinian, 26, 37
+
+  Voice of the Lord, The, 98, 101
+
+
+  Western Half of Empire Overthrown, 37-41
+
+  Winepress, The, 99, 104
+
+
+  Zama, Battle of, 18
+
+
+
+
+Demy 8vo, 308 pages clear type, strong dark cloth, gold title, 4/ net
+(4/6, or $1.12, post free).
+
+THE EPISTLES TO THE THESSALONIANS
+
+With Notes Exegetical and Expository.
+
+By C. F. HOGG and W. E. VINE, M.A.
+
+With Index to Subjects, Texts, and Greek Words.
+
+                *       *       *       *       *
+
+_A few out of very many favourable notices:_
+
+"The authors have seen clearly the great difference between the
+_parousia_ and the _epiphaneia_, and thus set forth, so much and so
+clearly, the great Hope of the Church."--Lord BLYTHSWOOD.
+
+"I greatly value such a book for the definiteness and prominence with
+which it unfolds the great truth of the Lord's return as a present
+hope--not a theory, nor yet a mere doctrine, but a blessed and glorious
+hope."--Sir ROBERT ANDERSON, K.C.B., LL.D., London.
+
+"The notes are brief, clear, full, and suggestive. It supplies a felt
+want between such volumes as the International Critical and the ordinary
+devotional expositions."--JAS. F. ARTHUR, Theological Tutor, B.T.I.,
+Glasgow.
+
+"These notes are admirable. The authors disclaim having written for
+scholars, but as scholars, I may say, they write for Christians, but for
+Christians as Bible students and serious ones."--GEO. F. TRENCH, B.A.,
+Dublin.
+
+"The book is one of such permanent value and wide scholarship. I hope it
+will be the first and not the last."--H. M. BLEBY, B.A., Dudley.
+
+"Should certainly find a place in the library of all Christians who
+desire to study this portion of God's Word."--L. W. G. ALEXANDER.
+
+
+PICKERING & INGLIS, 14 Paternoster Row, London, E.C.4.
+
+229 Bothwell Street, Glasgow; 75 Princes Street, Edinburgh.
+
+And through most Booksellers.
+
+                *       *       *       *       *
+
+Transcriber's note:
+
+1. The footnote at the end of page 74 reads:
+
+See "The Epistles to the Thessalonians, with Notes Exegetical and
+Expository," by C. F. Hogg and W. E. Vine, note _c._ pp. 259, 260.
+(Glasgow: Pickering & Inglis. 3/9, p.f.)
+
+
+The _c._ is unclear.
+
+
+2. The footnote at the end of page 89 reads:
+
+See "The Coming Prince," by Sir Robert Anderson. Price, 5/.
+
+
+The 5 in 5/ is unclear.
+
+
+3. Spelling, hyphenation and punctuation are left as in the original.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Roman Empire in the Light of
+Prophecy, by W. E. Vine
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROMAN EMPIRE IN LIGHT OF PROPHECY ***
+
+***** This file should be named 38721-8.txt or 38721-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/7/2/38721/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/38721-8.zip b/38721-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd4e3f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-8.zip
diff --git a/38721-h.zip b/38721-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cbf4c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-h.zip
diff --git a/38721-h/38721-h.htm b/38721-h/38721-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15cbb2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-h/38721-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,4483 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Roman Empire in the Light of Prophecy, by W. E. Vine.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+
+body {
+    margin-left: 10%;
+    margin-right: 10%;
+}
+
+    h1,h2,h3,h4 {
+    text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+    clear: both;
+}
+
+p {
+    margin-top: .75em;
+    text-align: justify;
+    margin-bottom: .75em;
+}
+
+hr {
+    margin: 3em auto 3em auto;
+    height: 0px;
+    border-width: 1px 0 0 0;
+    border-style: solid;
+    border-color: #dcdcdc;
+    width: 500px;
+    clear: both;
+}
+
+hr.hr2 {
+    width: 250px;
+    margin: 3em auto 3em auto;
+}
+
+table {
+    margin-left: auto;
+    margin-right: auto;
+}
+
+table.toc {
+    margin: auto;
+    width: 50%;
+}
+
+td.c1  {
+    text-align: right;
+    vertical-align: top;
+    padding-right: 1em;
+}
+
+td.c2  {
+    text-align: left;
+    margin-left: 0em;
+    padding-left: 2em;
+    text-indent: -2em;
+    padding-right: 1em;
+    vertical-align: top;
+}
+
+td.c3 {
+    text-align: right;
+    padding-left: 1em;
+    vertical-align: bottom;
+}
+
+td  { padding: 0em 1em; }
+th  { padding: 0em 1em; }
+
+    .pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+        /*  visibility: hidden;  */
+        position: absolute;
+        left: 92%;
+        font-size: smaller;
+        text-align: right;
+        color: #999;
+} /* page numbers */
+
+    .blockquot {
+        margin-left: 5%;
+        margin-right: 10%;
+}
+
+    .center   {text-align: center;}
+
+    .smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+    .u        {text-decoration: underline;}
+
+    .caption  {font-weight: bold;}
+
+    .gap { margin-top: 1em; }
+
+/* Images */
+    .figcenter {
+        margin: auto;
+        text-align: center;
+}
+
+p.caption {
+    margin-top: 0;
+    font-size: 70%;
+    text-align: left;
+}
+
+p.caption2 {
+    margin-top: 0;
+    font-size: 70%;
+    text-align: center;
+}
+
+/* Transcriber Notes */
+div.tn {
+    background-color: #EEE;
+    border: dashed 1px;
+    color: #000;
+    margin-left: 20%;
+    margin-right: 20%;
+    margin-top: 5em;
+    margin-bottom: 5em;
+    padding: 1em;
+}
+
+ul.corrections {
+    list-style-type: circle;
+}
+
+/* Footnotes */
+div.fn {
+    background-color: #EEE;
+    border: dashed 1px;
+    color: #000;
+    margin-left: 20%;
+    margin-right: 20%;
+    margin-top: 5em;
+    margin-bottom: 5em;
+    padding: 1em;
+}
+
+    .footnote {
+        margin-left: 10%;
+        margin-right: 10%;
+        font-size: 0.9em;
+}
+
+    .footnote .label {
+        position: absolute;
+        right: 84%;
+        text-align: right;
+}
+
+    .fnanchor {
+        vertical-align: super;
+        font-size: .8em;
+        text-decoration: none;
+}
+
+    .signature {
+        text-align: right;
+        margin-right: 5%;
+}
+
+/* INDEX */
+ul.index { list-style-type: none;
+    width: 20em;
+    margin: 2em auto;
+}
+
+ul.index2 { list-style-type: none; }
+
+li.pad { padding-top: 2.0%; }
+
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+Project Gutenberg's The Roman Empire in the Light of Prophecy, by W. E. Vine
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Roman Empire in the Light of Prophecy
+       The Rise, Progress, and End of the Fourth World-empire
+
+Author: W. E. Vine
+
+Release Date: January 31, 2012 [EBook #38721]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROMAN EMPIRE IN LIGHT OF PROPHECY ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">&nbsp;</a></span></p>
+<p class="center">
+THE<br />
+ROMAN<br />
+EMPIRE<br />
+IN<br />
+PROPHECY.<br /><br /><br />
+
+W. E. VINE, M.A.</p>
+
+<p>"Regarded as an historical
+manual it is of no little value,
+and the author's summaries of
+the rise and progress of Rome
+are quite masterly in their way."</p>
+
+<p>&mdash;<i>Glasgow Citizen.</i></p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">&nbsp;</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 186px;">
+<img src="images/illus002.jpg" width="186" height="250" alt="CÆSAR AUGUSTUS" title="CÆSAR AUGUSTUS" />
+
+</div>
+
+<p>CÆSAR AUGUSTUS, first Roman Emperor, born 63 B.C.
+Grand-nephew and heir of Julius Cæsar Octavianus. Obtained
+supreme power over Roman dominions by victory over
+Anthony at Actium, 31 B.C. Proclaimed Emperor, 27 B.C.,
+by the Roman Senate, which conferred on him the title
+Augustus. Died 19th August, A.D. 14, in his 76th year.</p>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">&nbsp;</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h1>
+THE<br />
+ROMAN EMPIRE</h1>
+<h3>IN THE LIGHT OF</h3>
+<h1><span class="smcap">Prophecy</span></h1>
+<h3>
+&mdash;OR,&mdash;<br />
+<br />
+THE RISE, PROGRESS AND END OF<br />
+THE FOURTH WORLD-EMPIRE.</h3>
+
+<p class="center">BY</p>
+<h2>W. E. VINE, M.A.,</h2>
+
+<p class="center">
+Author of "B.C. and A.D.; or, How the World was prepared for the<br />
+Gospel"; "The Scriptures and How to Use Them," etc.<br />
+</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 150px;">
+<img src="images/illus003.jpg" width="150" height="137" alt="Publisher&#39;s Mark" title="Publisher&#39;s Mark" />
+</div>
+
+<p class="center">
+PICKERING &amp; INGLIS<br />
+<br />
+Printers and Publishers, 14 Paternoster Row, London, E.C.4<br />
+229 Bothwell Street, Glasgow; 75 Princes Street, Edinburgh<br />
+</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">&nbsp;</a></span></p>
+<h2>OFFICES AND AGENTS.</h2>
+
+
+<p>
+<span class="smcap">London</span>: <span class="smcap">Pickering &amp; Inglis</span>, 14 Paternoster Row, E.C.4.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Glasgow</span>: <span class="smcap">Pickering &amp; Inglis</span>, 229 Bothwell Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Edinburgh</span>: <span class="smcap">Pickering &amp; Inglis</span>, 75 Princes Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Manchester</span>: <span class="smcap">The Tract Society</span>, 135 Deansgate.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Liverpool</span>: <span class="smcap">Wm. T. Jaye</span>, 18 Slater Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Newcastle</span>: <span class="smcap">Northern Counties Depot</span>, 63a Blackett Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Birmingham</span>: <span class="smcap">P. H. Hulbert</span>, 315 Broad Street (Corner).<br />
+<span class="smcap">Bath</span>: H. W. &amp; <span class="smcap">H. R. Griffiths</span>, 35 Milton Avenue.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Bristol</span>: <span class="smcap">W. B. W. Sarsfield</span>, 78 Park Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Weston-super-Mare</span>: <span class="smcap">Western Bible Depot</span>, 12 Waterloo Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Cardiff</span>: <span class="smcap">H. J. Lear</span>, 17 Royal Arcade.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Dublin</span>: <span class="smcap">R. Stewart</span>, 10 D'Olier Street, and 2 Nassau Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Belfast</span>: <span class="smcap">R. M'Clay</span>, 44 Ann Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Dundee</span>: <span class="smcap">R. H. Lundie</span>, 35 Reform Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">New York</span>: <span class="smcap">Gospel Publishing House</span>, 318 West 39th Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Chicago</span>: <span class="smcap">Wm. Norton</span>, Bible Institute Assoc., 826 North La Salle St.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Buffalo, N.Y.</span>: <span class="smcap">Sword and Shield Tract Society</span>, 1247 Niagara St.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Swengel, Pa.</span>: <span class="smcap">I. C. Herenden</span>, Bible Truth Depot.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Los Angeles, Cal.</span>: <span class="smcap">Geo. Ray</span>, 8508 So. Vermont Avenue.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Boston</span>: <span class="smcap">Hamilton Bros.</span>, 120 Tremont Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Philadelphia</span>: <span class="smcap">Glad Tidings Publishing Co.</span>, 5863 Christian St.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Dallas, Texas</span>: <span class="smcap">J. T. Dean</span>, 2613 Pennsylvania Avenue.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Windsor, Ont.</span>: <span class="smcap">C. J. Stowe</span>, 23 Martin Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Toronto</span>: <span class="smcap">Upper Canada Tract Society</span>, 2 Richmond Street, E.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Orillia, Ontario</span>: <span class="smcap">S. W. Benner</span>, Bible and Tract Depot.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Winnipeg</span>: <span class="smcap">N. W. Bible Depot</span>, 580 Main Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Buenos Aires</span>: <span class="smcap">W. C. K. Torre</span>, Casilla 5.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Melbourne</span>: <span class="smcap">E. W. Cole</span>, Book Arcade.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Sydney</span>: <span class="smcap">Bible, Book, and Tract Depot</span>, 373 Elizabeth Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Sydney</span>: <span class="smcap">Christian Workers Depot</span>, 170 Elizabeth Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Brisbane</span>: <span class="smcap">W. R. Smith &amp; Co.</span>, Bible Repository, Albert Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Auckland, N.Z.</span>: <span class="smcap">H. L. Thatcher</span>, 135 Symonds Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Dunedin</span>: <span class="smcap">H. J. Bates</span>, Otago Bible House, 38 George Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Palmerston North</span>: <span class="smcap">James G. Harvey</span>, Main Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Christchurch</span>: <span class="smcap">G. W. Plimsoll</span>, 84 Manchester Street.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Belgaum, India</span>: <span class="smcap">W. C. Irvine</span>, Christian Literature Depot.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Bangalore</span>: <span class="smcap">A. M'D. Redwood</span>, Frasertown Book Depot.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Switzerland</span>: <span class="smcap">Jas. Hunter</span>, Clarens.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Cairo</span>: <span class="smcap">The Nile Press</span>, Bulag.<br />
+<span class="smcap">Hong-Kong</span>: <span class="smcap">A. Young</span>, Bible Depot, 2 Wyndham Street.<br />
+<br />
+<i>And through most Booksellers, Colporteurs, and Tract Depots.</i><br />
+<br />
+Copyright&mdash;Pickering &amp; Inglis.<br />
+</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">&nbsp;</a></span></p>
+<h2>PREFACE.</h2>
+
+
+<p>The following pages are the outcome of
+several conversations with inquirers
+shortly after the outbreak of the great war,
+in 1914, and of requests for notes of the views
+expressed. The subject of these conversations
+had occupied the earnest if intermittent
+attention of the writer for over twenty years.
+The notes were expanded into a series of
+articles which appeared in <i>The Witness</i>
+during 1915. These have been revised and
+somewhat extended for the present volume,
+especially the last chapter, much of which was
+previously precluded by limitations of space.</p>
+
+<p>In regard to past history, the outlines of
+events connected with the Roman and Turkish
+Empires are given with the hope that the
+records will prove helpful to those who read
+the history of Nations in the light of Scripture.</p>
+
+<p>In regard to the future, while there are
+many events which the Word of God has foretold
+with absolute clearness, and upon these
+we may speak unreservedly, yet there are
+many circumstances concerning which definite
+prediction has been designedly withheld,
+and upon which prophecy is therefore
+obscure. In such matters an effort has been
+made to avoid dogmatism. Prophecy was
+not given in order for us to prophesy.</p>
+
+<p>On the other hand, the prophetic Scriptures
+are not to be neglected. Difficulty in understanding
+them is no reason for disregarding
+them. They are part of that Word, the whole<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span>
+of which is declared to be "profitable for
+doctrine, for reproof, for correction, for instruction
+in righteousness" (2 Tim. 3. 16).
+They therefore demand prayerful and patient
+meditation.</p>
+
+<p>For a speaker to refer to the study of the
+prophecies in a way which tends to minimise
+their importance in the minds of his hearers
+is to dishonour both the sacred Word and Him
+who inspired it. It is significant that the
+book of the Revelation opens with a promise
+of blessing to him who reads (the reference is
+especially to public reading) and to those who
+"hear the words of the prophecy, and keep
+the things which are written therein" (chap.
+1. 3), and at the close repeats the blessing for
+him who keeps its words (chap. 22. 7).</p>
+
+<p>The quotations in the present volume are
+from the Revised Version, the comparatively
+greater accuracy of its translations being
+important for a correct understanding of
+many of the passages considered.</p>
+
+<p>While the book is published at the request
+of several friends, the author fulfils such
+request with the earnest desire that in matters
+of doctrine that only may be accepted which
+can be confirmed from the Word of God
+itself, and that the Lord may graciously own
+what is in accordance with His mind for the
+glory of His Name and the profit of the
+reader.</p>
+
+<div class="signature">W. E. VINE.</div>
+<p><span class="smcap">Bath, 1916.</span>
+</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">&nbsp;</a></span></p>
+<h2>CONTENTS.</h2>
+
+
+
+<div class="center">
+<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents">
+<tr><td align="center">CHAPTER I.</td><td align="right">PAGE</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><b>The Times of the Gentiles</b>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_9">9</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Nebuchadnezzar's Dream,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_11">11</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Chaldean, Medo-Persian, Grecian Kingdoms,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_12">12</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Fourth Kingdom,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_13">13</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="center">CHAPTER II.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><b>The Roman Dominion</b>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_15">15</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Rise and Progress of the Roman Empire,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_16">16</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Eastward Extension,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_18">18</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Empire Completed,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_22">22</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Crushing of the Nations,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_23">23</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Twofold Division,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_25">25</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Tenfold Division,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_27">27</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; A Comparison of the Visions,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_29">29</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Testimony of Early Christian Writers,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_32">32</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Processes at Work Since the Twofold Division,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_34">34</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="center">CHAPTER III.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><b>The Overthrow in the West</b>&mdash;<span class="smcap">Germanic Invasions</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_35">35</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Disintegration of the Western Half,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_37">37</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Alaric and the Goths,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_37">37</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Attila and the Huns,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_39">39</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Genseric and the Vandals,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_40">40</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Northern Limits of the Empire,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_41">41</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Ten Kingdoms not Formed by Germanic Invasions,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_42">42</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="center">CHAPTER IV.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><b>The Overthrow in the East</b>&mdash;<span class="smcap">Turkish Empire</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_44">44</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Mohammed and the Khaliphs,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_45">45</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Eastern Empire at End of 10th Century,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_46">46</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Appearance of the Turks,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_46">46</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Turks Embrace Mohammedanism,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_47">47</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Turks Enter Europe,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_48">48</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Constantinople Taken,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_49">49</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; A Comparison of the Two Divisions,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_50">50</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Decline of the Turkish Empire,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_51">51</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Coming Overthrow,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_54">54</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; A Blank in Prophecy,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_55">55</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Continuation of the Roman Government,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_56">56</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Roman Imperialism Continued,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_57">57</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="center">CHAPTER V.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><b>Coming Revival of the Roman Empire</b>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_59">59</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">1. <span class="smcap">Geographical Considerations</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_59">59</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Review of the Ancient Territories,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_62">62</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Divisions of the Greek Empire,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_63">63</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Other European Territories,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_65">65</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The British Empire,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_67">67</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">2. <span class="smcap">Political Standpoint</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_69">69</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; European Federation,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_69">69</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Sea Symbolic of National Unrest,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_72">72</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Revolutions and their Issues,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_74">74</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Iron and the Clay,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_74">74</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Unprecedented Political and Social Upheaval,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_77">77</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">3. <span class="smcap">The Religious Standpoint</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_77">77</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Papacy: Its Present Power,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_79">79</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; A Reunion of Christendom,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_80">80</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Doom of Religious Babylon,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_81">81</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Satanic Authority of the Emperor,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_82">82</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The "Superman,"</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_83">83</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Spiritism&mdash;The False Prophet,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_84">84</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Universal System of Commerce,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_87">87</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="center">CHAPTER VI.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><b>The Everlasting Kingdom</b>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_88">88</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Jews,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_88">88</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Seventy Weeks,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_88">88</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Last "Week,"</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_89">89</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Fierce Persecution,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_92">92</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Armageddon and After,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_93">93</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Scene of the Conflict,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_94">94</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Epiphany of His Parousia,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_97">97</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Voice of the Lord,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_98">98</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Treading of the Winepress,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_99">99</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Overthrow of the Man of Sin,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_100">100</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Scene of Judgment,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_102">102</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The Jews in their Extremity,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_104">104</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Seismic Disturbances,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_104">104</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap"> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; The King Eternal</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_107">107</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="center"><b>Index to Maps.</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">Roman Empire in Apostolic Times</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_22">22</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">Western Roman Empire Under Germanic Tribes</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_36">36</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">Turkish Empire in the 16th Century</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_44">44</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">Turkish Empire in 1914</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_54">54</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">Palestine To Illustrate Psalm 29</span>,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_88">88</a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">&nbsp;</a></span></p>
+<h2>The Roman Empire in the<br />
+Light of Prophecy.</h2>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><span class="smcap">Chapter I.</span></h2>
+
+<h3>THE TIMES OF THE GENTILES.</h3>
+
+
+<p>The overthrow of the kingdom of Judah
+recorded in 2 Kings 24 and 25, and in
+the opening words of the book of Daniel,
+was a remarkable crisis in the history of
+the world. In judgment upon the people
+of God for their long-continued iniquity,
+sovereignty was removed from their hands,
+king and people were led into captivity,
+and Jerusalem was, in fulfilment of
+Jeremiah's words, given into the hand of
+Nebuchadnezzar, the king of Babylon (Jer.
+21. 10). The government of their land
+was thus committed to the Gentiles, and
+with the Gentiles it has remained from that
+day till now. These events took place in
+606 and 587 <small>B.C.</small></p>
+
+
+<h4>The Times of the Gentiles.</h4>
+
+<p>But Gentile control is not to continue
+indefinitely. This, which is plain from
+many Scriptures, was intimated by Christ<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span>
+to His disciples when He said of Jerusalem
+that the city would "be trodden down of
+the Gentiles until the times of the Gentiles
+be fulfilled" (Luke 21. 24). The phrase,
+"the times of the Gentiles," calls for consideration,
+and especially as it has to do
+with Nebuchadnezzar's conquest just
+mentioned.</p>
+
+<p>There are two words translated "times"
+in the New Testament; one is <i>chronoi</i>,
+which is invariably rendered "times;" the
+other is <i>kairoi</i>, which, when the two are
+found together, is rendered "seasons."
+Thus Paul, in writing to the Thessalonian
+Church, says, "But concerning the times
+and the seasons, brethren, ye have no need
+that aught be written unto you" (1
+Thess. 5. 1, <small>R.V.</small>; cp. Acts 1.7). We may
+distinguish "seasons" from "times" in
+the following way: "times" denotes mere
+duration, lengths of time; "seasons" implies
+that these lengths of time have certain
+events or circumstances associated with
+them by which they are characterised.
+Thus the words almost exactly correspond
+to the terms "periods" and "epochs."
+Now the word <i>kairoi</i>, "seasons," is used
+in the phrase translated "the times of the
+Gentiles," which might accordingly be
+rendered "the seasons of the Gentiles."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span>
+We look, then, for some special characteristic
+of the period or periods thus designated.
+We have observed that Nebuchadnezzar's
+overthrow of the kingdom of Judah involved
+the transference of its sovereignty
+from Jew to Gentile from that event onward.
+"The times of the Gentiles," accordingly,
+is that period, or succession of
+periods, during which dominion over the
+Jews and their land is committed to
+Gentile Powers.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Nebuchadnezzar's Dream.</h4>
+
+<p>Special significance attaches to the fact
+that no sooner had the times of the Gentiles
+begun than God made known the future
+course of their authority over His people,
+and the character and doom of that authority,
+and made it known to the first
+Gentile conqueror himself. It was in the
+second year of his reign that Nebuchadnezzar
+saw in a dream the great image by
+means of which the purposes of God were
+to be communicated to him. The description
+of this, given by Daniel to the troubled
+monarch, is as follows: "Thou, O king,
+sawest, and behold a great image. This
+image, which was mighty, and whose
+brightness was excellent, stood before thee;
+and the aspect thereof was terrible. As for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span>
+this image, his head was of fine gold, his
+breast and his arms of silver, his belly
+and his thighs of brass, his legs of iron,
+his feet part of iron, and part of clay. Thou
+sawest till that a stone was cut out without
+hands, which smote the image upon his
+feet that were of iron and clay, and brake
+them in pieces. Then was the iron, the
+clay, the brass, the silver, and the gold,
+broken in pieces together, and became like
+the chaff of the summer threshing-floors:
+and the wind carried them away, that no
+place was found for them: and the stone
+that smote the image became a great
+mountain, and filled the whole earth"
+(Dan. 2. 31-35).</p>
+
+<p>Interpreting this vision, the prophet
+identified Nebuchadnezzar, the Chaldean
+monarch, with the head of gold, and foretold
+that his kingdom, or empire, would
+be followed in succession by three others,
+corresponding respectively to the different
+parts of the remainder of the image and to
+the nature of the metals composing them.
+Of the four kingdoms the last is to engage
+our chief attention in these papers. Passing
+from the first, the <b>Chaldean</b>, as
+specified in Daniel's words to the king,
+"Thou art this head of gold" (v. 38), we
+are shown that the second kingdom was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span>
+that of the <b>Medes and Persians</b> by the
+prophet's record of the doom of Nebuchadnezzar's
+successor, Belshazzar: "In that
+night Belshazzar the Chaldean king was
+slain. And Darius the Mede received the
+kingdom" (Dan. 5. 30, 31; cp. v. 28).
+That the third kingdom was the <b>Grecian</b>
+we find in the interpretation of part of a
+vision recorded in the eighth chapter:
+"The ram which thou sawest that had the
+two horns, they are the kings of Media
+and Persia. And the rough he-goat [who
+was seen to destroy the ram, v. 8] is the
+king of Greece" (vv. 20, 21; cp. chap.
+10. 20).</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Fourth Kingdom.</h4>
+
+<p>The name of the fourth kingdom is not
+mentioned in the Old Testament, but the
+prediction given in the ninth chapter of
+Daniel's prophecies sufficiently identifies
+it. Messiah, it was said, would be cut off,
+and the people of a coming prince would
+destroy the city and the sanctuary. Now
+we know that the perpetrators of this were
+the Romans. We know, too, that by
+them the Grecian empire was conquered.
+The world-wide rule of the first <b>Roman</b>
+Emperor is indicated in the words of
+Luke's introduction to his record of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span>
+birth of Christ: "Now it came to pass in
+those days, there went out a decree from
+Cæsar Augustus, that all the world should
+be enrolled" (Luke 2. 1).</p>
+
+<p>It is important to note that this fourth
+kingdom will, in its final condition, be in
+world-wide authority at the close of the
+times of the Gentiles, that is, that the
+Roman power, though in a divided state,
+will not be finally destroyed until it meets
+its doom at the hands of the Son of God.
+This fact, which will receive fuller treatment
+later, and is borne out by several
+Scriptures, is plainly indicated in the
+passage which describes the last state of
+the fourth kingdom and its destruction.
+Immediately after showing that it would be
+a divided kingdom, and describing the
+nature of that division (vv. 41-43), the
+prophet says: "And in the days of those
+kings shall the God of Heaven set up a
+kingdom, which shall never be destroyed,
+nor shall the sovereignty thereof be left to
+another people; but it shall break in pieces
+and consume all these kingdoms, and it
+shall stand for ever" (v. 44). Now this
+indestructible kingdom cannot be other
+than that of Christ, and by His kingdom
+the fourth is to be broken in pieces and consumed,
+thus involving the overthrow of all<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span>
+forms of Gentile authority. Obviously
+no form of world government will exist
+between that of the fourth kingdom, in
+its condition described in verses 42, 43,
+and the kingdom of Christ which destroys it.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><span class="smcap">Chapter II.</span></h2>
+
+<h3>THE ROMAN DOMINION.</h3>
+
+
+<p>An understanding of the Scriptures does
+not depend upon access to other books,
+or reference to historical records outside
+the limits of the Bible. The Word of
+God is its own interpreter, and all that is
+needed for our establishment in the faith
+is contained in its pages. On the other
+hand, the Bible throws light upon history
+not recorded therein, and it is with that
+in view that we give certain historical
+outlines in dealing with our subject.</p>
+
+<p>The first part of the prophet's description
+of the fourth kingdom is as follows:
+"The fourth kingdom shall be strong as
+iron: forasmuch as iron breaketh in pieces
+and subdueth all things: and as iron that
+crusheth all these, shall it break in pieces
+and crush" (v. 40). A similar description
+is given in his account of a subsequent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span>
+vision, in which he saw four great beasts
+coming up from the sea. In this vision
+the Roman kingdom again was undoubtedly
+symbolised by the fourth beast. This
+beast he describes as "terrible and powerful,
+and strong exceedingly; and it had great
+iron teeth: it devoured and brake in pieces,
+and stamped the residue with his feet"
+(7. 7). So, again, in the words of the interpretation:
+"The fourth beast shall be a
+fourth kingdom upon earth, which shall be
+diverse from all the kingdoms, and shall
+devour the whole earth, and shall tread it
+down, and break it in pieces" (v. 23).
+Now all this exactly depicts the Roman
+power in its subjugation and control of
+the nations which eventually composed
+its empire. In the light, then, of these
+prophecies we give a brief sketch of its
+rise and conquests.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Rise and Progress of the Roman
+Empire.</h4>
+
+<p>The Romans, who early in the third
+century <small>B.C.</small> had become masters of all
+Italy, save in the extreme north, were
+drawn into a course of conquest beyond
+the limits of their own country by the
+rivalry of the rapidly advancing power of
+Carthage in North Africa. Carthage, a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span>
+city founded some centuries earlier by
+Ph&oelig;nician colonists from Tyre and Sidon,
+had at length become the capital of a great
+North African empire, stretching from
+Tripoli to the Atlantic Ocean, and embracing
+settlements elsewhere in countries
+and islands of the Mediterranean. These
+settlements included the greater part of
+Sicily, and that island, situated between
+the rival nations, became the first bone of
+contention between them. The precise
+cause of the struggle must not occupy us
+here, but the circumstances which decided
+the Roman Government, in 264 <small>B.C.</small>, upon
+an invasion of Sicily were of the deepest
+significance in the history of the world.
+By the year 242 Sicily was subdued. In
+the following year the island was ceded by
+Carthage, and the extension of Roman
+dominion beyond Italy was begun. The
+war continued intermittently, with many
+vicissitudes, for a century, but eventually
+the Carthagians were overwhelmingly defeated
+by land and sea. "Think you that
+Carthage or that Rome will be content,
+after the victory, with its own country and
+Sicily?" said a Greek orator, while the
+issues of the struggle in its earliest stage
+were yet in the balance. Rome's vast
+ambition, and her abundant means of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span>
+gratifying it, justified the orator's fears.
+The islands of Sardinia and Corsica were
+shortly afterwards seized.</p>
+
+<p>Defeated in Sicily, Carthage extended
+her dominions in Spain and made that
+country a base for marching through Gaul
+to attack the Romans from the north.
+Though their renowned leader Hannibal
+met with success, their effort was doomed
+to failure. Meanwhile Roman armies had
+pushed into Spain. After a fierce struggle
+of thirteen years the Carthagians were completely
+overcome there, and Spain soon
+became a Roman province. By the decisive
+battle of Zama, in North Africa, in 202,
+Carthage and its territories became tributary,
+and thus all the western Mediterranean
+passed under the supremacy of
+Rome. Eventually in 146, as a result of
+a final war, Carthage was razed to the
+ground, and its North African kingdom
+was constituted a Roman province under
+the name of Africa. War with the Celts
+in North Italy, commencing the next year,
+resulted in the extension of the boundary to
+the Alps, and countries beyond began to
+feel the terror of the Roman name.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Eastward Extension.</h4>
+
+<p>The second century <small>B.C.</small> witnessed the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span>
+spread of the iron rule eastward. The
+Grecian Empire of Alexander the Great,
+the third mentioned in Daniel's interpretation,
+had embraced all the countries
+surrounding the eastern half of the Mediterranean
+and had stretched far beyond
+the Euphrates. The disintegration of
+Alexander's empire after his death
+prepared the way for the Romans. Macedonia,
+the former seat of that empire, was
+their first great objective. A pretext for
+war was soon forthcoming, and war was
+actually declared in 200 <small>B.C.</small> A series
+of struggles ensued, and Macedonia was
+not finally subdued for over thirty years.
+Meanwhile matters had developed in
+Greece and Asia Minor. In the latter
+country Antiochus III., the Great, who had
+also conquered Syria and Palestine, was
+seeking to extend his dominions. Cities and
+states of Asia Minor, however, groaning
+under the tyranny of Antiochus, appealed to
+Rome for aid. The Romans declared war
+against him in 192 <small>B.C.</small> The first conflict
+occurred in Greece, which was largely under
+his influence. An early victory secured the
+submission of the Greek states. Antiochus
+retreated into Asia Minor, and was finally
+crushed at Magnesia in 190. The whole
+of Asia Minor was then surrendered to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span>
+Rome. Actual possession was postponed
+and local government was largely granted
+both there and in Greece. But that
+policy proved impracticable, and the
+force of circumstances compelled a forward
+movement to universal empire. There
+was no such thing as the balance of power
+in the ancient world. Once a country
+became predominant there was nothing
+for it but the subjugation of its neighbours.
+The extension of Rome's dominions eastward
+was a fulfilment of a destiny beyond
+its own control. The reverent student of
+Scripture sees in the course of these events
+the unfolding of God's plans and the
+fulfilment of His Word.</p>
+
+<p>The final campaign against the Macedonians
+was opened in 169 <small>B.C.</small>, and in the
+next year they were overwhelmed at the
+decisive battle of Pydna. Macedonia and
+the adjacent state of Illyria became tributary,
+and eventually were reduced to Roman
+provinces.</p>
+
+<p>The Romans then felt the necessity
+of definitely annexing Greece. Seventy
+towns in that country were plundered
+and 150,000 inhabitants were sold into
+slavery. Antiochus IV., Epiphanes, was
+now king of Syria and Palestine, and
+had possessed himself of almost the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span>
+whole of Egypt. Such was the effect of
+the battle of Pydna, however, that he
+was at once compelled to hand over
+Egypt to the conquerors, and that country
+became a Roman protectorate. Syria
+passed under Roman control at the death
+of Antiochus Epiphanes, in 164, and by
+the end of a few decades all the states of
+Asia Minor had been incorporated.</p>
+
+<p>Thus by the middle of this century
+the Republic of Rome had gained
+ascendancy east and west. Its senate was
+recognised by the civilised world as "the
+supreme tribunal for kings and nations."
+Early in the next century Dalmatia
+and Thrace were subdued, and the latter
+was incorporated in the province of Macedonia.
+Wars with Mithradates, King of
+Pontus, Cappadocia and Armenia, resulted
+in the conquest of all his territories,
+and provinces were formed out of the states
+from thence westward to the Ægean sea.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Palestine Annexed.</h4>
+
+<p>This century saw the actual interference
+of Rome in the affairs of Judæa. Syria
+had been made a province in 65 <small>B.C.</small> by
+the Roman General Pompey, and from
+thence he intervened in a strife which had
+for some time been raging amongst the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span>
+leaders of the Jews. In 63 he marched an
+army into Judæa and took Jerusalem. At
+the final assault upon the Temple 12,000
+Jews perished. Judæa thus passed under
+the iron heel.</p>
+
+<p>As a result of the wars of Cæsar in north-western
+Europe, in 58-51 <small>B.C.</small>, what are
+now Switzerland, France, and Belgium
+were subdued and Britain was invaded.
+By Cæsar also Roman authority in Africa
+was consolidated across the entire length
+of the north of the continent. The conquests
+of Rome as a Republic were
+complete. The Mediterranean had become
+a "Roman lake."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;">
+<img src="images/illus023.jpg" width="500" height="340" alt="THE ROMAN EMPIRE IN APOSTOLIC TIMES." title="THE ROMAN EMPIRE IN APOSTOLIC TIMES." />
+</div>
+
+
+<h4>The Empire Completed.</h4>
+
+<p>In 27 <small>B.C.</small> the purely Republican form
+of constitution was abolished, and the
+government of the Roman world was concentrated
+in the hands of an Emperor, the
+Cæsar Augustus of Luke 2.1. In his reign
+were fulfilled the prophecies foretelling the
+Birth of Christ. When the Prince of Peace
+was born in Bethlehem the din of strife
+was hushed throughout the empire, and
+Rome, under the restraining hand of God,
+ceased for a time its warring. By Augustus
+the northern territories of the empire were
+extended to practically the entire length<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span>
+of the Danube. The greater part of Britain
+became a province under Claudius. A
+later Emperor, Trajan, added, at the beginning
+of the second century <small>A.D.</small>, the
+province of Dacia, covering what are
+now Transylvania and most of Roumania.
+Under Marcus Aurelius (161-180)
+a large part of Mesopotamia was finally
+annexed.</p>
+
+<p>This completes the actual conquests of
+the Romans. We will now note certain
+characteristics of their method of subjugation,
+viewed in the light of Daniel's
+prophecy concerning the fourth kingdom,
+that, like iron, it would "break in pieces
+and crush."</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Crushing of the Nations.</h4>
+
+<p>The crushing process was evidenced in
+many ways, and especially by the establishment
+of a general system of slavery,
+which almost everywhere supplanted free
+labour. Slave-hunting and slave-dealing
+became a profession. To such an extent
+were they carried on at one period that certain
+provinces were well nigh depopulated.
+We are told that at the great slave-market
+in the island of Delos, off
+Greece, as many as ten thousand slaves
+were disembarked in the morning and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span>
+bought up before the evening of the same
+day. Chained gangs worked under overseers
+and were confined in prison at night.
+To take an instance of the extreme rigour
+of the laws regulating the traffic, it is recorded
+by the historian Tacitus, that once,
+when the Prefect of Rome had been killed
+by one of his slaves, of whom he owned a
+vast number, the whole of his slaves, many
+of them women and children, were executed
+together, in accordance with an ancient
+law. That event took place about the
+time, apparently, at which the Apostle
+Paul arrived at Rome.</p>
+
+<p>But not only were the nations ground
+down by slavery, the pages of Roman
+history abound in records of wholesale
+massacre and butchery. We may note,
+for instance, Luke's statement of Pilate's
+slaughter of Galilæans while they were
+sacrificing (Luke 13. 1). Records abound,
+too, of grossly burdensome taxation and
+financial exactions, in which the Romans
+outdid all tyrants that had preceded them.
+Usury flourished in the last century
+as it had never done before. Four per cent.
+per month was an ordinary exaction
+for a loan to a community. On one
+occasion a Roman banker, who had a claim
+on the municipality of Salamis, in Cyprus,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span>
+kept its council blockaded until five of its
+members died of hunger.</p>
+
+<p>By these methods the provinces of the
+empire were at one period reduced to a
+condition of unsurpassed misery. Nothing
+could more vividly describe the course of
+such a kingdom and the control exercised
+by it than the words of Daniel quoted above.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Twofold Division.</h4>
+
+<p>This fourth kingdom was destined to be
+divided; and in two respects, territorial
+and constitutional. The territorial division
+was indicated by the symbolism of the legs
+and feet of the image of Nebuchadnezzar's
+vision; the constitutional division was
+declared in Daniel's interpretation concerning
+the iron and clay (v. 40). The
+former of these divisions claims our consideration
+first. Territorially the kingdom
+would be first divided into two parts
+corresponding with the legs of the image.
+This actually took place in the fourth
+century of the present era.</p>
+
+<p>The Roman Empire had continued in a
+more or less united condition for over three
+centuries after the accession of its first
+Emperor, Augustus, in 27 <small>B.C.</small>, though
+various signs of a coming division manifested
+themselves. It was not unusual,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span>
+for instance, for an emperor to appoint an
+associate with himself in the imperial
+rank, and on one occasion Maximian, who
+thus became associated with Diocletian
+in <small>A.D.</small> 288, actually established his seat
+of government at Nicomedia, in Asia Minor.
+Constantine (323-337) united the empire
+under his sole rule, but paved the way for
+the final separation of east from west by
+founding, in 328, the city of Constantinople
+as a second Rome, after his own name,
+and establishing it as an eastern centre of
+government with its own legislative institutions.
+This arrangement was favoured
+by several conditions, national and otherwise,
+which characterised the countries of
+the eastern half as distinct from those of
+the western.</p>
+
+<p>At the death of Constantine, in 337,
+his dominions were divided among his
+three sons, a division, however, which
+lasted but a brief time. The empire was
+in 353 again united under Constantius, the
+survivor of the three. The long impending
+division into two parts took place under
+Valentinian I., in the year of his accession,
+364. Yielding to the wish of his soldiers
+that he should associate a colleague with
+himself, he placed his brother Valens in
+power in the east, with headquarters at<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span>
+Constantinople, he himself retaining control
+over the west.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Tenfold Division.</h4>
+
+<p>Prophetic Scriptures show that the
+Roman Empire would be further divided.
+Now while the ten toes of the image in
+Nebuchadnezzar's dream have not improperly
+been regarded as indicative of a
+tenfold division, the fact that the image
+had ten toes would be insufficient of itself
+to signify this, for the toes are naturally
+essential to a complete human figure.
+Moreover, the hands and their fingers,
+equally essential parts, have no territorial
+significance attached to them. The conclusion
+regarding the toes is, however,
+justified when we find the tenfold division
+abundantly confirmed by other Scriptures.</p>
+
+<p>Thus the fourth beast in the vision in
+chapter 7, which, as we have seen, likewise
+symbolised the Roman kingdom, is
+described as having <i>ten horns</i> (v. 7). The
+interpretation clearly tells us what these
+are: "And as for the ten horns, out of the
+kingdom (the fourth) shall <i>ten kings</i>
+arise" (v. 24). The Apocalypse gives us
+further information regarding this division,
+unfolding with increasing clearness the
+details connected with it. In one of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span>
+visions given to the apostle John, he sees
+"a great red dragon, having seven heads
+and <i>ten horns</i>" (Rev. 12. 3). The meaning
+of the ten horns is not there explained.
+We are told that the great dragon is "the
+old serpent, he that is called the Devil and
+Satan, the deceiver of the whole world"
+(v. 9). Turning now to the next chapter,
+we find another vision recorded, giving a
+fresh view of the same subject. A beast
+was seen "coming up out of the sea, having
+<i>ten horns</i> and seven heads, and on his
+horns ten diadems, and upon his heads
+names of blasphemy" (chap. 13. 1).
+Again an explanation of the ten horns is
+withheld, but that they are identical with
+those of the twelfth chapter is undeniable.
+The Apostle receives, however, a further
+vision, recorded in chapter 17: "I saw a
+woman sitting upon a scarlet-coloured
+beast, full of names of blasphemy, having
+seven heads and <i>ten horns</i>" (chap. 17. 3).
+And now the symbolism of the horns is
+explained: "the ten horns that thou
+sawest are <i>ten kings</i>, which have received
+no kingdom as yet; but they receive
+authority as kings, with the beast, for one
+hour. These have one mind, and they
+give their power and authority unto the
+beast" (vv. 12, 13).</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span>We are now concerned, of course,
+solely with the tenfold division of the
+empire; other details of the visions just
+referred to remain for later consideration.
+We cannot fail to see that what is symbolised
+by the ten toes of the image, and
+by the ten horns of the fourth beast as
+revealed to Daniel, is identical with what
+is symbolised by the ten horns of the
+dragon and of the beast seen by John,
+namely, the Roman kingdom in its ultimately
+divided condition.</p>
+
+
+<h4>A Comparison of the Visions.</h4>
+
+<p>The following points are noteworthy
+in comparing these visions relatively to the
+tenfold division. First, there is a parallelism
+in the order of the revelations
+given to the two seers, Daniel and John.
+A preliminary vision is given to each&mdash;more
+than one in the case of John&mdash;in
+which, in the matter of this territorial
+partition, symbols occur without explanation.
+Each then receives a further
+vision, in the interpretation of which the
+eventual division into ten kingdoms is
+plainly disclosed. To Daniel it is said:
+"As for the ten horns, out of the kingdom
+shall ten kings arise;" and to John: "The
+ten horns that thou sawest are ten kings, ...<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span>
+which receive authority as kings with the
+beast for one hour."</p>
+
+<p>Second, the ten kingdoms are seen to be
+contemporaneous, as is indicated by the
+co-existence of the ten horns of the beast,
+and further, by the fact that the ten kings
+mutually agree to a certain line of policy
+in handing over their authority to a supreme
+potentate (Rev. 17. 12, 13).</p>
+
+<p>Third, it is evident that the fourth
+kingdom is the last of the Gentile world-powers,
+and that it will exist in its tenfold
+state at the end of the times of the
+Gentiles. We observed this above in the
+case of the image, from the fact that the
+stone, symbolising the kingdom of Christ,
+smote the image upon its toes. So now, in
+the vision of the four beasts, it is the fourth
+beast that is slain, his body destroyed, and
+given to be burned (Dan. 7. 11). The
+Personal Agent of this destruction is here
+made known: "I saw in the night visions,
+and, behold, there came with the clouds
+of Heaven One like unto a son of man, and
+He came even to the Ancient of Days, ...
+and there was given Him dominion, and
+glory, and a kingdom, that all the peoples,
+nations, and languages should serve Him:
+His dominion is an everlasting dominion,
+which shall not pass away, and His kingdom<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span>
+that which shall not be destroyed"
+(vv. 13, 14). The finality of the fourth
+kingdom is clearer still from the interpretation
+given in the remainder of the
+chapter. The final world-ruler is, of
+course, prominent in this vision; in his
+destruction is involved the destruction of
+his kingdom; his power and aggression are
+terminated when the Ancient of Days
+comes (v. 22); then it is that "the judgment
+shall sit, and they shall take away
+his dominion, to consume and to destroy
+it unto the end. And the kingdom and the
+dominion, and the greatness of the kingdoms
+under the whole heaven, shall be
+given to the people of the saints of the Most
+High: His kingdom is an everlasting
+kingdom, and all dominions shall serve
+and obey Him" (vv. 26, 27). Similarly,
+again, in Revelation 13 and 17, in the
+corresponding visions of the beast and its
+ten horns, the ten kings and their federal
+head, ruling at the time of the end, "shall
+war against the Lamb, and the Lamb
+shall overcome them, for He is Lord of
+lords, and King of kings; and they <i>also
+shall overcome</i> that are with Him, called
+and chosen and faithful" (Rev. 17. 14).</p>
+
+<p>The crushing of the image by the stone,
+the slaying of the fourth beast before the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span>
+Ancient of Days, and the conquest of the
+ten kings and their chief by the Lamb, are
+therefore different views of the same
+event. The tenfold division of the fourth
+kingdom is obviously still future, and
+marks the condition of the world-government
+at the close of the times of the
+Gentiles, and immediately prior to the
+kingdom of Christ.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Testimony of Early Christian
+Writers.</h4>
+
+<p>That the Roman Empire would in its
+final form be divided into ten kingdoms
+was held by Christian writers of the
+earliest post-apostolic times. Their
+opinions are here given, not as forming any
+basis of exposition, but as expressions
+of early Christian conception of the
+Scriptures under consideration.</p>
+
+<p>What is known as "<i>The Epistle of
+Barnabas</i>," probably written early in
+the second century <small>A.D.</small>, quotes from
+Daniel concerning the ten kingdoms to
+show that they would exist at the consummation
+of the present age. <i>Irenæus</i>
+(circa <small>A.D.</small> 120-202), a disciple of Polycarp,
+who had been a companion of the
+apostle John, observes that "the ten toes
+are ten kings, among whom the kingdom<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span>
+will be divided." <i>Tertullian</i>, a contemporary
+of Irenæus, remarks that "the
+disintegration and dispersion of the Roman
+State among the ten kings will produce
+Antichrist, and then shall be revealed
+that Wicked One, whom the Lord Jesus
+shall slay with the breath of His mouth
+and destroy by the brightness of His
+manifestation." <i>Hippolytus</i>, who was a
+follower of Irenæus, and flourished in the
+first half of the third century, makes
+similar reference to the ultimate division.
+<i>Lactantius</i>, of the latter half of the third
+and the early part of the fourth centuries,
+writes as follows: "The Empire will be
+sub-divided, and the powers of government,
+after being frittered away and
+shared among many, will be undermined.
+Civil discords will then ensue, nor will
+there be respite from destructive wars,
+until ten kings arise at once, who will
+divide the world among themselves to
+consume rather than to govern it." <i>Cyril</i>
+(circa 315-386), who became bishop of
+Jerusalem in 350, quoting from Daniel,
+and speaking of the Empire and its future
+division, implies that teaching on the
+subject was customary in the churches.
+<i>Jerome</i> (342-420) observes that "at the
+end of the world, when the kingdom of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span>
+Romans is to be destroyed, there will be
+ten kings to divide the Roman world
+among themselves." Similarly writes
+<i>Theodoret</i> in the fifth century, and others
+of that time make more or less direct
+reference to the subject. While the views
+of these writers differ considerably on
+other points of detail, all are unanimous
+as to the eventual division of the Empire
+among ten contemporaneous potentates.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Processes at Work Since the
+Twofold Division.</h4>
+
+<p>The mediæval and modern history of
+the lands originally constituting the
+Roman Empire is a history of the formation
+of independent states in such a way
+as to point to the eventual revival of the
+Empire in the tenfold division we have
+been considering. The process has been a
+long and involved one, for the counsels
+of God have had a far wider range than
+the mere shaping of national destiny. It
+has been the Divine pleasure, for instance,
+that the Gospel should be spread among
+all nations for the purpose of taking out
+from among them a people for the Name
+of Christ, and for the formation thereby
+of His Church. In contradistinction to
+this, and from the standpoint of the world<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span>
+itself, which, though under God's control,
+remains in alienation from Him, there
+has been a gradual development of the
+political, social, and religious principles
+which are ultimately to permeate the
+nations.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><span class="smcap">Chapter III.</span></h2>
+
+<h3>THE OVERTHROW IN THE WEST:
+GERMANIC INVASIONS.</h3>
+
+
+<p>In the interpretation of his vision of the
+beast, John is told of its rise, temporary
+removal, and reappearance: "The beast
+that thou sawest was, and is not; and is
+about to come up out of the abyss, and to
+go into perdition" (Rev. 17. 8). Here the
+Roman world-power, the imperial dominion,
+is in view. In verse 11 the final
+king himself is similarly described. The
+symbol of the beast is thus employed
+to describe first the dominion and then
+its imperial head. This symbolic association
+of locality and ruler is found elsewhere
+in Scripture, and is illustrated in this very
+chapter. The seven heads of the beast, for
+example, are interpreted in both ways:
+"The seven heads are seven mountains, ...
+and they are seven kings" (v. 9, <small>R.V.</small> )
+The distinction between verses 8 and 11<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span>
+may be observed in this way: in the first
+part of the chapter, verses 1-8, the beast
+is viewed as a whole, indicating world-wide
+government; in verse 11 the scope of
+the symbol is limited, the beast is a
+person, and is identified with one of
+the seven heads, or kings, he is "himself
+also an eighth, and is of the seven." With
+this individual we shall be occupied later.</p>
+
+<p>A striking illustration of the symbolic
+use of the word "beast" to denote both a
+kingdom and the ruler over it is to be
+found in Dan. 7, where the following
+statements are made: "These great beasts,
+which are four, are four kings" (v. 17),
+and "The fourth beast shall be the fourth
+kingdom" (v. 23).</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 446px;">
+<img src="images/illus039.jpg" width="446" height="500" alt="THE WESTERN ROMAN EMPIRE UNDER GERMANIC TRIBES" title="THE WESTERN ROMAN EMPIRE UNDER GERMANIC TRIBES" />
+</div>
+
+<p>The statement of verse 8 seems, then,
+undoubtedly to refer to the Empire; it did
+exist, it ceased to be, and it will reappear.
+The assertion that it "is not" must not be
+taken to mean that the beast had ceased to
+exist in John's time. The present tense is
+to be regarded as prophetic. The verb
+"to be" often has the force of continuance
+of existence. The whole statement
+implies a past existence, a discontinuance
+of that existence, a future reappearance.
+In the vision recorded in the thirteenth
+chapter, John saw one of the heads of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span>
+beast "as though it had been smitten unto
+death." If, as seems probable, this head is
+imperialism, then the overthrow of imperial
+Rome is likewise indicated in that
+passage.</p>
+
+<p>In the light, then, of the words: "The
+beast that thou sawest was, and is not,"
+we may now consider how the Roman
+Empire was overthrown.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Disintegration of the Western Half.</h4>
+
+<p>We have seen that, at the accession of
+the Emperor Valentinian I. in <small>A.D.</small> 364,
+the Empire was divided into two parts.
+The succeeding century witnessed the
+disintegration of the western half. The
+cause was primarily from within. Augustus,
+the first Emperor, had instituted a policy
+of settling colonies of "barbarians" from
+northern Europe within the frontiers of the
+Empire. Later Emperors adopted the
+policy more generally. The significance
+of this lies in the fact that by the barbarians
+who had already been thus established
+in the Empire, the attacks were
+commenced which resulted in the dismemberment
+of its western provinces.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Alaric and the Goths.</h4>
+
+<p>At the close of the fourth century hordes<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span>
+of Gothic tribes from north-eastern and
+eastern Germany set out, under Alaric
+their chief, in quest of new lands. Settlements
+of these very Goths had already
+been established south of the Danube by
+the Imperial Government as allies of the
+Romans. After an excursion into Italy,
+in which they were temporarily checked,
+they poured, in 406, into defenceless Gaul.
+From thence Alaric returned to invade
+Italy, and three times in three years besieged
+Rome (408-410), eventually sacking
+the city. After his death, in 410, the
+Goths retired from Italy, entered Gaul,
+and permanently occupied the southern
+part of that country and a large part of
+Spain, where they were known as <b>Visigoths</b>
+(<i>i.e.</i>, Western Goths).</p>
+
+<p>Other Germanic tribes also streamed
+into Gaul. Of these, the <b>Franks</b> (whence
+the name France) issued from districts
+around the middle and lower Rhine and
+occupied northern Gaul; the <b>Suevi</b>, from
+north and north-west Germany, passed
+through into Spain; the <b>Alani</b>, formerly
+from eastern Europe, settled in west
+France and Spain; the <b>Burgundians</b>,
+from eastern Germany, seized that part of
+Gaul which eventually was named after
+them, Burgundy. The <b>Vandals</b>, from<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span>
+northern and central Germany, after being
+defeated by the Franks, crossed into
+Spain under their leader Genseric, and
+from thence established themselves in
+the province of Africa, in 429. This
+occupation of Gaul and Spain was soon
+perforce recognised by the Emperor at
+Rome. At the death of the Emperor
+Honorius, in 423, Rome exercised little
+more than a nominal authority over the
+greater part of the west.</p>
+
+<p>From Britain the Roman troops were
+withdrawn by Honorius, in 409, though
+the final abandonment of the island province
+did not take place till 436. Teutonic
+tribes from North Europe were soon engaged
+in invading this part of the Empire.
+The <b>Jutes</b>, from Jutland, landed in 449,
+the <b>Saxons</b> in 477, and about the same
+time the <b>Angles</b>.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Attila and the Huns.</h4>
+
+<p>Toward the close of the reign of Valentinian
+III. (433-455), Gaul and Italy were
+invaded by the <b>Huns</b> under Attila. The
+Huns originally inhabited a large part of
+central and northern Asia. In the latter
+part of the fourth century they moved
+west into Scythia and Germany, driving
+the Goths before them. Attila's dominions<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span>
+thereafter extended over a vast area of
+eastern, central, and northern Europe,
+and he was regarded as of equal standing
+with the Emperors at Constantinople and
+Rome. After a gigantic but futile incursion
+into Gaul, in 451, the Huns rushed
+into Italy, ravaging its northern plains.
+An embassy from Rome and an immense
+ransom saved the situation. Attila died
+in 453, and Italy was evacuated. The
+Huns eventually settled in south-eastern
+Europe, and their dominion dwindled
+away. A trace of their name may be
+found in the word Hungary.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Genseric and the Vandals.</h4>
+
+<p>In North Africa Genseric the Vandal
+established a powerful dominion, and set
+about preparing an invasion of Italy by
+sea. In 455 (the last year of the reign of
+Valentinian III.) his army of Vandals and
+Moors attacked Rome, which was again
+given over to pillage. Its wealth and
+treasures were transported to Carthage,
+and with them the vessels of the temple
+at Jerusalem; these had been brought to
+Rome in <small>A.D.</small> 70 by Titus, the conqueror
+of Jerusalem. For twenty years after
+Genseric's achievement Roman Emperors
+existed in little else than name, the real<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span>
+power being in the hands of a barbarian
+officer. In 476 the last Emperor was deposed
+by Odoacer, the king of the Heruli,
+a tribe which, issuing from the shores of
+the Baltic, made successful inroads into
+Italy and occupied much of the country.
+Odoacer was, at the request of the Roman
+Senate, given the reins of government by
+the eastern Emperor Zeno, and news was
+despatched to the court at Constantinople
+that no longer was there an Emperor of the
+west. Subsequently, in 493, Odoacer was
+slain by Theodoric, the king of the <b>Ostrogoths</b>,
+who then became predominant in
+the Italian peninsula. The Ostrogoths
+(<i>i.e.</i>, Eastern Goths) had broken off from
+the main body of their nation, and after
+settling south of the Danube moved into
+the province of Dalmatia.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Northern Limits of the Empire.</h4>
+
+<p>Other Germanic tribes, in addition to
+those named above, firmly established
+themselves within the northern limits of
+the Empire. Of these, two are worthy of
+mention, the <b>Alemanni</b>, who occupied
+most of what is now Switzerland and districts
+northward, and the <b>Lombards</b>, who
+settled in north Italy and the territory
+north-east of it.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4>The Ten Kingdoms not Formed by the
+Germanic Invasions.</h4>
+
+<p>There have been various attempts to
+identify with the ten prophetic kingdoms
+the states formed from the western half of
+the Roman Empire by the Germanic tribes
+from the north. Such attempts fail from
+the standpoints both of history and of
+prophecy. To group the tribes so as to
+make ten kingdoms out of them is, of
+course, possible in several ways, for there
+were at least eighteen such tribes.
+Accordingly lists put forward differ
+considerably. But such grouping is
+manifestly arbitrary. Again, since these
+invading nations occupied only the western
+half of the Empire, the above allocation
+of the ten kingdoms necessarily leaves the
+eastern half out of consideration, and
+therefore excludes the land of Palestine
+from this stage of the prophetic forecast.</p>
+
+<p>Now the prophecies concerning the times
+of the Gentiles are invariably focussed upon
+the Jews and their land. The dealings of
+God with the Jews form the pivot of His
+dealings with other nations. Thus no
+scheme of prophetic exposition relative
+to this subject is to be regarded as Scriptural
+which excludes Palestine from its<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span>
+scope. To endeavour to make the Word
+of God square with facts of history is
+to tamper with Scripture and to run the
+risk of obscuring its meaning and force.</p>
+
+<p>The idea that the formation of the ten
+kingdoms took place in the fifth century
+fails to stand the test of Scripture in other
+respects. Of the ten kings prophecy foretells
+that "they receive authority as kings
+with the beast for one hour," that they
+"have one mind, and they give their power
+and authority unto the beast" (Rev. 17.
+13, 14). No such tenfold confederacy has
+existed in Europe; it certainly never
+existed among the chieftains of the Germanic
+tribes which invaded the west of
+the Roman Empire in the fifth century,
+neither is there any record of such an
+agreement among them. Nor, again, can
+it be said that they made war with the
+Lamb and were overcome by Him (v. 14).
+These prophecies still await fulfilment.
+Similar considerations apply to the passage
+in Daniel 7 in reference to the fourth
+kingdom. The ten kings, it is said, would
+arise out of that kingdom, and after them
+another king who would make war with the
+saints and prevail against them until the
+Ancient of Days came (vv. 21, 22, 24).</p>
+
+<p>Again, since the persecution under the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span>
+king who arises after the others continues
+until the Ancient of Days comes (v. 22),
+his war against the saints must have lasted
+from the fifth century until the present
+time, if he arose in that century. Moreover,
+as he was said to be going to subdue
+three kingdoms (v. 24), the seven kingdoms
+not so subdued must likewise have continued.
+This has obviously not been the
+case. From every point of view it is
+impossible to assign the tenfold division
+to any time in the past.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;">
+<img src="images/illus049.jpg" width="500" height="273" alt="The Turkish Empire in the 16th Century." title="The Turkish Empire in the 16th Century." />
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><span class="smcap">Chapter IV.</span></h2>
+
+<h3>THE OVERTHROW IN THE EAST:
+THE TURKISH EMPIRE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>Having narrated the disintegration of
+the western half of the Empire, we will
+now recount the events which involved
+the overthrow of the eastern half. The
+impoverishment of the imperial power
+at Rome, and the weakening effect of the
+Germanic attacks upon it, tended to enhance
+the power of the Emperor at Constantinople.
+Indeed the eastern Empire
+was soon regarded as the more important
+of the two, and for some time after the
+barbarian invasions in Italy the Emperors<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span>
+at Constantinople claimed supremacy over
+the west.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Mohammed and the Khaliphs.</h4>
+
+<p>The seventh century saw the ascendency
+of Mohammed (born <small>A.D.</small> 570) in Arabia,
+to which country his personal power,
+temporal and religious, was limited. Upon
+his death, in 632, his followers determined
+on the invasion of Persia and the Asiatic
+dominions of the Emperor at Constantinople.
+Mohammed's successor, Abubekr,
+the first of the Khaliphs (<i>i.e.</i>, "representatives"
+of the prophet), at once waged war
+in both directions. Persia speedily succumbed;
+Syria and Palestine were subjugated
+after seven years by the Khaliph
+Omar. The reduction of Egypt followed, and
+during the remainder of this century the
+Saracens, the name by which the followers
+of Mohammed became termed in Christendom,
+extended their territory across the
+entire length of North Africa, and shortly
+afterwards even into Spain, where they
+overpowered the then disunited Visigoths.</p>
+
+<p>The Saracen power in Western Asia was
+distracted during the next century by civil
+war, and was further weakened by unsuccessful
+wars against the Greeks. At
+length, in 750, the seat of government was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span>
+moved from Damascus to Bagdad. From
+the eighth century onward, though the
+religion of Mohammed gained ground, and
+continues to do so to-day, the empire
+established by his followers dwindled
+rapidly, one province after another shaking
+off its allegiance until at the end of the
+tenth century its shattered dominions lay
+open to the nearest invader. The foe appeared
+in the shape of the formidable Turk.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Eastern Empire at End of 10th Century.</h4>
+
+<p>In view of the entrance of this new
+enemy we may note the extent of the
+territory belonging at this time to the
+eastern branch of the old Roman world,
+the Byzantine Empire, as it is termed (from
+Byzantium, the ancient name of Constantinople).
+The Eastern Emperors had
+recovered some of their lost ground in
+Asia, and at the close of the tenth century
+they held all Asia Minor, Armenia, a part
+of Syria, a considerable portion of Italy,
+and all the Balkan Peninsula.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Appearance of the Turks.</h4>
+
+<p>Beyond the north-eastern border of
+the Saracen dominions lay the country of
+Turkestan, inhabited by the Turks, a
+branch of the warlike nation of the Tartars<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span>
+of Central Asia. With them the Saracens,
+after the establishment of their Government
+at Bagdad, waged successful warfare
+for a time, taking numbers of Turks
+captive and dispersing them over the
+Empire. This only facilitated the eventual
+downfall of the Saracen sovereignty. The
+Turks in Western Asia grew in influence,
+and at length the Turkish troops, breaking
+into open revolt, assumed control over the
+Khaliphate, deposing and nominating the
+Khaliphs at their will.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Turks Embrace Mohammedanism.</h4>
+
+<p>Early in the eleventh century the bulk
+of the Turkish nation, under its leader
+Tongrol Bek, moving out from Turkestan,
+swept down upon Persia. The
+Khaliphate at Bagdad was, however, permitted
+to remain, and not only so, but
+Tongrol Bek and all his tribes embraced
+the Mohammedan religion. The invaders
+then marched west in vast numbers to
+make an attack upon Christendom, and in
+the course of time subdued Armenia and
+most of Asia Minor. Europe became
+alarmed, and the Byzantine Emperors
+eagerly sought the assistance of the nations
+of the west. Hence arose the Crusades,
+which had as their chief object the deliverance<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span>
+of Palestine from both Saracens
+and Turks, and which served to retard,
+though not to prevent, the advance of the
+Turkish power in Europe.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Turks Enter Europe.</h4>
+
+<p>Early in the thirteenth century a mighty
+movement of Mongols south-west from
+Central Asia, involving the immediate destruction
+of the Khaliphate at Bagdad,
+exerted an important influence upon the
+Turks, in driving those Turkish tribes
+which had remained east of Armenia westward
+into Asia Minor. This resulted in the
+establishment of various Turkish dynasties
+in that country. At the close of the
+thirteenth century the paramount power
+over these was exercised by Osman (or
+Othman, whence the name Ottoman),
+who seized all that remained of the ancient
+Roman world in Asia, and thus practically
+founded the Ottoman Empire. In the
+middle of the fourteenth century the way
+was opened for the Ottomans to advance
+into Europe. They were invited by one
+of the rival factions at Constantinople to
+undertake their cause. The Turks accordingly
+crossed the Hellespont and
+seized Gallipoli and the territory in the
+vicinity of the capital. Constantinople<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span>
+itself was left unattacked for the time.
+Under Murad I., the grandson of Osman,
+Roumania and several kingdoms south
+of the Danube, including Bulgaria, were
+subdued. The kings of Hungary, Bosnia
+and Serbia rose against the invader, but
+were severely defeated, and by the decisive
+victory of Kosovo, in 1389, Serbia and
+Bosnia were annexed.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Constantinople Taken.</h4>
+
+<p>Constantinople was temporarily saved
+by another advance of the Mongol Tartars
+upon the Turkish dominions in Asia, where,
+in 1402, the Ottomans suffered a severe
+defeat. From this check they recovered,
+and during the first part of the fifteenth
+century were at war with the Hungarians
+and neighbouring races, whom they eventually
+overthrew. In 1451 Mohammed II.
+ascended the Ottoman throne, and in
+1453 led an immense army against Constantinople.
+The city was taken by storm,
+the last of the Roman Emperors of the
+east died fighting, and Mohammed II.
+rode in triumph to the cathedral of St.
+Sophia, where he established the Moslem
+worship.</p>
+
+<p>For over a hundred years after this the
+Turkish Empire continued to extend.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span>
+Egypt was annexed in 1517, and in the
+middle of this century Tripoli and Algeria
+were added, as well as considerable districts
+in Europe and Asia. The Turks were now
+at the zenith of their power.</p>
+
+
+<h4>A Comparison of the Two Divisions.</h4>
+
+<p>Recapitulating, we may compare the
+two divisions of the Roman Empire
+since their overthrow, from the <i>prophetic</i>,
+<i>religious</i> and <i>political</i> standpoints. From
+the <i>prophetic</i> point of view our interest in
+the west has thus far centred in the fact
+that the ten kingdoms were not formed by
+the fifth century invasions; our interest in
+the east centres chiefly in the land of
+Palestine, wrenched, as we have seen, from
+the eastern Emperor by the Saracens, and
+then occupied by the Turks, who still
+possess it. From the <i>religious</i> standpoint,
+the Germanic tribes in the west accepted
+Roman Catholicism, hence its progress
+in that part of Europe; in the east the
+Turks had accepted Mohammedanism when
+invading the Empire of the Khaliphs, hence
+the establishment of Islamism throughout
+the Turkish dominions. <i>Politically</i>, the
+western invasion in the fifth century, and
+the consequent amalgamation of the Teutonic
+tribes with the peoples formerly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span>
+under Roman control, led eventually to
+the formation of the various mediaeval
+monarchies of Western Europe which are
+to-day either kingdoms or republics.
+Affairs in the eastern half of the Roman
+world have moved more slowly in this
+respect, owing to the prolonged existence
+of the Ottoman Empire. The slow decay
+of the Turkish power from the middle of
+the sixteenth century onward has already
+resulted in the formation of some Eastern
+States, and the process still continues.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Decline of the Turkish Empire.</h4>
+
+<p>The decline of the power of the Turks
+set in during the latter half of the sixteenth
+century, when their dominions passed under
+incapable rulers. In the reign of Selim II.
+(1566-1574) occurred the first conflict between
+the Turks and Russians, the former
+being driven back from Astrakkan. In
+1593, during a war between Turkey and
+Austria, the provinces of Transylvania,
+Moldavia, and Wallachia rose in revolt.
+As the result of intermittent wars in the
+latter half of the seventeenth century
+Austria acquired almost the whole of
+<i>Hungary</i>. In 1770 Russia occupied <i>Moldavia</i>
+and <i>Wallachia</i>, which though nominally
+for a time under Turkey were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span>
+practically Russian protectorates. During
+the next few years Russia regained the
+Crimea and all the neighbouring district
+north of the Black Sea. At the commencement
+of the nineteenth century the Ottoman
+Empire was in a perilous condition.
+Napoleon had plans for its partition. Provincial
+governors were everywhere acting
+independently of the Sultan. In 1804
+<i>Serbia</i> revolted, and after a few years of
+persistent struggle obtained its autonomy.
+<i>Greece</i> revolted in 1820, and, though subdued
+for a time, gained its independence
+in 1829 through the intervention of
+England, France, and Russia, and chiefly
+as the result of the naval battle of Navarino,
+in which the Turco-Egyptian fleet was
+annihilated. In the same year <i>Algeria</i>
+was annexed by the French. European
+rivalries prevented for a time any rapid
+diminution of the Empire.</p>
+
+<p>The Crimean War of 1854-5 had important
+consequences for the Balkan peoples. It
+gave them, under the slackening grasp of the
+Porte, twenty years of comparatively quiet
+national development. In 1860 Wallachia
+and Moldavia formed themselves into the
+single state of <i>Roumania</i>. In 1866 the
+Pasha of Egypt assumed the title of
+Khedive (<i>i.e.</i>, king), thereby securing a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span>
+measure of independence for the country.
+In 1875 the misrule of the Sultan led to
+the insurrection of Bosnia, Herzegovina,
+and Bulgaria. Serbia and Montenegro
+then took up arms. In 1877 a war with
+Russia saw Turkey without an ally. A
+complete Russian victory in 1878 issued
+in the treaties first of San Stefano and then
+of Berlin, by which Turkey yielded to
+Russia the state of <i>Bessarabia</i> and districts
+south of the Caucasus, the independence
+of <i>Serbia</i>, <i>Montenegro</i>, and <i>Roumania</i> were
+recognised by the Porte, <i>Bulgaria</i> was
+constituted an autonomous state, <i>Bosnia</i>
+and <i>Herzegovina</i> were ceded to Austria,
+<i>Thessaly</i> to Greece, and <i>Cyprus</i> to Britain.
+In 1885, as the result of a revolution,
+Eastern <i>Roumelia</i> became united to Bulgaria.
+Shortly after that date German
+influence began to gain ascendancy at the
+court of the Sultan, and, among other
+affairs, largely dominated the granting of
+railway concessions in Western Asia.
+The effects of that influence have been
+evidenced in the present war. In 1912
+Italy annexed <i>Tripoli</i> after a brief war.
+In 1913 a short but sanguinary war with
+the Balkan States deprived Turkey of
+all her European dominions save for a
+small piece of territory in the vicinity<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span>
+of Constantinople. <i>Egypt</i>, which has
+been chiefly under British control for a
+considerable period, has in 1915 been
+practically annexed by Britain as a protectorate,
+the Khedive being deposed and
+a nominee of the British Government
+being placed in authority. Britain has
+likewise annexed a district north of the
+Persian Gulf.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Coming Overthrow.</h4>
+
+<p>The continual decrease of the Turkish
+Empire, and more especially during the
+past hundred years, affords ground, apart
+from other considerations, for the expectation
+of its overthrow and the
+eventual cession of Palestine to the Jews,
+perhaps by a general agreement among the
+European Powers, events which seem not
+far distant. National jealousies would not
+permit the permanent annexation of Palestine
+by any one of these Powers, in whatever
+way the remaining Asiatic Turkish
+dominions may be divided. A proposal
+has already been put forward for its
+annexation to Egypt. Such an arrangement
+would in any case be merely temporary.
+To the Jews the land belongs,
+and by Divine decree the Jews are to possess
+it again.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;">
+<img src="images/illus061.jpg" width="500" height="277" alt="The Turkish Empire in 1914." title="The Turkish Empire in 1914." />
+
+</div>
+
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span></p>
+
+<h4>A Blank in Prophecy.</h4>
+
+<p>It should be observed, in passing, that
+Scripture is apparently silent concerning
+the occupation of Palestine by the
+Saracens and Turks. Such silence is
+noticeable when we remember how definitely
+the occupation by the other Gentile
+powers, the Chaldean, Medo-Persian,
+Greek, and Roman, and the order and
+character of their rule, were predicted.
+The cause of the silence is not difficult to
+ascertain. The four Gentile powers just
+mentioned had to do with the Jews as the
+recognised possessors of Palestine, either by
+way of removing them from their country
+or restoring them to it, or during such
+time as they were permitted to remain
+in it with liberty to continue their temple
+worship and sacrifice. The Chaldeans
+removed the Jews from the land, the Medo-Persians
+repatriated them, the Greeks
+permitted their continuance in it, the
+Romans did so too, until <small>A.D.</small> 70, when
+they crushed them. When, however, the
+Saracens and the Turks seized the land
+the Jews had been scattered, nor have
+they received national recognition while
+under them. Gentile occupation of Palestine
+during such times as the Jews remain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span>
+in their present condition seems therefore
+to receive no direct notice in prophecy.</p>
+
+<p>The restoration of Palestine to the Jews
+is closely connected with the revival of the
+Roman Empire in its tenfold form. Prior
+to considering the manner of this revival we
+must notice how during the period between
+the overthrow of that Empire and its
+coming resuscitation, its dominions and
+their government have remained Roman in
+character, thus affording a further proof
+that the coming and final world-power will
+not be entirely a new one, but will be a
+revival of the ancient Roman or fourth
+empire indicated in the prophecies of Daniel.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Continuation of Roman Government
+and Influence.</h4>
+
+<p>Such was the prestige of the Roman
+name and authority that the chieftains of
+the Germanic tribes which in the fifth
+century subdued the western half of the
+Empire governed the conquered territories,
+not so much as tribal chiefs, but as
+successors to, and in continuation of, the
+imperial rule; they introduced no radical
+changes in the provincial and municipal
+forms of government of their predecessors.
+Civil organisation remained distinctly
+Roman, and has continued so; upon it are<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span>
+based some of the chief municipal institutions
+of modern life. Indeed Roman
+civil law still remains the foundation of
+modern jurisprudence.</p>
+
+<p>In south-eastern Europe, too, countries
+which were for centuries under the
+power of the Turk retained, in their
+municipal institutions and organisation,
+the impress of Roman authority. It
+should be remembered that though the
+eastern or Byzantine portion of the ancient
+Roman Empire was distinct from the
+western, its emperors being designated as
+Grecian in contrast to the Roman, yet its
+legislative foundations were laid in the
+Roman Empire prior to the division of the
+east from the west. Byzantine imperialism
+was therefore really Roman under an
+eastern title. According as the states in
+the east have become freed from the Turkish
+yoke, so the character of their government
+and legislation has conformed in a large
+degree to those of the west. The further
+diminution of the Turkish Empire will
+doubtless see a corresponding revival of
+western conditions and methods.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Roman Imperialism Continued.</h4>
+
+<p>It is important also to observe that notwithstanding
+the passing away of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span>
+Roman Empire as such, the principle of
+imperialism remained, and, amidst the
+vicissitudes of national government in
+Europe, has continued to the present time.
+The imperial power in the west was not
+abolished when in 476 the last Roman
+Emperor was deposed. On the contrary,
+there was a kind of reunion imperially of
+the west with the east. For a considerable
+time the tribal kings of the west received
+recognition from the eastern emperors, and
+were regarded as their associates in imperial
+control. This was the case even with
+the Saxon kings in Britain, and on Saxon
+coins may be seen to-day the same title,
+<i>basileus</i> (<i>i.e.</i>, king), as was borne by the
+emperors at Constantinople. Italy itself
+was wrested from the Teutons by the
+eastern Emperor Justinian in the sixth
+century, and remained under the Byzantine
+Caesars till 731.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile the Roman Senate continued
+to exercise its authority, and in 800 chose
+the Frankish king Charlemagne as their
+sovereign. He was already ruling over the
+greater part of Western Europe, and was
+now crowned as Emperor at Rome by the
+Pope. Though his empire fell to pieces
+after his death, his dominions retained, and
+have since retained, their Roman character.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span>Consideration of space forbids our tracing
+here the further continuance of imperialism
+as a factor in European politics. Recent
+history and present-day events indicate
+how rapidly we are approaching its final
+development at the close of the times of
+the Gentiles. The coming confederacy of
+European states will not result in the formation
+of a new empire, but will be the
+revival of the Roman in an altered form.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><span class="smcap">Chapter V.</span></h2>
+
+<h3>THE COMING REVIVAL OF THE
+ROMAN EMPIRE.</h3>
+
+
+<p class="center">(1) <i>The Geographical Standpoint.</i></p>
+
+<p>The coming revival of the Roman
+Empire will for our present purpose
+be best considered from the geographical,
+political, and religious standpoints.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Geographical Considerations.</h4>
+
+<p>Any forecast of the exact delimitations
+of the ten kingdoms constituting the reconstructed
+Empire must necessarily be
+largely conjectural. That their aggregate
+area will precisely conform to that of the
+ancient Roman Empire does not necessarily
+follow from the fact of its revival,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span>
+and cannot be definitely concluded from
+Scripture. An extension of the territories
+of the Empire in its resuscitated form
+would be quite consistent with the retention
+of its identity. Moreover, if Roman
+imperialism may be considered to have continued
+in the hands of Teutonic monarchs
+after the fall of the western part of the
+Empire in 476, if, for instance, Charles the
+Great, of whom we have spoken (p. 58),
+ruled as a Roman Emperor, despite the
+passing away of the actual Empire itself,
+then the dominions which were under the
+rule of these later monarchs may yet be
+found incorporated in the Empire, and so
+form parts of the ten kingdoms. In that
+case Germany and Holland would be included.
+Possibly, too, the Empire will
+embrace all the territories which belonged
+to the three which preceded it, the Grecian,
+Medo-Persian, and Chaldean. Certainly
+when the stone fell on the toes of the image,
+the whole image, representing these former
+three as well as the fourth, was demolished.
+Suggestive also in this respect is the fact
+that the beast in the vision recorded in
+Revelation 13. 2 was possessed of features
+of the leopard, the bear, and the lion, the
+same beasts which represented in Daniel's
+vision the Grecian, Medo-Persian, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span>
+Chaldean kingdoms (Dan. 7. 4-6), the
+order in Revelation 13 being inverted.
+While political characteristics are doubtless
+chiefly in view in these symbols, there may
+at the same time be an indication of the
+eventual incorporation of the first three
+empires in the fourth. It must be remembered,
+too, that the authority of the
+federal head of the ten kingdoms is to be
+world-wide: "There was given to him
+authority over every tribe and people and
+tongue and nation" (Rev. 13. 7). It is
+probable, therefore, that while the ten
+kingdoms will occupy a well defined area,
+their dependencies and the countries which
+are allied with them will embrace practically
+the remainder of the world.</p>
+
+<p>If, on the other hand, the Roman Empire
+is to be reconstructed in exact conformity
+territorially with its ancient boundaries&mdash;such
+a reconstruction is, of course,
+not inconceivable&mdash;we must consider what
+period of the conquests of the ancient
+Empire to take, whether under the first
+emperor, Augustus, or during the Apostolic
+Age, or later. We may, perhaps, be
+helped by the facts already mentioned,
+that prophecy relating to Gentile dominion
+is focussed upon the Jews and Palestine,
+and has especially in view the presence of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span>
+the nation in their land. Now, shortly
+after their overthrow, in <small>A.D.</small> 70, their
+national recognition as possessors of the
+land ceased. This period, moreover, corresponds
+broadly to the close of the Apostolic
+Age. The dispersion of the Jews
+among the nations was completed by
+Adrian in the next century. He desolated
+the whole of Palestine, expelling all the
+remaining Jewish inhabitants.</p>
+
+
+<h4>A Review of the Ancient Territories.</h4>
+
+<p>We will therefore now review the limits
+of the Empire and of some of its provinces at
+that time, noticing certain circumstances
+of past and present history suggestive of
+future issues. In doing so we are not predicting
+that the boundaries of the revived
+Empire will be those of the ancient.</p>
+
+<p>Commencing with North Africa, it will
+be observed, on referring to the map, that
+practically the same strip of territory
+which belonged to the Roman Empire in
+the times of the apostles has passed directly
+under the government of countries which
+were themselves then within the Empire.
+For Spain rules over Morocco, France over
+Algeria and Tunis, Italy recently seized
+Tripoli, and Britain has, since Turkey's
+entrance into the great war, virtually<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span>
+taken possession of Egypt. It seems not
+a little significant that no country which
+was outside the limits of the Empire
+at the time under consideration has been
+permitted by God to annex these North
+African territories since the Saracens and
+the Turks were dispossessed of them.</p>
+
+<p>Passing now to Asia, the territory in
+that continent which belonged to Rome in
+the first century is approximately what
+remained to Turkey immediately prior to
+the present war. Mesopotamia and most
+of Armenia were included. The war has
+already seen Turkey dispossessed of portions
+of these. The downfall of the Turkish
+Empire would almost certainly involve
+territorial rearrangements of deepest import
+in the light of prophecy, especially
+as regards Palestine.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Divisions of the Greek Empire: A
+Possible Renewal.</h4>
+
+<p>The 8th chapter of Daniel apparently
+indicates that the Asiatic territories of the
+Empire will be divided much as they were
+under the Greeks after the death of Alexander
+the Great. He was obviously symbolised
+by the great horn (v. 22). The
+four horns which came up in its place (v.
+8) are clearly, too, the four generals who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span>
+succeeded Alexander, and among whom
+his dominions were divided, Cassander
+ruling over Macedonia and Greece, Lysimachus
+over part of Asia Minor and
+Thrace (the extent of the latter province
+was almost exactly what now belongs to
+Turkey in Europe), Seleucus over most of
+Syria, Palestine, Mesopotamia, and the
+east, and Ptolemy over Egypt. Next
+follows a prediction carrying us to events
+which are evidently yet future. It is said,
+for instance, that these events will take
+place "in the latter time of their kingdom
+(not, it will be observed, in the time of the
+four kings themselves who succeeded
+Alexander, but of the kingdoms over
+which they ruled), when the transgressors
+are come to the full" (v. 23). The expressions
+in this chapter, "the time of the
+end" (v. 17), "the latter time of the indignation,"
+"the appointed time of the
+end" (v. 19), and "the latter time of their
+kingdom" (v. 23), all point to a period still
+future, namely, to the close of the present
+age. Again, in reference to the "king of
+fierce countenance," while much of the
+prophecy can be applied to Antiochus
+Epiphanes in the second century <small>B.C.</small>, yet
+no man has hitherto arisen whose character
+and acts have been precisely those related in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span>
+verses 9-12 and 23-25. We may also compare
+what is said of "the transgression
+that maketh desolate" (v. 13) with the
+Lord's prophecy concerning the abomination
+of desolation (Matt. 24. 15-22), a
+prophecy which also manifestly awaits
+fulfilment.</p>
+
+<p>Possibly, therefore, these Asiatic territories
+will be similarly divided in the
+coming time. In regard to the first of the
+above-mentioned four divisions, the recent
+extension of Greece to include the ancient
+province of Macedonia is remarkable. This
+was an outcome of the Balkan War of 1912.
+The boundaries of Greece are now approximately
+what they were under Cassander
+in the time of the Grecian Empire, what
+they were also later as the provinces of
+Macedonia and Achaia in the Roman
+Empire. There has lately, therefore, been
+a significant reversion to ancient conditions
+in this respect.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Other European Territories.</h4>
+
+<p>Coming now to the dual-monarchy of
+Austria-Hungary, reference to the map of
+the Roman Empire in the Apostolic Age
+will show that what are now Hungary,
+Transylvania, Bessarabia, and other states
+of the present monarchy were without the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span>
+Roman boundaries, while Pannonia, or
+what is now Austria west of the Danube,
+was within; even when in the next century
+Dacia (now Transylvania, Bessarabia, &amp;c.)
+was annexed, the two parts of the present
+dual kingdom were separate. The separation
+of Hungary from Austria has for
+a considerable time been a practical
+question of European politics, and may be
+hastened by present events.</p>
+
+<p>The northern and north-eastern boundaries
+of Italy embraced the Trentino and
+the peninsula of Istria. Noticeable, therefore,
+are the present efforts of Italy to
+acquire these very districts, efforts which
+seem likely to achieve success. Roman
+states north of Italy covered what are now
+Baden, Wurtemberg, Luxemberg, and a
+large part of Bavaria. The possibility
+of an eventual severance of these from
+Prussian domination has been much discussed
+of late.</p>
+
+<p>The Rhenish provinces of Alsace and
+Lorraine, originally portions of the Roman
+province of Gallia (now France), were
+snatched from France by Germany in the
+Franco-Prussian war of 1870-71. Their
+recovery is a supreme object of the efforts
+of the French in the present war, and not
+without hope of success.</p>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4>The British Empire.</h4>
+
+<p>As to Britain, at the time under consideration
+the greater part of the island
+was definitely included in the Roman
+Empire. Ireland and most of Scotland
+were never conquered by the Romans.
+Should Britain form one of the ten kingdoms,
+there is nothing to show that Ireland
+or any other part of the British Empire
+must of necessity be absolutely separated
+from it. Self-government may yet be
+possessed by those territories which have
+not yet received it, and it is significant
+that Ireland has now practically obtained
+it. That the lands which are linked with
+Britain as dependencies, or as in possession
+of self-government, should remain as integral
+parts of the Empire is but consistent
+with the coming world-wide authority of
+the potentate who will be the federal head
+of the ten kingdoms. And that each state
+in the British Empire should have its own
+local government is, on the other hand,
+consistent with the establishment of a
+closer and complete confederacy of ten
+kingdoms, the area of which may correspond
+largely to that of the ancient Roman
+Empire. In contrast to the self-government
+of the other countries of the world at<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span>
+the coming period, the ten united kingdoms
+will eventually be absolutely under
+the control of the final emperor just
+mentioned, for the ten kings over these
+states, who receive authority as kings
+with him, will be of one mind to give their
+power and authority and their kingdom
+to him (Rev. 17. 12, 13, 17).</p>
+
+<p>What has been said of the British
+Empire may be true also of others of the
+ten kingdoms which have colonies or dependencies,
+and thus, while the ten kingdoms
+will themselves constitute an Empire,
+their alliances and treaties with other
+countries of the world will apparently
+involve an extension of the authority of
+the controlling despot "over every tribe
+and people and tongue and nation" (Rev.
+13. 7). If, for instance, the United States
+of America were at that time in alliance
+with Britain (quite a possible contingency),
+their joint influence would probably extend
+to the whole of the American continents,
+which would thereby acknowledge his
+authority.</p>
+
+<p>We may observe, too, the way in which
+the continent of Africa has come under
+certain European influences in modern
+times. The mention of this is simply
+suggestive. That the Scripture will be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span>
+absolutely fulfilled is beyond doubt; the
+exact mode of its accomplishment is known
+to God.</p>
+
+
+<p class="center">(2) <i>The Political Standpoint.</i></p>
+
+
+<h4>European Federation.</h4>
+
+<p>Agencies are already at work for the
+establishment of a confederacy of European
+States&mdash;not the least significant of the many
+signs that the end of the age is approaching.
+The movement towards confederacy is
+doubtless receiving an impetus from the
+great upheaval in Europe. A circular
+issued in December, 1914, and distributed
+far and wide, announced the formation of
+a committee of influential men with the
+object of promoting a "European Federation."
+The circular says: "In sight of the
+present situation of ruin it ought to be the
+general opinion that a firmer economical
+and political tie is of utmost importance
+for all nations without exception, and that
+particularly for Europe the narrower bond
+of a federation, based on equality and interior
+independence of all partaking states,
+is of urgent necessity, which public opinion
+ought to demand."</p>
+
+<p>A pamphlet published by the Committee
+recommends that the union of states shall<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span>
+be economical, political, and legal, with
+an international army as a common
+guarantee, and that European Federation
+should become the principal and most
+urgent political battle-cry for the masses
+of all European nations, and declares that
+"when the Governments are willing, when
+the public opinion of all peoples forces
+them to be willing, there is no doubt but
+that a reasonable and practical union of
+nations will prove to be as possible and
+natural as is at present a union of provinces,
+cantons, territories, whose populations
+often show more difference of race and
+character than those of nations now at
+hostilities." The Committee calls upon
+the peoples of Europe to suffer the diplomatists
+no longer to dispose of them like
+slaves and by militarism to lash them
+to fury against each other. It calls upon
+them to see to it that never and nowhere
+should a member of any body or Government
+be elected who is not an advocate
+of the Federation, and that the trade
+union, society, or club to which any individual
+belongs should express sympathy
+with the movement in meetings and in
+votes. "The people," it is said, "have it
+now in their power, more than ever before,
+to control the Powers."</p>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4>Two Possible Ways of Federation.</h4>
+
+<p>The formation of ten federated states,
+covering at least the area of the ancient
+Empire at the end of the first century of
+the present era, may be effected in two
+ways, either by the peaceful methods of
+arbitration and treaty, or as a result of
+strife and confusion. That the present
+European War will be succeeded by
+efforts for the creation of permanent international
+harmony and universal peace is
+probable, as is also some attempt at such a
+federation as is proposed by the above-mentioned
+Committee. On the other hand,
+sinister indications abound to-day which
+point to industrial strife and revolution
+rather than peace. The condition of the
+industrial world presents a gloomy prospect
+indeed. There are ominous signs of
+keener conflict than ever between capital
+and labour. The forces of Socialism,
+Syndicalism, Communism, &amp;c., are rapidly
+increasing in power and in international
+activity, and their avowed aims presage
+anything but peace in the near future. We
+may take, for example, the declared objects
+of "The Alliance of the Social Democracy"&mdash;now
+incorporated in the International
+Working Men's Association&mdash;"To destroy<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span>
+all States and all Churches with all their
+institutions and laws, religious, political,
+juridical, financial, magisterial, academical,
+economical, and social, and to establish
+in their place industrial co-operation
+and collective ownership of land and
+capital." All this sounds very pretentious,
+and would probably fail of complete accomplishment,
+but the agencies at work for it
+are strong. Attempts on a large scale
+would certainly lead to unprecedented
+disorder and chaos.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Sea Symbolic of National
+Unrest.</h4>
+
+<p>Not improbably the ten kingdoms of
+the reconstructed Roman Empire will
+arise as a result of political and social confusion.
+Thus it was in the case of the
+French Revolution and the consequent
+uprising of Napoleon. A repetition of
+such events on a far wider scale in the
+future is quite conceivable. In the prophetic
+vision given to the Apostle John,
+the beast was seen "coming up out of the
+sea" (Rev. 13. 1). Now the sea is in
+Scripture used figuratively of the nations,
+its characteristic restlessness symbolising
+their commotion and strife. Compare the
+words of Isaiah: "Ah, the uproar of many<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span>
+peoples, which roar like the roaring of the
+seas; and the rushing of nations, that rush
+like the rushing of many waters! The nations
+shall rush like the rushing of many waters:
+but He shall rebuke them" (Isa. 17. 12, 13;
+see also Psa. 65. 7; and Ezek. 26. 3). To
+national unrest the Lord Jesus applied
+similar language when He foretold to the
+disciples that there would be "upon the
+earth distress of nations, in perplexity for
+the roaring of the sea and the billows; men
+fainting for fear, and for expectation of the
+things which are coming on the world"
+(Luke 21. 25, 26). So also the waters
+which John had seen in his vision are described
+by the angel as "peoples, and
+multitudes, and nations, and tongues"
+(Rev. 17. 15). Daniel, too, saw the four
+great beasts come up from the sea as a
+result of the breaking forth of the four
+winds of the Heaven upon it, an undoubted
+representation of a condition of national
+disturbance (Dan. 7. 2, 3). That the beast
+of Revelation 13. 1 was seen coming up out of
+the sea points, therefore, to the probability
+that the ten kings who will have brief
+authority over the revived Empire will
+be raised to their kingdom, not by
+constitutional methods, but as the
+result of revolutions and the collapse of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span>
+present-day governments and institutions.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Revolutions and their Issues.</h4>
+
+<p>Should any great measure of success
+attend the syndicalist and communist
+movements of the day, and especially if
+they are internationalised, the inevitable
+revolutions and disorder would almost
+certainly issue, as revolutions have so
+frequently issued, in despotism and autocracy,
+and perhaps in this way the ten
+kings would arise. The overthrow of the
+governments in the countries involved
+would remove what has certainly been the
+great restraint upon lawlessness<a name="FNanchor_A_1" id="FNanchor_A_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a> from the
+times of the apostles until now. Everything
+would be ripe for the appearance of a
+universal potentate. The cry would arise
+for "a man," a controlling organiser to
+bring order out of chaos. The unstable
+character of the rule of the ten kings, and
+the impoverishment of their kingdoms,
+would lead them, as a matter of diplomacy,
+to hand over their authority to him.</p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_A_1" id="Footnote_A_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_1"><span class="label">[A]</span></a> See "The Epistles to the Thessalonians, with Notes
+Exegetical and Expository," by C. F. Hogg and W. E. Vine,
+note <i>c.</i> pp. 259, 260. (Glasgow: Pickering &amp; Inglis. 3/9, p.f.)</p></div>
+
+
+<h4>The Iron and the Clay.</h4>
+
+<p>The political constitution of the successive
+empires during "the time of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span>
+Gentiles" was indicated in the image of
+Nebuchadnezzar's vision by the various
+substances of which the parts of the image
+were composed. While the regular deterioration
+in the relative value of these
+substances is noticeable, we are concerned
+now with those of the legs and feet. The
+legs were of iron, and the feet part of iron
+and part of potter's clay, not moist or
+miry clay, but "earthenware" (Dan. 2.
+41, <small>R.V.</small>, margin), and consequently
+brittle (v. 42, margin).</p>
+
+<p>That the iron symbolised militarism
+seems clear from what is said of the fourth
+kingdom, that "as iron breaketh in pieces
+and subdueth all things: and as iron that
+crusheth all these, shall it break in pieces
+and crush" (v. 40). Nations are broken
+and crushed by military power, and thus
+the nations were treated by the Romans.
+This was further signified by the iron
+teeth of the fourth beast, as is definitely
+stated in Daniel 7. 19, 23: "And shall
+devour the whole earth, and shall tread it
+down, and break it in pieces."</p>
+
+<p>The supposition that the clay represents
+democracy is gratuitous and arbitrary.
+The early Roman Empire, symbolised by
+the legs of the image, was built up under
+democratic rule. When republicanism<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span>
+was superseded by imperialism, democratic
+principles still prevailed. Democracy,
+therefore, played its part from the very
+commencement of the fourth kingdom,
+and had it been symbolised by the clay,
+not only the feet and toes but the legs
+themselves would have consisted of mingled
+iron and clay. Moreover, democracy in
+the generally accepted sense of the term
+has not always been found to be of an
+unstable or brittle character; witness the
+republicanism of the United States. Democracies,
+too, may be established on
+strictly constitutional principles.</p>
+
+<p>Another explanation, therefore, of the
+symbolism of the clay must be sought,
+and it is not unlikely to be found in those
+revolutionary principles to which we have
+already referred, which were evidenced at
+the time of the French Revolution, and
+are finding expression, though in greater
+variety to-day, in such projects as those
+of the International Working Men's Association.
+Certainly the masses of the
+people of Europe are being permeated
+both by militarism and by the revolutionary
+doctrines of which we have spoken.
+Should these principles spread among the
+civil services and forces, everything would
+be in a complete state of preparedness for</p>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span></p>
+<h4>Unprecedented Political and Social
+Upheaval</h4>
+
+<p>which would effect the overthrow of present
+forms of government. From the world's
+point of view the situation would require
+a consummate genius with powers of world-wide
+organisation. Doubtless Satan's
+masterpiece of infidel ingenuity would be
+at hand for the occasion.</p>
+
+<p>We are not predicting that this is to be
+the manner of the revival of the Empire
+and of the advent of its imperial head.
+We have merely suggested possible circumstances
+in the light of Scripture and
+present-day movements. The actual circumstances
+attending the rise of the ten
+kings and their Emperor must for the time
+remain conjectural. Certainly these kings
+will receive authority with him for one
+hour (Rev. 17. 12), a phrase which may be
+translated "at the same time;" and
+certainly they will agree to give their
+power and authority to him (v. 13).</p>
+
+
+<p class="center">(3) <i>The Religious Standpoint.</i></p>
+
+<p>We will now note the religious conditions
+which are to prevail for a time
+upon the resuscitation of the Empire.
+These are plainly indicated for us in
+Revelation 17. The apostle sees a woman<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span>
+sitting on the seven-headed and ten-horned
+beast. The woman is gorgeously
+arrayed, holds in her hand a golden cup
+full of abominations, and is drunken with
+the blood of the saints. Her name, written
+on her forehead, is</p>
+
+
+<h4>"Mystery, Babylon the Great,"</h4>
+
+<p>"the mother of the harlots and of the
+abominations of the earth" (vv. 3-6).
+The woman is symbolically described as
+the city of Rome (v. 18), and that leads
+on to a second mention of Babylon, in
+chapter 18, and a new description. Now
+to the description of the woman in chapter
+17 nothing more closely corresponds than
+the Papacy. But if the Babylon of chapter
+17 is to be identified with that of chapter 18,
+the Papacy answers to the whole description
+only to a limited extent. While,
+however, there is much in common in the
+two descriptions in these chapters, yet the
+two Babylons are possibly to be distinguished.
+The Babylon of chapter 17 is
+a "mystery," not so that of chapter 18.
+Again, the destruction of the one is different
+from that of the other. The first will be
+destroyed by the ten kings and their
+emperor (17. 16), the second by the direct
+judgment of God (18. 5, 8, 20); the first as<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span>
+the result of human antagonism, the
+second by famine, fire and earthquake.
+We are perhaps, therefore, justified in
+taking the more limited view in connection
+with the circumstances of chapter 17.
+Even so the woman may be regarded as
+representing the apostate sacerdotal systems
+which have sprung from the Papacy
+as well as that system itself.</p>
+
+<p>The position of the woman indicates an
+exercise of power which is voluntarily
+supported by the beast. That she sits upon
+the waters implies her religious dominion
+over the nations; that she is carried by the
+beast, who rules over the nations politically,
+implies that there will be a complete
+alliance between her and the ten kings
+with their chief, and that the sphere of her
+influence will be co-extensive with the
+dominions of the beast.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Papacy: Its Present Power.</h4>
+
+<p>Now though the Papacy lost its temporal
+power in 1870, it is far from having lost its
+political influence. Ecclesiastically, too,
+though it has received various set-backs, it
+is manifestly gaining power. This is
+especially observable, for example, in
+Britain, the overthrow of which as a
+Protestant Power is undoubtedly the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span>
+object of the persistent aggressiveness of
+Romanism. This aggressiveness is manifest
+in all the dominions of the British
+Empire, as well as in other lands.</p>
+
+<p>Again, while certain governments have of
+late shaken off the ecclesiastical yoke, and
+infidelity has spread among the people of
+Roman Catholic lands, the number of
+Roman Catholics has increased with great
+rapidity. They were estimated at somewhat
+over 200,000,000 twenty years ago,
+they are now said to number about
+300,000,000.</p>
+
+<p>Indications are not wanting of a tendency
+towards</p>
+
+
+<h4>A Reunion of Christendom,</h4>
+
+<p>which would be facilitated by a willingness
+on the part of the Papacy to adapt itself
+to the impulse of the time.</p>
+
+<p>Present events, therefore, point to a
+great renewal of Papal power involving
+the fulfilment of the prophecy relating
+to the woman and the beast that carries
+her. This renewed alliance between the
+political and the ecclesiastical powers
+will, however, be of brief duration.
+The successful efforts of governments in
+recent times to liberate themselves from
+Papal authority, as in the case of France<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span>
+and Portugal, are but foreshadowings of
+the eventual entire destruction of ecclesiasticism
+and sacerdotalism under the
+revived Roman Empire. "The ten horns
+... and the beast, these shall hate the
+harlot, and shall make her desolate and
+naked, and shall eat her flesh, and shall
+burn her utterly with fire" (Rev. 17. 16).
+Thus it would seem that, when at the
+very zenith of its power and ambition,
+the Papacy, at the head of amalgamated
+Christendom, will suddenly meet
+its doom.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Doom of Religious Babylon.</h4>
+
+<p>Its accumulated wealth would probably
+be an incentive in determining the ten
+kings to take this step, owing possibly to
+the impoverishment of their kingdoms as a
+result of wars and political and social
+upheavals. An additional cause will
+doubtless be the widespread spirit of
+antagonism against all religion.</p>
+
+<p>Submission to the Papal yoke has invariably
+had an aftermath of infidelity;
+similarly the temporary subservience of
+the beast to the woman will issue in the
+casting off of all religious restraint and in
+the universal acknowledgment of the
+presumptuous claims of the world-ruler.</p>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4>Satanic Authority of the Emperor.</h4>
+
+<p>The authority of this final emperor of
+the Roman kingdom will be Satanic. "The
+dragon gave him his power, and his throne,
+and great authority" (Rev. 13. 2); "the
+beast ... was, and is not; and is about
+to come up out of the abyss, and to go into
+perdition" (Rev. 17. 8). This implies that
+he has been on the earth in the past. The
+same thing is indicated in the interpretation
+of the seven heads. Topographically they
+are described as seven mountains, personally
+as seven kings (v. 9). Of these,
+five had fallen, the sixth was in power in
+John's time, the seventh had not then
+come (v. 10). The beast (clearly here
+symbolising, not a kingdom, but a person)
+would be an eighth, and yet would be of the
+seven (v. 11). These heads have been regarded
+by some as forms of government, by
+others as empires, or again, as emperors.
+There seems to be no reason why they are
+not to be regarded as emperors, though
+doubtless their empires are in view, as
+being associated with them. Accordingly,
+the fact that the eighth is also one of the
+seven indicates his reappearance on the
+scene. Various suggestions have been
+made as to his identification, but this<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span>
+must remain uncertain until his advent.
+With him the ten kings for a time receive
+authority (v. 12), subsequently handing it
+over to him with their kingdom (v. 17),
+but not before they have together with him
+crushed the great religious system symbolised
+by the woman (v. 16). His
+stupendous power and brilliant abilities,
+the evidence of his superhuman origin,
+his phenomenal capacity for organisation,
+and the consolidation of the empire under
+his absolute control will cause the whole
+world to marvel at him (Rev. 13. 3; 17. 8).
+To the world, in its divinely inflicted and
+therefore retributive delusion, he will
+appear like a god who has come to deliver
+from woe, and to introduce the long-looked-for
+age of peace and prosperity. Wonder
+will be succeeded by worship, both of the
+man and of Satan. "They worshipped the
+dragon, because he gave his authority unto
+the beast; and they worshipped the beast,
+saying, Who is like unto the beast? and
+who is able to war with him?" (13. 4).</p>
+
+<p>The world is now in course of rapid
+preparation for all this:</p>
+
+
+<h4>The "Superman"</h4>
+
+<p>has of late become a much discussed topic
+in various classes of society and in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span>
+press, and the idea is supported by the
+theories of evolution which are receiving
+increasingly wide acceptance. A spirit
+of expectancy is being thus aroused which
+will undoubtedly facilitate the recognition
+of the man himself at his advent, and the
+acknowledgment of his claims to divine
+honour. But this will involve the worship
+of Satan, and to this end the effective
+agency of</p>
+
+
+<h4>Spiritism</h4>
+
+<p>has been long at work. Spiritism leads to
+devil worship. It must do so; its energising
+power is Satan himself. Both spiritism
+and theosophy, and similar forms of error,
+all of which are rapidly on the increase
+to-day, are paving the way for world-wide
+worship of the dragon.</p>
+
+<p>The imperial power and worship of this
+emperor will be promoted by another
+potentate similarly energised by Satan.
+This latter is the second beast, described
+in Revelation 13. 11-end. Later on in the
+book he is called</p>
+
+
+<h4>The False Prophet</h4>
+
+<p>(Rev. 16. 13; 19. 20; 20. 10), indicating
+that his activities are chiefly of a religious
+character, and perhaps that he will be
+more closely connected with Jewish affairs.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span>
+He will make "the earth and them that
+dwell therein worship the beast," the
+emperor of the ten kingdoms (13. 11),
+deceiving the world by supernatural signs
+wrought in the presence of the first beast
+(v. 12), and enforcing the worship of his
+image (v. 15), the abomination of desolation
+set up in the temple at Jerusalem
+(Matt. 24. 15). With the worship of an
+image the times of the Gentiles began
+(Dan. 3. 1), and with similar idolatry
+they will end. In the days of the early
+Roman emperors their deification was
+celebrated by the adoration of their images.
+Then, as formerly under Nebuchadnezzar,
+those who refused to worship suffered
+death. So will it be under the final
+emperor and his colleague.</p>
+
+<p>Various opinions are held regarding these
+two beasts of Revelation 13, as to which is
+the Man of Sin spoken of by Paul in 2
+Thessalonians 2, which the Antichrist
+mentioned in John's Epistles, and which of
+the two is the wilful king described in
+Daniel 11. Limitations of space preclude
+our entering into the subject in detail here.
+The present writer holds the view that all
+three are the same person, and that they
+are also the same as the horn in Daniel
+7. 8, 11, and as the first beast of Revelation<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span>
+13, and that these are all different
+descriptions of the final head of the
+revived Empire. The Old Testament
+passages somewhat briefly announce the
+arising of this world-wide ruler; the New
+Testament passages unfold and expand the
+preceding predictions concerning him,
+among the additional details given in the
+New Testament being the fact that he is to
+have a prophet who will assiduously support
+his claim to deity and his administration.
+It is the world-emperor, and not his
+prophet, who is to be worshipped, and who
+therefore proclaims himself as God (2
+Thess. 2. 4). His prophet, the second
+beast of Revelation 13, in the exercise of
+all the power of the first, will cause the
+world to worship him (13. 12). As his
+prophet and prime minister he would not
+himself endeavour to usurp the position
+of him whose avowed deity he seeks to
+support.</p>
+
+<p>The similarity of the details in the above-mentioned
+passages indicates that the same
+person is in view in each case. His blasphemies,
+for instance, and his assumption
+of deity are mentioned in Daniel 7. 25;
+11. 36, 37; 2 Thessalonians 2. 3, 4, and
+Revelation 13. 5, 6, and his war with the
+saints in Daniel 7. 21, 25 and Revelation<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span>
+13. 7. Further, the blasphemous proclamation
+of himself as God is consistent
+with what is said in John's Epistles concerning
+the Antichrist. For in his self-deification
+he is directly "antagonistic to
+Christ," he denies that Jesus is the Christ,
+and therefore denies the Father and the
+Son (1 John 2. 22).</p>
+
+<p>The two potentates will establish not
+only a universal religion, but also a</p>
+
+
+<h4>Universal System of Commerce.</h4>
+
+<p>The second beast "causeth all, the small
+and the great, and the rich and the poor,
+and the free and the bond, that there be
+given them a mark on their hand, or upon
+their forehead; and that no man should be
+able to buy or to sell, save he that hath
+the mark, even the name of the beast or the
+number of his name" (Rev. 13. 16, 17).
+This indicates a world-wide protectionist
+system, such a system as, for instance,
+might conceivably be established under
+some form of syndicalism. Undeniably,
+circumstances in the industrial world to-day
+manifest an increasing tendency in
+this direction. The principles previously
+mentioned, as now making for industrial
+and international revolution, and the
+present stupendous movements towards<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span>
+amalgamation, are clearly preparing for
+the fulfilment of this prophecy by facilitating
+the eventual establishment of the unrighteous
+commercial system of the reconstituted
+Empire.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 310px;">
+<img src="images/illus097.jpg" width="310" height="550" alt="Palestine, to illustrate Psalm 29." title="Palestine" />
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><span class="smcap">Chapter VI.</span></h2>
+
+<h3>THE EVERLASTING KINGDOM.</h3>
+
+
+<p>We have now to consider the dealings of
+the two beasts, the final Roman emperor
+and his false prophet, with</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Jews.</h4>
+
+<p>With the Romans the Jews joined in the
+death of Christ, and with the rulers of
+this fourth empire they will be in agreement
+for a time at the close of their
+long course of apostasy. This was especially
+made known to Daniel in the prophecy
+of</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Seventy Weeks</h4>
+
+<p>(Dan. 9). These weeks (lit., <i>hebdomads</i>, or
+periods of seven, <i>i.e.</i>, seven years each)
+had been divinely decreed (or "cut off,"
+<i>i.e.</i>, from the period of "the times of the
+Gentiles") upon his people and his city.
+From the going forth of the commandment
+to restore and to build Jerusalem unto the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span>
+Anointed One (the Messiah), the Prince,
+would be seven weeks and threescore and
+two weeks. After this the Anointed One
+would be cut off, and would have nothing
+(Dan. 9. 24-26). This period is 69 times 7,
+or 483 years, and to the very day this was
+the period commencing with the command
+of Artaxerxes Longimanus, King of Persia,
+for the restoration of Jerusalem (Neh.
+2. 1-9), and ending with the triumphal
+entry of Christ into the city (Matt. 21.
+1-11).<a name="FNanchor_B_2" id="FNanchor_B_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_B_2" class="fnanchor">[B]</a> Four days later He was crucified,
+"the Anointed One was cut off and had
+nothing," <i>i.e.</i>, He did not enter then upon
+His Messianic kingdom. The prophecy
+predicted that the people of the prince (lit.,
+"a prince") that would come would destroy
+the city and the sanctuary. That
+took place in <small>A.D.</small> 70, under Titus Vespasianus.
+But Titus is not "the prince
+that shall come." This, apart from other
+considerations, is clear from what follows:
+"And his (the prince's) end shall be with a
+flood (or rather, 'in the overflowing,' <i>i.e.</i>,
+of the wrath of God)," a prediction at once
+inapplicable to Titus. The mention of</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Last "Week"</h4>
+
+<p>is deferred, indicating an interval between<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span>
+the sixty-ninth and the seventieth.
+Now the events predicted for the seventieth
+had no historical fulfilment immediately
+after the sixty-ninth. The one, therefore,
+did not follow the other consecutively.
+At the commencement of the intervening
+period the Jews were scattered from their
+land. At the seventieth they will have
+been restored, and the events of that week
+concern "the prince that shall come," the
+last world-emperor, and his dealings with
+them. "He shall make a firm covenant
+with many (lit., 'the many,' <i>i.e.</i>, the
+great majority of the nation) for one
+week" (v. 27). This covenant is described
+in Isaiah's prophecies as a "covenant with
+death" and an "agreement with Hell."
+The covenant, he says, "shall be disannulled,"
+and the agreement "shall not
+stand; when the overflowing scourge shall
+pass through, then ye shall be trodden
+down by it" (Isa. 28. 18). That this
+refers to a time yet future and not to past
+Israelitic history may be gathered from
+verse 22, where the theme and the language
+are similar to those of the passage in Daniel
+now under consideration. Daniel tells us
+the mode of the disannulling. "In the
+midst of the week (<small>R.V.</small>, margin) he shall
+cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span>
+Accordingly after three and a half years the
+Antichrist, manifesting his real character,
+will prove himself a traitor and break the
+covenant, and thus Isaiah's prediction will
+be fulfilled.</p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_B_2" id="Footnote_B_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_B_2"><span class="label">[B]</span></a> See "The Coming Prince," by Sir Robert Anderson. Price, 5/.</p></div>
+
+<p>Apparently at the very time when he
+thus breaks his league with the Jews the
+Antichrist will determine upon his public
+deification and the establishment of his
+worship in the Temple. For he it is who
+"opposeth and exalteth himself above all
+that is called God, or that is worshipped;
+so that he as God sitteth in the Temple of
+God, showing himself that he is God"
+(2 Thess. 2. 4). This, with the setting up
+of his image, will doubtless be the fulfilment
+of the prophecies recorded by Daniel,
+that "upon the wing (or pinnacle) of
+abominations shall come one that maketh
+desolate" (Dan. 9. 27, cp. 11. 31 and 12. 11),
+and "they shall profane the sanctuary, even
+the fortress, and shall take away the continual
+burnt offering, and they shall set up
+the abomination that maketh desolate"
+(11. 31, cp. 12. 11); a fulfilment also of
+the Lord's prediction that "the abomination
+of desolation, which was spoken of
+by Daniel the prophet," will "stand in
+the holy place" (Matt. 24. 15). In the
+establishment of this blasphemous worship<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span>
+of the emperor, the false prophet will play
+a prominent part, as we have seen from
+the latter part of Revelation 13.</p>
+
+<p>The many references to the desolator
+and the desolations are indicative of the</p>
+
+
+<h4>Fierce Persecution</h4>
+
+<p>which will follow. This will be at first
+directed against "the remnant," the large
+numbers of Jews who will repudiate
+allegiance to the beast and to the false
+prophet, many doubtless having been converted
+to their coming Messiah through
+the testimony of two witnesses who will
+be sent from God to the nation. "They shall
+prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore
+days, clothed in sackcloth" (Rev.
+11. 3-13). The success of their ministry
+will apparently arouse the bitter antagonism
+of Satan and his human instruments.
+The breaking of the covenant with the
+people as a whole indicates that an effort
+will also be made to crush the entire nation.
+Thus the latter half of the seventieth week
+will be the time of "Jacob's trouble,"
+"a time of trouble, such as never was
+since there was a nation even to that same
+time" (Dan. 12. 1), though the unprecedented
+tribulation will not be confined
+to the Jews only.</p>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4>Armageddon and After.</h4>
+
+<p>The bitter antagonism of the man of
+sin, and his colleague, the false
+prophet, against God and His people
+will culminate in the gathering together
+of all the forces of the Empire in Palestine
+in final conflict for the complete domination
+of the world. This tremendous event is
+thus indicated by the apostle John: "And
+I saw coming out of the mouth of the
+dragon, and out of the mouth of the beast,
+and out of the mouth of the false prophet,
+three unclean spirits, as it were frogs:
+for they are the spirits of devils (correctly,
+"demons"), working signs; which go forth
+unto the kings of the whole world, to gather
+them together unto the war of the great
+day of God, the Almighty" (Rev. 16.
+13, 14).</p>
+
+<p>In reality the issue at stake will be the
+supremacy of Christ or of Satan in the
+earth. The objective will be neither
+territorial conquest nor naval supremacy,
+nor commercial predominance. The war
+of the beast and the ten kings under
+him is against the Lamb (Rev. 17. 14).
+This the second Psalm had foretold: "Why
+do the nations rage, and the peoples
+imagine a vain thing? The kings of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span>
+earth set themselves, and the rulers take
+counsel together against the Lord, and
+against His Anointed, saying, Let us
+break their bands asunder, and cast away
+their cords from us." The issue is not
+uncertain: "He that sitteth in the
+Heavens shall laugh: the Lord shall have
+them in derision."</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Scene of the Conflict</h4>
+
+<p>is Har-Magedon, commonly known as
+Armageddon (Rev. 16. 16). The name, which
+is associated with Megiddo, a locality famed
+in Old Testament history for its decisive
+battles (Judges 5. 19; 2 Kings 23), doubtless
+stands here for a wider area, stretching, as
+we shall see, from the north to the south
+of the land.</p>
+
+<p>The combatants, the conflict and its
+conclusion, are described by John in vivid
+language of terrible grandeur in Revelation
+19. 11-21: "And I saw the Heaven opened;
+and behold, a white horse, and He that sat
+thereon, called Faithful and True; and in
+righteousness He doth judge and make war.
+And His eyes are a flame of fire, and upon
+his head are many diadems; and He hath a
+name written, which no one knoweth but
+He Himself. And He is arrayed in a garment
+sprinkled with blood: and His name<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span>
+is called the Word of God. And the armies
+which are in Heaven followed Him upon
+white horses, clothed in fine linen, white
+and pure. And out of His mouth proceedeth
+a sharp sword, that with it He
+should smite the nations: and He shall rule
+them with a rod of iron: and He treadeth the
+winepress of the fierceness of the wrath
+of Almighty God. And He hath on His
+garment and on His thigh a name written,
+<span class="smcap">King of Kings, and Lord of Lords</span>.</p>
+
+<p>"And I saw an angel standing in the
+sun; and he cried with a loud voice, saying
+to all the birds that fly in mid heaven,
+Come and be gathered together unto the great
+supper of God; that ye may eat the flesh of
+kings, and the flesh of captains, and the
+flesh of mighty men, and the flesh of horses
+and of them that sit thereon, and the flesh
+of all men, both free and bond, and small
+and great.</p>
+
+<p>"And I saw the beast, and the kings of
+the earth, and their armies, gathered together
+to make war against Him that sat
+upon the horse, and against His army.
+And the beast was taken, and with him the
+false prophet that wrought the signs in his
+sight, wherewith he deceived them that had
+received the mark of the beast, and them
+that worshipped his image: they twain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span>
+were cast alive into the lake of fire that
+burneth with brimstone: and the rest were
+killed with the sword of Him that sat upon
+the horse, even the sword which came forth
+out of His mouth: and all the birds were
+filled with their flesh" (Rev. 19. 11-21).
+Ezekiel similarly describes the scene in his
+prophecy in chapter 30. 17-21.</p>
+
+<p>Thus it is that the climax of the world's
+rebellion against God is to meet its doom.
+This is the manner of the overthrow of the
+ten-kingdomed empire, the fourth of
+Daniel's visions. Accordingly, what we
+have now read from Revelation 19 is
+identical with (1) the falling of the stone
+upon the feet of the image in Nebuchadnezzar's
+vision, the annihilation of all
+Gentile government (Dan. 2. 45); (2) the
+consuming of the dominion of the fourth
+beast in Daniel's subsequent vision (Dan.
+7. 26); (3) the pouring out of God's
+wrath upon the Antichrist, the desolator
+(Dan. 9. 27); and (4) the coming of the
+Son of Man on the clouds of Heaven with
+power and great glory (Matt. 24. 30).
+The great emperor, the man of sin, is to
+be crushed by the Lord Jesus, "with the
+breath of His mouth," and brought to
+nought "by the manifestation of His
+coming" (2 Thess. 2. 8).</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span>Now this "manifestation of His coming"
+is, to transliterate the Greek words,</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Epiphany of His Parousia.</h4>
+
+<p>An epiphany is, literally, the 'shining
+forth' of that which has been hidden; and
+the word Parousia is, literally, 'presence'
+(see margin of <small>R.V.</small> and Phil. 2. 12).
+This latter word is used of the coming of
+Christ to the air for His saints, 'to receive
+them unto Himself,' and of their consequent
+presence with Him (1 Thess.
+2. 19). They are thus to be "ever with the
+Lord" (1 Thess. 4. 17), and with Him they
+will come when He descends at His revelation
+"from Heaven with the angels of His
+power in flaming fire, rendering vengeance
+to them that know not God, and to them
+that obey not the Gospel of our Lord Jesus"
+(2 Thess. 1. 7, 8). The sudden bursting
+forth of His glory thus "to execute judgment"
+(Jude 15) will be the 'Epiphany,
+or shining forth, of His Parousia,' and by
+it the Man of Sin is to be brought to nought
+and his empire demolished. He and his
+false prophet will be "cast alive into the
+lake of fire," and his armies will perish
+(Rev. 19. 20, 21).</p>
+
+<p>This is to be the issue of the world's
+attempts to establish a millennium of its<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span>
+own by schemes of federation and amalgamation.
+This is the upshot of its fancied
+progress and improvement without God
+and His Christ.</p>
+
+<p>We must now see what other Scriptures
+have to say concerning this scene. The
+instrument which the Lord uses for the
+destruction of His foes is a sword which
+proceeds <i>out of His mouth</i>; the destruction
+is described as the treading of the
+winepress.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Voice of the Lord.</h4>
+
+<p>First, as to the instrument. The sword
+is symbolic of the utterance of the Lord's
+voice. No material instrument is needed,
+a word is enough. This is clear from many
+passages. In the second Psalm the overthrow
+of the foe is thus described: "Then
+shall He <i>speak</i> unto them in His wrath, and
+vex them in His sore displeasure" (v. 5).
+Joel prophesies of the same event: "The
+sun and the moon are darkened, and the
+stars withdraw their shining: and the
+Lord <i>uttereth His voice</i> before His army;
+for His camp is very great; for He is strong
+that executeth His word: for the day of the
+Lord is great and very terrible; and who
+can abide it?" (Joel 2. 10, 11; and see
+3. 16. With this compare Isa. 11. 4 and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span>
+30. 30-33.) The same voice of judgment is
+implied in Paul's prediction of the doom
+of the lawless one, that "the Lord Jesus
+will slay him <i>with the breath of His
+mouth</i>" (2 Thess. 2. 8). In the same connection
+we are doubtless to read Psalm
+29, the Psalm which describes the terrible
+majesty and effect of the <i>voice of the Lord</i>.</p>
+
+<p>We must presently dwell more fully
+upon this Psalm in order to observe its
+application to the circumstances under
+consideration, and its connection with the
+passages which describe the judgment of
+the foe as</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Treading of the Winepress.</h4>
+
+<p>These passages are Isaiah 63. 1-6; Joel 9.
+16; Revelation 14. 17-20, and the one
+already quoted in Revelation 19. It is
+observable, too, that in the first of these
+the voice of the Lord is mentioned again,
+for the Deliverer describes Himself as
+"I that <i>speak in righteousness</i>."</p>
+
+<p>We shall first refer to Revelation 14.
+17-20. Two angels appear coming forth,
+the one from the temple in Heaven with
+a sickle in his hand, the other from the
+altar. The latter calls to the one with the
+sickle to gather "the clusters of the vine of
+the earth," symbolic of the Man of Sin and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span>
+his gathered armies. The angel then casts
+his sickle into the earth, gathers the vintage,
+and casts it into the winepress of
+the wrath of God. The winepress is
+"trodden without the city," and "there
+came out blood from the winepress, even
+unto the bridles of the horses, as far as a
+thousand and six hundred furlongs" (<i>i.e.</i>,
+200 miles). The great emperor and his
+prophet, and their vast forces, will thus
+be gathered in dense battle array throughout
+the length of Palestine, Jerusalem
+being their objective. Joel calls the scene
+of the battle "the Valley of Decision."
+"Come, tread ye," says the prophet, "for
+the winepress is full, the fats overflow; for
+their wickedness is great. Multitudes,
+multitudes in the valley of decision! for
+the day of the Lord is near in the valley of
+decision" (Joel 3. 13, 14). The multitudes
+are the forces of the Man of Sin.</p>
+
+<p>The first six verses of Isaiah 63 narrate
+in the form of a dialogue</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Overthrow of the Man of Sin</h4>
+
+<p>and his forces. The dialogue is between
+Messiah the Deliverer and the Jews.
+Having just overthrown the foe in the
+treading of the winepress, and the armies
+of the Empire being destroyed throughout<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span>
+the battle line from the north of
+the land to the south, the Messiah, in
+the fruits of His victory, reveals Himself
+to His astonished earthly people.
+In wondering admiration they exclaim:
+"Who is this that cometh from Edom,
+with dyed garments from Bozrah? this
+that is glorious, marching in the greatness
+of His strength?" To this their
+Deliverer answers, "I that <i>speak in
+righteousness</i>, mighty to save." The significance
+of this is at once apparent to the
+reader who calls to mind the various
+passages mentioned above in reference to
+the voice of the Lord. "I that speak in
+righteousness"&mdash;this is the voice uttered
+before His army (Joel 2. 10), "the sword
+that proceedeth out of His mouth" (Rev.
+19. 15); the "breath of His mouth," by
+which the Man of Sin is crushed (2 Thess.
+2. 8), and the "voice" of Psalm 29.</p>
+
+<p>The people, struck by the appearance of
+the Victor, next ask: "Wherefore art Thou
+red in Thine apparel, and Thy garments
+like him that treadeth in the winefat?"
+The language is doubtless symbolic. Messiah
+explains in reply how the threatening
+foes have been crushed: "I have trodden the
+winepress alone; and of the peoples there
+was no man with Me: yea, I trod them in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span>
+Mine anger, and trampled them in My
+fury; and their lifeblood is sprinkled upon
+My garments, and I have stained all My
+raiment. For the day of vengeance was
+in Mine heart, and the year of My redeemed
+is come. And I looked, and there
+was none to help; and I wondered that there
+was none to uphold: therefore Mine own
+arm brought salvation unto Me; and My
+fury, it upheld Me. And I trod down the
+peoples in Mine anger, and made them
+drunk in My fury, and I poured out their
+lifeblood on the earth" (vv. 3-6). The
+words of a previous prophecy express the
+joyful recognition of the delivered nation:
+"And it shall be said in that day, Lo, this
+is our God; we have waited for Him, and
+He will save us: this is the Lord; we have
+waited for Him, we will be glad and
+rejoice in His salvation" (Isa. 25. 9).</p>
+
+<p>Turning now to Psalm 29 we find</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Scene of Judgment</h4>
+
+<p>strikingly depicted; the very length of the
+battle line is indicated, in agreement with
+the later and clearer description in Revelation
+20. 14. Indeed, the passages which
+foretell the events of this coming terrible
+day afford a remarkable illustration of the
+progressive character of the revelations of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span>
+Scripture. The Psalm is divided into three
+parts: (1) The first three verses are a call
+to the saints in Heaven, the "sons of the
+mighty," to worship the Lord in view of
+the judgment He is just about to execute
+for the deliverance of His people the Jews,
+their land and their city. (2) The second
+part, verses 3-9, describes the actual
+judgment by means of "the voice of the
+Lord." The psalmist was doubtless thinking
+of a thunderstorm. The Spirit of God
+was giving prophetic utterance concerning
+a more terrible scene, and the geographical
+limitations of the Psalm are of prophetic
+import. The first place mentioned is
+Lebanon, in the north, with its mountain-spur
+Sirion (vv. 5, 6). The last place is
+the wilderness of Kadesh, in the south, the
+centre of which is Bozrah, in Edom (v. 8),
+a point of connection with Isaiah 63. 1.
+Now the distance from Sirion to Bozrah,
+in the wilderness of Kadesh, is 200 miles,
+and this is the 1600 furlongs of Revelation
+14.20. Here, then, in one fell stroke
+of divine wrath the Man of Sin and his
+forces are overthrown, and the Jews are
+delivered. The later revelations of Scripture
+thus enable us to pass from the natural
+and physical setting of the Psalm to the
+veiled reality. Thus this portion of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span>
+Psalm is to be read in connection with the
+passage from Revelation 19 quoted above.
+(3) The last two verses describe the results
+of the conquest.</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Jews in their Extremity</h4>
+
+<p>were threatened with annihilation. But
+man's extremity is God's opportunity.
+The people now see their Deliverer in
+person, they "look on Him whom they
+pierced." They realise that their enemies
+were destroyed because "the Lord sat as
+King at the flood." And now "the Lord
+sitteth as King for ever." He whose right
+it is to reign has come to Zion. Hence the
+psalmist can next say: "The Lord will
+give strength unto His people; the Lord
+will bless His people with peace." Armageddon
+is over, the winepress of God's
+wrath has been trodden, and the war
+against the Lamb is ended. Psalm 30
+follows on with the people's song of praise
+for deliverance.</p>
+
+<p>The judgments of God in the earth
+will be accompanied by</p>
+
+
+<h4>Seismic Disturbances,</h4>
+
+<p>including "a great earthquake such as was
+not since there were men upon the earth,"
+the overthrow of the cities of the nations,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span>
+and the displacement of islands and mountains
+(Rev. 16. 18-21). Then doubtless
+will be fulfilled the prophecy of Zechariah,
+that in the day when the Lord goes forth
+to fight against the nations that are
+gathered against Jerusalem, His feet will
+stand upon the Mount of Olives, and
+the mountain will be divided, leaving a
+very great valley east of the city (Zech.
+14. 1-5).</p>
+
+
+<h4>The Everlasting Kingdom.</h4>
+
+<p>In this tremendous intervention in the
+affairs of the world for the termination of
+Gentile dominion the Son of God will be
+accompanied by all His saints. He will
+come "to be glorified in His saints, and to
+be marvelled at in all them that believed"
+(2 Thess. 1. 10). So from earliest times
+Enoch had prophesied: "Behold, the
+Lord came with His holy myriads, to
+execute judgment upon all" (Jude 14,
+15, margin). And Zechariah: "The Lord
+my God shall come, and all the saints with
+Thee" (14. 5). They are to take an active
+part in the inauguration of His Kingdom,
+and in its government. For "the saints
+of the Most High shall receive the Kingdom,
+and possess the Kingdom for ever,
+even for ever and ever" (Dan. 7. 18). "The<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span>
+Kingdom and the dominion, and the greatness
+of the Kingdoms under the whole
+Heaven, shall be given to the people of the
+saints of the Most High" (v. 27).</p>
+
+<p>Then shall the Lord "be King over all
+the earth" (Zech. 14. 9). God's claims
+will be vindicated. His Christ will reign
+as King of Righteousness, and King of
+Peace, the centre of His government being
+the very place where once He was despised
+and rejected, and men cast Him out and
+crucified Him. Of the increase of His
+government and of peace there shall be no
+end, upon the throne of David, and upon
+His Kingdom, to establish it, and to uphold
+it with judgment and with righteousness
+from henceforth even for ever. The
+zeal of the Lord of hosts shall perform this
+(Isa. 9. 7). His saints "shall be priests
+of God and of Christ, and shall reign with
+Him a thousand years" (Rev. 20. 6).
+Then will be fulfilled the words of the
+Lord, "I am returned unto Zion, and will
+dwell in the midst of Jerusalem: and
+Jerusalem shall be called the city of truth;
+and the mountain of the Lord of hosts the
+holy mountain" (Zech. 8. 3). The days
+of Israel's mourning will be ended, the
+nation will be a "crown of beauty in
+the hand of the Lord, and a royal diadem<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span>
+in the hand of her God," and Jerusalem
+will be a praise in the earth (Isa. 60. 30;
+62. 3, 7). "The Heavens shall rejoice
+and the earth be glad," and "the earth
+shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord,
+as the waters cover the sea" (Psa. 96. 11;
+Isa. 11. 9). According to God's Eternal
+Counsel the despised Nazarene will yet be
+manifested and acknowledged by all as
+King of Kings and Lord of Lords.</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+"To Him be glory for ever and ever,<br />
+<br />
+<span class="smcap">Amen</span>."<br />
+</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">&nbsp;</a></span></p>
+<h2>INDEX.</h2>
+
+
+
+
+
+<div>
+<span style="margin-left: 3em;">PAGE</span><br />
+<br />
+Adrian, <a href="#Page_62">62</a><br />
+<br />
+Alaric, <a href="#Page_37">37</a>, <a href="#Page_38">38</a><br />
+<br />
+Alexander the Great, <a href="#Page_19">19</a><br />
+<br />
+Alliance of Social Democracy, <a href="#Page_71">71</a>, <a href="#Page_63">63</a><br />
+<br />
+Alsace and Lorraine, <a href="#Page_66">66</a><br />
+<br />
+Antichrist, <a href="#Page_85">85</a>, <a href="#Page_87">87</a>, <a href="#Page_91">91</a>, <a href="#Page_96">96</a><br />
+<br />
+Antiochus Epiphanes, <a href="#Page_20">20</a>, <a href="#Page_21">21</a>, <a href="#Page_64">64</a><br />
+<br />
+Antiochus the Great, <a href="#Page_19">19</a><br />
+<br />
+Armageddon, <a href="#Page_93">93</a><br />
+<br />
+Attila, <a href="#Page_39">39</a>, <a href="#Page_40">40</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Babylon, <a href="#Page_73">73</a><br />
+<br />
+Bagdad, <a href="#Page_46">46</a>, <a href="#Page_47">47</a><br />
+<br />
+Balkan Peninsula, <a href="#Page_46">46</a>, <a href="#Page_53">53</a><br />
+<br />
+Barnabas, Epistle of, <a href="#Page_32">32</a><br />
+<br />
+Beast, Twofold Symbolism of, <a href="#Page_35">35</a>, <a href="#Page_36">36</a><br />
+<br />
+Britain, <a href="#Page_23">23</a>, <a href="#Page_39">39</a>, <a href="#Page_53">53</a>, <a href="#Page_62">62</a><br />
+<br />
+British Empire, <a href="#Page_67">67</a>, <a href="#Page_68">68</a><br />
+<br />
+Bulgaria, <a href="#Page_53">53</a><br />
+<br />
+Byzantine Empire, <a href="#Page_46">46</a>, <a href="#Page_57">57</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Cæsar Augustus, <a href="#Page_14">14</a>, <a href="#Page_22">22</a>, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>, <a href="#Page_37">37</a><br />
+<br />
+Carthage, <a href="#Page_16">16</a>, <a href="#Page_17">17</a>, <a href="#Page_18">18</a>, <a href="#Page_40">40</a><br />
+<br />
+Chaldean Empire, <a href="#Page_12">12</a>, <a href="#Page_55">55</a>, <a href="#Page_60">60</a><br />
+<br />
+Charlemagne, <a href="#Page_58">58</a>, <a href="#Page_60">60</a><br />
+<br />
+Christendom, Reunion of, <a href="#Page_80">80</a><br />
+<br />
+Commercial System, <a href="#Page_87">87</a><br />
+<br />
+Comparisons of Symbols in Daniel and Revelation, <a href="#Page_29">29</a><br />
+<br />
+Constantine, <a href="#Page_26">26</a><br />
+<br />
+Constantinople, <a href="#Page_26">26</a>, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>, <a href="#Page_40">40</a>, <a href="#Page_44">44</a>, <a href="#Page_45">45</a>, <a href="#Page_46">46</a>, <a href="#Page_58">58</a><br />
+<br />
+Crimean War, <a href="#Page_52">52</a><br />
+<br />
+Crusades, <a href="#Page_47">47</a><br />
+<br />
+Cyprus, <a href="#Page_53">53</a><br />
+<br />
+Cyril, <a href="#Page_33">33</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Democracy, <a href="#Page_75">75</a>, <a href="#Page_76">76</a><br />
+<br />
+Diocletian, <a href="#Page_26">26</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Early Christian Writers, <a href="#Page_32">32</a>-<a href="#Page_34">34</a><br />
+<br />
+Eastern Half of Empire Overthrown, <a href="#Page_44">44</a><br />
+<br />
+European Federation, <a href="#Page_69">69</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+False Prophet, <a href="#Page_84">84</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Genseric, <a href="#Page_39">39</a>, <a href="#Page_40">40</a><br />
+<br />
+German Influence, <a href="#Page_53">53</a><br />
+<br />
+Germanic Tribes, <a href="#Page_37">37</a>-<a href="#Page_41">41</a>, <a href="#Page_56">56</a><br />
+<br />
+Grecian Empire, <a href="#Page_19">19</a>, <a href="#Page_63">63</a>, <a href="#Page_65">65</a><br />
+<br />
+Grecian Empire Divided, <a href="#Page_64">64</a><br />
+<br />
+Greece, <a href="#Page_19">19</a>, <a href="#Page_20">20</a>, <a href="#Page_52">52</a>, <a href="#Page_53">53</a>, <a href="#Page_65">65</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Hannibal, <a href="#Page_18">18</a><br />
+<br />
+Hippolytus, <a href="#Page_33">33</a><br />
+<br />
+Hungary, <a href="#Page_40">40</a>, <a href="#Page_49">49</a>, <a href="#Page_52">52</a>, <a href="#Page_66">66</a><br />
+<br />
+Huns, <a href="#Page_39">39</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+International Working Men's Association, <a href="#Page_71">71</a><br />
+<br />
+Ireland, <a href="#Page_67">67</a><br />
+<br />
+Irenæus, <a href="#Page_32">32</a><br />
+<br />
+Iron and Clay, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>, <a href="#Page_74">74</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Jerome, <a href="#Page_33">33</a><br />
+<br />
+Jews, <a href="#Page_22">22</a>, <a href="#Page_54">54</a>, <a href="#Page_55">55</a>, <a href="#Page_56">56</a>, <a href="#Page_62">62</a>, <a href="#Page_68">68</a><br />
+<br />
+Judæa Subdued by Romans, <a href="#Page_23">23</a><br />
+<br />
+Julius Cæsar, <a href="#Page_22">22</a><br />
+<br />
+Justinian, <a href="#Page_58">58</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Khaliphs, <a href="#Page_45">45</a>, <a href="#Page_47">47</a><br />
+<br />
+Kosovo, Battle of, <a href="#Page_49">49</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Lactantius, <a href="#Page_33">33</a><br />
+<br />
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span><br />
+Magnesia, Battle of, <a href="#Page_19">19</a><br />
+<br />
+Man of Sin, <a href="#Page_85">85</a>, <a href="#Page_100">100</a><br />
+<br />
+Medes and Persians, <a href="#Page_13">13</a>, <a href="#Page_55">55</a>, <a href="#Page_60">60</a><br />
+<br />
+Megiddo, <a href="#Page_94">94</a><br />
+<br />
+Mithradates, <a href="#Page_21">21</a><br />
+<br />
+Mohammed, <a href="#Page_45">45</a>, <a href="#Page_46">46</a><br />
+<br />
+Mohammed II., <a href="#Page_49">49</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Napoleon, <a href="#Page_72">72</a><br />
+<br />
+Navarino, Battle of, <a href="#Page_52">52</a><br />
+<br />
+Nebuchadnezzar, <a href="#Page_9">9</a>, <a href="#Page_11">11</a>, <a href="#Page_75">75</a>, <a href="#Page_96">96</a><br />
+<br />
+Northern Limits of Empire, <a href="#Page_41">41</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Odoacer, <a href="#Page_41">41</a><br />
+<br />
+Omar, <a href="#Page_45">45</a><br />
+<br />
+Osman, <a href="#Page_48">48</a><br />
+<br />
+Ottoman Empire, <a href="#Page_48">48</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Palestine, <a href="#Page_20">20</a>, <a href="#Page_21">21</a>, <a href="#Page_54">54</a>, <a href="#Page_56">56</a><br />
+<br />
+Papacy, <a href="#Page_79">79</a><br />
+<br />
+Parousia, The Epiphany of, <a href="#Page_97">97</a><br />
+<br />
+Psalm 29, <a href="#Page_102">102</a><br />
+<br />
+Pydna, Battle of, <a href="#Page_20">20</a>, <a href="#Page_21">21</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Roman Emperor, The Final, <a href="#Page_67">67</a>, <a href="#Page_68">68</a>, <a href="#Page_77">77</a>, <a href="#Page_82">82</a>, <a href="#Page_89">89</a><br />
+<br />
+Roman Empire&mdash;Decline of, <a href="#Page_51">51</a><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Extended in Final Form, <a href="#Page_60">60</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Final Destruction of, <a href="#Page_30">30</a>, <a href="#Page_32">32</a>, <a href="#Page_60">60</a>, <a href="#Page_96">96</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Still in Power at Close of Present Age, <a href="#Page_14">14</a>, <a href="#Page_30">30</a>, <a href="#Page_56">56</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Tenfold Division of, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>-<a href="#Page_34">34</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Twofold Division of, <a href="#Page_35">35</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Roman Influence Continued, <a href="#Page_56">56</a>-<a href="#Page_58">58</a><br />
+<br />
+Roumania, <a href="#Page_52">52</a>, <a href="#Page_53">53</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+San Stefano Treaty, <a href="#Page_53">53</a><br />
+<br />
+Saracens, <a href="#Page_45">45</a>, <a href="#Page_47">47</a>, <a href="#Page_55">55</a>, <a href="#Page_63">63</a><br />
+<br />
+Scotland, <a href="#Page_67">67</a><br />
+<br />
+Sea Symbolic of National Unrest, <a href="#Page_72">72</a><br />
+<br />
+Serbia, <a href="#Page_52">52</a>, <a href="#Page_53">53</a><br />
+<br />
+Seventy Weeks, <a href="#Page_88">88</a><br />
+<br />
+Slavery Under the Romans, <a href="#Page_23">23</a><br />
+<br />
+Spiritism, <a href="#Page_84">84</a><br />
+<br />
+Superman, <a href="#Page_83">83</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Ten Kingdoms Foretold, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>-<a href="#Page_34">34</a><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Not Formed in West, <a href="#Page_42">42</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Tertullian, <a href="#Page_33">33</a><br />
+<br />
+Theodoret, <a href="#Page_34">34</a><br />
+<br />
+Times and Seasons, <a href="#Page_10">10</a><br />
+<br />
+Titus, <a href="#Page_40">40</a>, <a href="#Page_89">89</a><br />
+<br />
+Tongrol Bek, <a href="#Page_47">47</a><br />
+<br />
+Trajan, <a href="#Page_23">23</a><br />
+<br />
+Trentino, <a href="#Page_66">66</a><br />
+<br />
+Tribulation, The, <a href="#Page_92">92</a><br />
+<br />
+Tripoli, <a href="#Page_53">53</a><br />
+<br />
+Turkish Empire, <a href="#Page_44">44</a><br />
+<br />
+Turkish Empire, Downfall of, <a href="#Page_63">63</a><br />
+<br />
+Turks, <a href="#Page_46">46</a>, <a href="#Page_55">55</a>, <a href="#Page_63">63</a><br />
+<br />
+Turks and Mohammedanism, <a href="#Page_47">47</a>, <a href="#Page_50">50</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+United States, <a href="#Page_67">67</a>, <a href="#Page_76">76</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Valens, <a href="#Page_26">26</a><br />
+<br />
+Vandals, <a href="#Page_38">38</a>, <a href="#Page_40">40</a><br />
+<br />
+Valentinian, <a href="#Page_26">26</a>, <a href="#Page_37">37</a><br />
+<br />
+Voice of the Lord, The, <a href="#Page_98">98</a>, <a href="#Page_101">101</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Western Half of Empire Overthrown, <a href="#Page_37">37</a>-<a href="#Page_41">41</a><br />
+<br />
+Winepress, The, <a href="#Page_99">99</a>, <a href="#Page_104">104</a><br />
+<br />
+<br />
+Zama, Battle of, <a href="#Page_18">18</a><br />
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">&nbsp;</a></span></p>
+<p class="center">Demy 8vo, 308 pages clear type, strong dark cloth,<br />
+gold title, 4/ net (4/6, or $1.12, post free).</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">The Epistles</span></h3>
+<p class="center">to the</p>
+<h3>Thessalonians</h3>
+
+<p class="center"><b>With Notes Exegetical and Expository.</b><br />
+
+By C. F. HOGG and W. E. VINE, M.A.<br />
+
+With Index to Subjects, Texts, and Greek Words.</p>
+<hr style="width: 15%;" />
+
+<p class="center"><i>A few out of very many favourable notices:</i></p>
+
+<p>"The authors have seen clearly the great difference
+between the <i>parousia</i> and the <i>epiphaneia</i>,
+and thus set forth, so much and so clearly, the
+great Hope of the Church."&mdash;Lord <span class="smcap">Blythswood</span>.</p>
+
+<p>"I greatly value such a book for the definiteness
+and prominence with which it unfolds the
+great truth of the Lord's return as a present hope&mdash;not
+a theory, nor yet a mere doctrine, but a
+blessed and glorious hope."&mdash;Sir <span class="smcap">Robert
+Anderson</span>, K.C.B., LL.D., London.</p>
+
+<p>"The notes are brief, clear, full, and suggestive.
+It supplies a felt want between such
+volumes as the International Critical and the
+ordinary devotional expositions."&mdash;<span class="smcap">Jas. F.
+Arthur</span>, Theological Tutor, B.T.I., Glasgow.</p>
+
+<p>"These notes are admirable. The authors disclaim
+having written for scholars, but as scholars,
+I may say, they write for Christians, but for
+Christians as Bible students and serious ones."&mdash;<span class="smcap">Geo.
+F. Trench</span>, B.A., Dublin.</p>
+
+<p>"The book is one of such permanent value and
+wide scholarship. I hope it will be the first and
+not the last."&mdash;<span class="smcap">H. M. Bleby</span>, B.A., Dudley.</p>
+
+<p>"Should certainly find a place in the library
+of all Christians who desire to study this portion
+of God's Word."&mdash;<span class="smcap">L. W. G. Alexander.</span></p>
+
+
+<p class="center">PICKERING &amp; INGLIS, 14 Paternoster Row, London, E.C.4.<br />
+
+229 Bothwell Street, Glasgow; 75 Princes Street, Edinburgh.<br />
+
+And through most Booksellers.</p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<div class="tn"><h3>Transcriber's Note:</h3>
+<p>1. The footnote at the end of page 74 reads: <br /><br />
+
+See "The Epistles to the Thessalonians, with Notes Exegetical and
+Expository," by C. F. Hogg and W. E. Vine, note <i>c.</i> pp. 259, 260.
+(Glasgow: Pickering &amp; Inglis. 3/9, p.f.)</p>
+
+<p>The <i>c.</i> is unclear</p>
+
+
+<p>2. The footnote at the end of page 89 reads:<br /><br />
+
+See "The Coming Prince," by Sir Robert Anderson. Price, 5/.</p>
+
+<p>The 5 in 5/ is unclear.</p>
+
+<p>3. Spelling, hyphenation and punctuation are left as in the original.</p>
+
+
+</div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Roman Empire in the Light of
+Prophecy, by W. E. Vine
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROMAN EMPIRE IN LIGHT OF PROPHECY ***
+
+***** This file should be named 38721-h.htm or 38721-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/7/2/38721/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/38721-h/images/illus002.jpg b/38721-h/images/illus002.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cd31cd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-h/images/illus002.jpg
diff --git a/38721-h/images/illus003.jpg b/38721-h/images/illus003.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cbe6624
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-h/images/illus003.jpg
diff --git a/38721-h/images/illus023.jpg b/38721-h/images/illus023.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7623965
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-h/images/illus023.jpg
diff --git a/38721-h/images/illus039.jpg b/38721-h/images/illus039.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7c4897
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-h/images/illus039.jpg
diff --git a/38721-h/images/illus049.jpg b/38721-h/images/illus049.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..49fe611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-h/images/illus049.jpg
diff --git a/38721-h/images/illus061.jpg b/38721-h/images/illus061.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d062479
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-h/images/illus061.jpg
diff --git a/38721-h/images/illus097.jpg b/38721-h/images/illus097.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb22e27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721-h/images/illus097.jpg
diff --git a/38721.txt b/38721.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..01c772d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3134 @@
+Project Gutenberg's The Roman Empire in the Light of Prophecy, by W. E. Vine
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Roman Empire in the Light of Prophecy
+       The Rise, Progress, and End of the Fourth World-empire
+
+Author: W. E. Vine
+
+Release Date: January 31, 2012 [EBook #38721]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROMAN EMPIRE IN LIGHT OF PROPHECY ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+Transcriber's note:
+
+      Text enclosed by underscores is in italics (_italics_).
+
+      Text enclosed by equal signs is in bold face (=bold=).
+
+      Small capital text has been replaced with all capitals.
+
+
+
+
+  THE
+  ROMAN
+  EMPIRE
+  IN
+  PROPHECY.
+
+  W. E. VINE, M.A.
+
+  "Regarded as an historical
+  manual it is of no little value,
+  and the author's summaries of
+  the rise and progress of Rome
+  are quite masterly in their way."
+
+  --_Glasgow Citizen._
+
+[Illustration: CAESAR AUGUSTUS, first Roman Emperor, born 63 B.C.
+Grand-nephew and heir of Julius Caesar Octavianus. Obtained supreme power
+over Roman dominions by victory over Anthony at Actium, 31 B.C.
+Proclaimed Emperor, 27 B.C., by the Roman Senate, which conferred on him
+the title Augustus. Died 19th August, A.D. 14, in his 76th year.]
+
+
+
+
+  THE
+  ROMAN EMPIRE
+  IN THE LIGHT OF
+  PROPHECY
+
+  --OR,--
+
+  THE RISE, PROGRESS AND END OF
+  THE FOURTH WORLD-EMPIRE.
+
+  BY
+  W. E. VINE, M.A.,
+
+  Author of "B.C. and A.D.; or, How the World was prepared for the
+  Gospel"; "The Scriptures and How to Use Them," etc.
+
+[Illustration: Publisher's Mark]
+
+  PICKERING & INGLIS
+
+  Printers and Publishers, 14 Paternoster Row, London, E.C.4
+  229 Bothwell Street, Glasgow; 75 Princes Street, Edinburgh
+
+
+
+
+               OFFICES AND AGENTS.
+
+
+  LONDON: PICKERING & INGLIS, 14 Paternoster Row, E.C.4.
+  GLASGOW: PICKERING & INGLIS, 229 Bothwell Street.
+  EDINBURGH: PICKERING & INGLIS, 75 Princes Street.
+  MANCHESTER: THE TRACT SOCIETY, 135 Deansgate.
+  LIVERPOOL: WM. T. JAYE, 18 Slater Street.
+  NEWCASTLE: NORTHERN COUNTIES DEPOT, 63a Blackett Street.
+  BIRMINGHAM: P. H. HULBERT, 315 Broad Street (Corner).
+  BATH: H. W. & H. R. GRIFFITHS, 35 Milton Avenue.
+  BRISTOL: W. B. W. SARSFIELD, 78 Park Street.
+  WESTON-SUPER-MARE: WESTERN BIBLE DEPOT, 12 Waterloo Street.
+  CARDIFF: H. J. LEAR, 17 Royal Arcade.
+  DUBLIN: R. STEWART, 10 D'Olier Street, and 2 Nassau Street.
+  BELFAST: R. M'CLAY, 44 Ann Street.
+  DUNDEE: R. H. LUNDIE, 35 Reform Street.
+  NEW YORK: GOSPEL PUBLISHING HOUSE, 318 West 39th Street.
+  CHICAGO: WM. NORTON, Bible Institute Assoc., 826 North La Salle St.
+  BUFFALO, N.Y.: SWORD AND SHIELD TRACT SOCIETY, 1247 Niagara St.
+  SWENGEL, PA.: I. C. HERENDEN, Bible Truth Depot.
+  LOS ANGELES, CAL.: GEO. RAY, 8508 So. Vermont Avenue.
+  BOSTON: HAMILTON BROS., 120 Tremont Street.
+  PHILADELPHIA: GLAD TIDINGS PUBLISHING CO., 5863 Christian St.
+  DALLAS, TEXAS: J. T. DEAN, 2613 Pennsylvania Avenue.
+  WINDSOR, ONT.: C. J. STOWE, 23 Martin Street.
+  TORONTO: UPPER CANADA TRACT SOCIETY, 2 Richmond Street, E.
+  ORILLIA, ONTARIO: S. W. BENNER, Bible and Tract Depot.
+  WINNIPEG: N. W. BIBLE DEPOT, 580 Main Street.
+  BUENOS AIRES: W. C. K. TORRE, Casilla 5.
+  MELBOURNE: E. W. COLE, Book Arcade.
+  SYDNEY: BIBLE, BOOK, AND TRACT DEPOT, 373 Elizabeth Street.
+  SYDNEY: CHRISTIAN WORKERS DEPOT, 170 Elizabeth Street.
+  BRISBANE: W. R. SMITH & CO., Bible Repository, Albert Street.
+  AUCKLAND, N.Z.: H. L. THATCHER, 135 Symonds Street.
+  DUNEDIN: H. J. BATES, Otago Bible House, 38 George Street.
+  PALMERSTON NORTH: JAMES G. HARVEY, Main Street.
+  CHRISTCHURCH: G. W. PLIMSOLL, 84 Manchester Street.
+  BELGAUM, INDIA: W. C. IRVINE, Christian Literature Depot.
+  BANGALORE: A. M'D. REDWOOD, Frasertown Book Depot.
+  SWITZERLAND: JAS. HUNTER, Clarens.
+  CAIRO: THE NILE PRESS, Bulag.
+  HONG-KONG: A. YOUNG, Bible Depot, 2 Wyndham Street.
+
+  _And through most Booksellers, Colporteurs, and Tract Depots._
+
+  Copyright--Pickering & Inglis.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+The following pages are the outcome of several conversations with
+inquirers shortly after the outbreak of the great war, in 1914, and of
+requests for notes of the views expressed. The subject of these
+conversations had occupied the earnest if intermittent attention of the
+writer for over twenty years. The notes were expanded into a series of
+articles which appeared in _The Witness_ during 1915. These have been
+revised and somewhat extended for the present volume, especially the
+last chapter, much of which was previously precluded by limitations of
+space.
+
+In regard to past history, the outlines of events connected with the
+Roman and Turkish Empires are given with the hope that the records will
+prove helpful to those who read the history of Nations in the light of
+Scripture.
+
+In regard to the future, while there are many events which the Word of
+God has foretold with absolute clearness, and upon these we may speak
+unreservedly, yet there are many circumstances concerning which definite
+prediction has been designedly withheld, and upon which prophecy is
+therefore obscure. In such matters an effort has been made to avoid
+dogmatism. Prophecy was not given in order for us to prophesy.
+
+On the other hand, the prophetic Scriptures are not to be neglected.
+Difficulty in understanding them is no reason for disregarding them.
+They are part of that Word, the whole of which is declared to be
+"profitable for doctrine, for reproof, for correction, for instruction
+in righteousness" (2 Tim. 3. 16). They therefore demand prayerful and
+patient meditation.
+
+For a speaker to refer to the study of the prophecies in a way which
+tends to minimise their importance in the minds of his hearers is to
+dishonour both the sacred Word and Him who inspired it. It is
+significant that the book of the Revelation opens with a promise of
+blessing to him who reads (the reference is especially to public
+reading) and to those who "hear the words of the prophecy, and keep the
+things which are written therein" (chap. 1. 3), and at the close repeats
+the blessing for him who keeps its words (chap. 22. 7).
+
+The quotations in the present volume are from the Revised Version, the
+comparatively greater accuracy of its translations being important for a
+correct understanding of many of the passages considered.
+
+While the book is published at the request of several friends, the
+author fulfils such request with the earnest desire that in matters of
+doctrine that only may be accepted which can be confirmed from the Word
+of God itself, and that the Lord may graciously own what is in
+accordance with His mind for the glory of His Name and the profit of the
+reader.
+
+BATH, 1916.                         W. E. VINE.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+  CHAPTER I.          PAGE
+
+  =The Times of the Gentiles=,                           9
+
+  Nebuchadnezzar's Dream,                               11
+
+  The Chaldean, Medo-Persian, Grecian Kingdoms,         12
+
+  The Fourth Kingdom,                                   13
+
+
+  CHAPTER II.
+
+  =The Roman Dominion=,                                 15
+
+  Rise and Progress of the Roman Empire,                16
+
+  Eastward Extension,                                   18
+
+  The Empire Completed,                                 22
+
+  The Crushing of the Nations,                          23
+
+  The Twofold Division,                                 25
+
+  The Tenfold Division,                                 27
+
+  A Comparison of the Visions,                          29
+
+  Testimony of Early Christian Writers,                 32
+
+  Processes at Work Since the Twofold Division,         34
+
+
+  CHAPTER III.
+
+  =The Overthrow in the West=--GERMANIC INVASIONS,      35
+
+  Disintegration of the Western Half,                   37
+
+  Alaric and the Goths,                                 37
+
+  Attila and the Huns,                                  39
+
+  Genseric and the Vandals,                             40
+
+  Northern Limits of the Empire,                        41
+
+  Ten Kingdoms not Formed by Germanic Invasions,        42
+
+
+  CHAPTER IV.
+
+  =The Overthrow in the East=--TURKISH EMPIRE,          44
+
+  Mohammed and the Khaliphs,                            45
+
+  Eastern Empire at End of 10th Century,                46
+
+  The Appearance of the Turks,                          46
+
+  The Turks Embrace Mohammedanism,                      47
+
+  The Turks Enter Europe,                               48
+
+  Constantinople Taken,                                 49
+
+  A Comparison of the Two Divisions,                    50
+
+  Decline of the Turkish Empire,                        51
+
+  The Coming Overthrow,                                 54
+
+  A Blank in Prophecy,                                  55
+
+  Continuation of the Roman Government,                 56
+
+  Roman Imperialism Continued,                          57
+
+
+  CHAPTER V.
+
+  =Coming Revival of the Roman Empire=,                 59
+
+  1. GEOGRAPHICAL CONSIDERATIONS,                       59
+
+      Review of the Ancient Territories,                62
+
+      Divisions of the Greek Empire,                    63
+
+      Other European Territories,                       65
+
+      The British Empire,                               67
+
+  2. POLITICAL STANDPOINT,                              69
+
+      European Federation,                              69
+
+      The Sea Symbolic of National Unrest,              72
+
+      Revolutions and their Issues,                     74
+
+      The Iron and the Clay,                            74
+
+      Unprecedented Political and Social Upheaval,      77
+
+  3. THE RELIGIOUS STANDPOINT,                          77
+
+      The Papacy: Its Present Power,                    79
+
+      A Reunion of Christendom,                         80
+
+      The Doom of Religious Babylon,                    81
+
+      Satanic Authority of the Emperor,                 82
+
+      The "Superman,"                                   83
+
+      Spiritism--The False Prophet,                     84
+
+      Universal System of Commerce,                     87
+
+
+  CHAPTER VI.
+
+  =The Everlasting Kingdom=,                            88
+
+  The Jews,                                             88
+
+  The Seventy Weeks,                                    88
+
+  The Last "Week,"                                      89
+
+  Fierce Persecution,                                   92
+
+  Armageddon and After,                                 93
+
+  The Scene of the Conflict,                            94
+
+  The Epiphany of His Parousia,                         97
+
+  The Voice of the Lord,                                98
+
+  The Treading of the Winepress,                        99
+
+  Overthrow of the Man of Sin,                         100
+
+  The Scene of Judgment,                               102
+
+  The Jews in their Extremity,                         104
+
+  Seismic Disturbances,                                104
+
+  THE KING ETERNAL,                                    107
+
+
+=Index to Maps.=
+
+  ROMAN EMPIRE IN APOSTOLIC TIMES,                      22
+
+  WESTERN ROMAN EMPIRE UNDER GERMANIC TRIBES,           36
+
+  TURKISH EMPIRE IN THE 16TH CENTURY,                   44
+
+  TURKISH EMPIRE IN 1914,                               54
+
+  PALESTINE TO ILLUSTRATE PSALM 29,                     88
+
+
+
+
+The Roman Empire in the Light of Prophecy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+THE TIMES OF THE GENTILES.
+
+
+The overthrow of the kingdom of Judah recorded in 2 Kings 24 and 25, and
+in the opening words of the book of Daniel, was a remarkable crisis in
+the history of the world. In judgment upon the people of God for their
+long-continued iniquity, sovereignty was removed from their hands, king
+and people were led into captivity, and Jerusalem was, in fulfilment of
+Jeremiah's words, given into the hand of Nebuchadnezzar, the king of
+Babylon (Jer. 21. 10). The government of their land was thus committed
+to the Gentiles, and with the Gentiles it has remained from that day
+till now. These events took place in 606 and 587 B.C.
+
+
+The Times of the Gentiles.
+
+But Gentile control is not to continue indefinitely. This, which is
+plain from many Scriptures, was intimated by Christ to His disciples
+when He said of Jerusalem that the city would "be trodden down of the
+Gentiles until the times of the Gentiles be fulfilled" (Luke 21. 24).
+The phrase, "the times of the Gentiles," calls for consideration, and
+especially as it has to do with Nebuchadnezzar's conquest just
+mentioned.
+
+There are two words translated "times" in the New Testament; one is
+_chronoi_, which is invariably rendered "times;" the other is _kairoi_,
+which, when the two are found together, is rendered "seasons." Thus
+Paul, in writing to the Thessalonian Church, says, "But concerning the
+times and the seasons, brethren, ye have no need that aught be written
+unto you" (1 Thess. 5. 1, R.V.; cp. Acts 1.7). We may distinguish
+"seasons" from "times" in the following way: "times" denotes mere
+duration, lengths of time; "seasons" implies that these lengths of time
+have certain events or circumstances associated with them by which they
+are characterised. Thus the words almost exactly correspond to the terms
+"periods" and "epochs." Now the word _kairoi_, "seasons," is used in the
+phrase translated "the times of the Gentiles," which might accordingly
+be rendered "the seasons of the Gentiles." We look, then, for some
+special characteristic of the period or periods thus designated. We have
+observed that Nebuchadnezzar's overthrow of the kingdom of Judah
+involved the transference of its sovereignty from Jew to Gentile from
+that event onward. "The times of the Gentiles," accordingly, is that
+period, or succession of periods, during which dominion over the Jews
+and their land is committed to Gentile Powers.
+
+
+Nebuchadnezzar's Dream.
+
+Special significance attaches to the fact that no sooner had the times
+of the Gentiles begun than God made known the future course of their
+authority over His people, and the character and doom of that authority,
+and made it known to the first Gentile conqueror himself. It was in the
+second year of his reign that Nebuchadnezzar saw in a dream the great
+image by means of which the purposes of God were to be communicated to
+him. The description of this, given by Daniel to the troubled monarch,
+is as follows: "Thou, O king, sawest, and behold a great image. This
+image, which was mighty, and whose brightness was excellent, stood
+before thee; and the aspect thereof was terrible. As for this image,
+his head was of fine gold, his breast and his arms of silver, his belly
+and his thighs of brass, his legs of iron, his feet part of iron, and
+part of clay. Thou sawest till that a stone was cut out without hands,
+which smote the image upon his feet that were of iron and clay, and
+brake them in pieces. Then was the iron, the clay, the brass, the
+silver, and the gold, broken in pieces together, and became like the
+chaff of the summer threshing-floors: and the wind carried them away,
+that no place was found for them: and the stone that smote the image
+became a great mountain, and filled the whole earth" (Dan. 2. 31-35).
+
+Interpreting this vision, the prophet identified Nebuchadnezzar, the
+Chaldean monarch, with the head of gold, and foretold that his kingdom,
+or empire, would be followed in succession by three others,
+corresponding respectively to the different parts of the remainder of
+the image and to the nature of the metals composing them. Of the four
+kingdoms the last is to engage our chief attention in these papers.
+Passing from the first, the =Chaldean=, as specified in Daniel's words
+to the king, "Thou art this head of gold" (v. 38), we are shown that the
+second kingdom was that of the =Medes and Persians= by the prophet's
+record of the doom of Nebuchadnezzar's successor, Belshazzar: "In that
+night Belshazzar the Chaldean king was slain. And Darius the Mede
+received the kingdom" (Dan. 5. 30, 31; cp. v. 28). That the third
+kingdom was the =Grecian= we find in the interpretation of part of a
+vision recorded in the eighth chapter: "The ram which thou sawest that
+had the two horns, they are the kings of Media and Persia. And the rough
+he-goat [who was seen to destroy the ram, v. 8] is the king of Greece"
+(vv. 20, 21; cp. chap. 10. 20).
+
+
+The Fourth Kingdom.
+
+The name of the fourth kingdom is not mentioned in the Old Testament,
+but the prediction given in the ninth chapter of Daniel's prophecies
+sufficiently identifies it. Messiah, it was said, would be cut off, and
+the people of a coming prince would destroy the city and the sanctuary.
+Now we know that the perpetrators of this were the Romans. We know, too,
+that by them the Grecian empire was conquered. The world-wide rule of
+the first =Roman= Emperor is indicated in the words of Luke's
+introduction to his record of the birth of Christ: "Now it came to pass
+in those days, there went out a decree from Caesar Augustus, that all the
+world should be enrolled" (Luke 2. 1).
+
+It is important to note that this fourth kingdom will, in its final
+condition, be in world-wide authority at the close of the times of the
+Gentiles, that is, that the Roman power, though in a divided state, will
+not be finally destroyed until it meets its doom at the hands of the Son
+of God. This fact, which will receive fuller treatment later, and is
+borne out by several Scriptures, is plainly indicated in the passage
+which describes the last state of the fourth kingdom and its
+destruction. Immediately after showing that it would be a divided
+kingdom, and describing the nature of that division (vv. 41-43), the
+prophet says: "And in the days of those kings shall the God of Heaven
+set up a kingdom, which shall never be destroyed, nor shall the
+sovereignty thereof be left to another people; but it shall break in
+pieces and consume all these kingdoms, and it shall stand for ever" (v.
+44). Now this indestructible kingdom cannot be other than that of
+Christ, and by His kingdom the fourth is to be broken in pieces and
+consumed, thus involving the overthrow of all forms of Gentile
+authority. Obviously no form of world government will exist between that
+of the fourth kingdom, in its condition described in verses 42, 43, and
+the kingdom of Christ which destroys it.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+THE ROMAN DOMINION.
+
+
+An understanding of the Scriptures does not depend upon access to other
+books, or reference to historical records outside the limits of the
+Bible. The Word of God is its own interpreter, and all that is needed
+for our establishment in the faith is contained in its pages. On the
+other hand, the Bible throws light upon history not recorded therein,
+and it is with that in view that we give certain historical outlines in
+dealing with our subject.
+
+The first part of the prophet's description of the fourth kingdom is as
+follows: "The fourth kingdom shall be strong as iron: forasmuch as iron
+breaketh in pieces and subdueth all things: and as iron that crusheth
+all these, shall it break in pieces and crush" (v. 40). A similar
+description is given in his account of a subsequent vision, in which he
+saw four great beasts coming up from the sea. In this vision the Roman
+kingdom again was undoubtedly symbolised by the fourth beast. This beast
+he describes as "terrible and powerful, and strong exceedingly; and it
+had great iron teeth: it devoured and brake in pieces, and stamped the
+residue with his feet" (7. 7). So, again, in the words of the
+interpretation: "The fourth beast shall be a fourth kingdom upon earth,
+which shall be diverse from all the kingdoms, and shall devour the whole
+earth, and shall tread it down, and break it in pieces" (v. 23). Now all
+this exactly depicts the Roman power in its subjugation and control of
+the nations which eventually composed its empire. In the light, then, of
+these prophecies we give a brief sketch of its rise and conquests.
+
+
+The Rise and Progress of the Roman Empire.
+
+The Romans, who early in the third century B.C. had become masters of
+all Italy, save in the extreme north, were drawn into a course of
+conquest beyond the limits of their own country by the rivalry of the
+rapidly advancing power of Carthage in North Africa. Carthage, a city
+founded some centuries earlier by Phoenician colonists from Tyre and
+Sidon, had at length become the capital of a great North African empire,
+stretching from Tripoli to the Atlantic Ocean, and embracing settlements
+elsewhere in countries and islands of the Mediterranean. These
+settlements included the greater part of Sicily, and that island,
+situated between the rival nations, became the first bone of contention
+between them. The precise cause of the struggle must not occupy us here,
+but the circumstances which decided the Roman Government, in 264 B.C.,
+upon an invasion of Sicily were of the deepest significance in the
+history of the world. By the year 242 Sicily was subdued. In the
+following year the island was ceded by Carthage, and the extension of
+Roman dominion beyond Italy was begun. The war continued intermittently,
+with many vicissitudes, for a century, but eventually the Carthagians
+were overwhelmingly defeated by land and sea. "Think you that Carthage
+or that Rome will be content, after the victory, with its own country
+and Sicily?" said a Greek orator, while the issues of the struggle in
+its earliest stage were yet in the balance. Rome's vast ambition, and
+her abundant means of gratifying it, justified the orator's fears. The
+islands of Sardinia and Corsica were shortly afterwards seized.
+
+Defeated in Sicily, Carthage extended her dominions in Spain and made
+that country a base for marching through Gaul to attack the Romans from
+the north. Though their renowned leader Hannibal met with success, their
+effort was doomed to failure. Meanwhile Roman armies had pushed into
+Spain. After a fierce struggle of thirteen years the Carthagians were
+completely overcome there, and Spain soon became a Roman province. By
+the decisive battle of Zama, in North Africa, in 202, Carthage and its
+territories became tributary, and thus all the western Mediterranean
+passed under the supremacy of Rome. Eventually in 146, as a result of a
+final war, Carthage was razed to the ground, and its North African
+kingdom was constituted a Roman province under the name of Africa. War
+with the Celts in North Italy, commencing the next year, resulted in the
+extension of the boundary to the Alps, and countries beyond began to
+feel the terror of the Roman name.
+
+
+Eastward Extension.
+
+The second century B.C. witnessed the spread of the iron rule eastward.
+The Grecian Empire of Alexander the Great, the third mentioned in
+Daniel's interpretation, had embraced all the countries surrounding the
+eastern half of the Mediterranean and had stretched far beyond the
+Euphrates. The disintegration of Alexander's empire after his death
+prepared the way for the Romans. Macedonia, the former seat of that
+empire, was their first great objective. A pretext for war was soon
+forthcoming, and war was actually declared in 200 B.C. A series of
+struggles ensued, and Macedonia was not finally subdued for over thirty
+years. Meanwhile matters had developed in Greece and Asia Minor. In the
+latter country Antiochus III., the Great, who had also conquered Syria
+and Palestine, was seeking to extend his dominions. Cities and states of
+Asia Minor, however, groaning under the tyranny of Antiochus, appealed
+to Rome for aid. The Romans declared war against him in 192 B.C. The
+first conflict occurred in Greece, which was largely under his
+influence. An early victory secured the submission of the Greek states.
+Antiochus retreated into Asia Minor, and was finally crushed at Magnesia
+in 190. The whole of Asia Minor was then surrendered to Rome. Actual
+possession was postponed and local government was largely granted both
+there and in Greece. But that policy proved impracticable, and the force
+of circumstances compelled a forward movement to universal empire. There
+was no such thing as the balance of power in the ancient world. Once a
+country became predominant there was nothing for it but the subjugation
+of its neighbours. The extension of Rome's dominions eastward was a
+fulfilment of a destiny beyond its own control. The reverent student of
+Scripture sees in the course of these events the unfolding of God's
+plans and the fulfilment of His Word.
+
+The final campaign against the Macedonians was opened in 169 B.C., and
+in the next year they were overwhelmed at the decisive battle of Pydna.
+Macedonia and the adjacent state of Illyria became tributary, and
+eventually were reduced to Roman provinces.
+
+The Romans then felt the necessity of definitely annexing Greece.
+Seventy towns in that country were plundered and 150,000 inhabitants
+were sold into slavery. Antiochus IV., Epiphanes, was now king of Syria
+and Palestine, and had possessed himself of almost the whole of Egypt.
+Such was the effect of the battle of Pydna, however, that he was at once
+compelled to hand over Egypt to the conquerors, and that country became
+a Roman protectorate. Syria passed under Roman control at the death of
+Antiochus Epiphanes, in 164, and by the end of a few decades all the
+states of Asia Minor had been incorporated.
+
+Thus by the middle of this century the Republic of Rome had gained
+ascendancy east and west. Its senate was recognised by the civilised
+world as "the supreme tribunal for kings and nations." Early in the next
+century Dalmatia and Thrace were subdued, and the latter was
+incorporated in the province of Macedonia. Wars with Mithradates, King
+of Pontus, Cappadocia and Armenia, resulted in the conquest of all his
+territories, and provinces were formed out of the states from thence
+westward to the AEgean sea.
+
+
+Palestine Annexed.
+
+This century saw the actual interference of Rome in the affairs of
+Judaea. Syria had been made a province in 65 B.C. by the Roman General
+Pompey, and from thence he intervened in a strife which had for some
+time been raging amongst the leaders of the Jews. In 63 he marched an
+army into Judaea and took Jerusalem. At the final assault upon the Temple
+12,000 Jews perished. Judaea thus passed under the iron heel.
+
+As a result of the wars of Caesar in north-western Europe, in 58-51 B.C.,
+what are now Switzerland, France, and Belgium were subdued and Britain
+was invaded. By Caesar also Roman authority in Africa was consolidated
+across the entire length of the north of the continent. The conquests of
+Rome as a Republic were complete. The Mediterranean had become a "Roman
+lake."
+
+[Illustration: THE ROMAN EMPIRE IN APOSTOLIC TIMES.]
+
+
+The Empire Completed.
+
+In 27 B.C. the purely Republican form of constitution was abolished, and
+the government of the Roman world was concentrated in the hands of an
+Emperor, the Caesar Augustus of Luke 2.1. In his reign were fulfilled the
+prophecies foretelling the Birth of Christ. When the Prince of Peace was
+born in Bethlehem the din of strife was hushed throughout the empire,
+and Rome, under the restraining hand of God, ceased for a time its
+warring. By Augustus the northern territories of the empire were
+extended to practically the entire length of the Danube. The greater
+part of Britain became a province under Claudius. A later Emperor,
+Trajan, added, at the beginning of the second century A.D., the province
+of Dacia, covering what are now Transylvania and most of Roumania. Under
+Marcus Aurelius (161-180) a large part of Mesopotamia was finally
+annexed.
+
+This completes the actual conquests of the Romans. We will now note
+certain characteristics of their method of subjugation, viewed in the
+light of Daniel's prophecy concerning the fourth kingdom, that, like
+iron, it would "break in pieces and crush."
+
+
+The Crushing of the Nations.
+
+The crushing process was evidenced in many ways, and especially by the
+establishment of a general system of slavery, which almost everywhere
+supplanted free labour. Slave-hunting and slave-dealing became a
+profession. To such an extent were they carried on at one period that
+certain provinces were well nigh depopulated. We are told that at the
+great slave-market in the island of Delos, off Greece, as many as ten
+thousand slaves were disembarked in the morning and bought up before
+the evening of the same day. Chained gangs worked under overseers and
+were confined in prison at night. To take an instance of the extreme
+rigour of the laws regulating the traffic, it is recorded by the
+historian Tacitus, that once, when the Prefect of Rome had been killed
+by one of his slaves, of whom he owned a vast number, the whole of his
+slaves, many of them women and children, were executed together, in
+accordance with an ancient law. That event took place about the time,
+apparently, at which the Apostle Paul arrived at Rome.
+
+But not only were the nations ground down by slavery, the pages of Roman
+history abound in records of wholesale massacre and butchery. We may
+note, for instance, Luke's statement of Pilate's slaughter of Galilaeans
+while they were sacrificing (Luke 13. 1). Records abound, too, of
+grossly burdensome taxation and financial exactions, in which the Romans
+outdid all tyrants that had preceded them. Usury flourished in the last
+century as it had never done before. Four per cent. per month was an
+ordinary exaction for a loan to a community. On one occasion a Roman
+banker, who had a claim on the municipality of Salamis, in Cyprus, kept
+its council blockaded until five of its members died of hunger.
+
+By these methods the provinces of the empire were at one period reduced
+to a condition of unsurpassed misery. Nothing could more vividly
+describe the course of such a kingdom and the control exercised by it
+than the words of Daniel quoted above.
+
+
+The Twofold Division.
+
+This fourth kingdom was destined to be divided; and in two respects,
+territorial and constitutional. The territorial division was indicated
+by the symbolism of the legs and feet of the image of Nebuchadnezzar's
+vision; the constitutional division was declared in Daniel's
+interpretation concerning the iron and clay (v. 40). The former of these
+divisions claims our consideration first. Territorially the kingdom
+would be first divided into two parts corresponding with the legs of the
+image. This actually took place in the fourth century of the present
+era.
+
+The Roman Empire had continued in a more or less united condition for
+over three centuries after the accession of its first Emperor, Augustus,
+in 27 B.C., though various signs of a coming division manifested
+themselves. It was not unusual, for instance, for an emperor to appoint
+an associate with himself in the imperial rank, and on one occasion
+Maximian, who thus became associated with Diocletian in A.D. 288,
+actually established his seat of government at Nicomedia, in Asia Minor.
+Constantine (323-337) united the empire under his sole rule, but paved
+the way for the final separation of east from west by founding, in 328,
+the city of Constantinople as a second Rome, after his own name, and
+establishing it as an eastern centre of government with its own
+legislative institutions. This arrangement was favoured by several
+conditions, national and otherwise, which characterised the countries of
+the eastern half as distinct from those of the western.
+
+At the death of Constantine, in 337, his dominions were divided among
+his three sons, a division, however, which lasted but a brief time. The
+empire was in 353 again united under Constantius, the survivor of the
+three. The long impending division into two parts took place under
+Valentinian I., in the year of his accession, 364. Yielding to the wish
+of his soldiers that he should associate a colleague with himself, he
+placed his brother Valens in power in the east, with headquarters at
+Constantinople, he himself retaining control over the west.
+
+
+The Tenfold Division.
+
+Prophetic Scriptures show that the Roman Empire would be further
+divided. Now while the ten toes of the image in Nebuchadnezzar's dream
+have not improperly been regarded as indicative of a tenfold division,
+the fact that the image had ten toes would be insufficient of itself to
+signify this, for the toes are naturally essential to a complete human
+figure. Moreover, the hands and their fingers, equally essential parts,
+have no territorial significance attached to them. The conclusion
+regarding the toes is, however, justified when we find the tenfold
+division abundantly confirmed by other Scriptures.
+
+Thus the fourth beast in the vision in chapter 7, which, as we have
+seen, likewise symbolised the Roman kingdom, is described as having _ten
+horns_ (v. 7). The interpretation clearly tells us what these are: "And
+as for the ten horns, out of the kingdom (the fourth) shall _ten kings_
+arise" (v. 24). The Apocalypse gives us further information regarding
+this division, unfolding with increasing clearness the details connected
+with it. In one of the visions given to the apostle John, he sees "a
+great red dragon, having seven heads and _ten horns_" (Rev. 12. 3). The
+meaning of the ten horns is not there explained. We are told that the
+great dragon is "the old serpent, he that is called the Devil and Satan,
+the deceiver of the whole world" (v. 9). Turning now to the next
+chapter, we find another vision recorded, giving a fresh view of the
+same subject. A beast was seen "coming up out of the sea, having _ten
+horns_ and seven heads, and on his horns ten diadems, and upon his heads
+names of blasphemy" (chap. 13. 1). Again an explanation of the ten horns
+is withheld, but that they are identical with those of the twelfth
+chapter is undeniable. The Apostle receives, however, a further vision,
+recorded in chapter 17: "I saw a woman sitting upon a scarlet-coloured
+beast, full of names of blasphemy, having seven heads and _ten horns_"
+(chap. 17. 3). And now the symbolism of the horns is explained: "the ten
+horns that thou sawest are _ten kings_, which have received no kingdom
+as yet; but they receive authority as kings, with the beast, for one
+hour. These have one mind, and they give their power and authority unto
+the beast" (vv. 12, 13).
+
+We are now concerned, of course, solely with the tenfold division of the
+empire; other details of the visions just referred to remain for later
+consideration. We cannot fail to see that what is symbolised by the ten
+toes of the image, and by the ten horns of the fourth beast as revealed
+to Daniel, is identical with what is symbolised by the ten horns of the
+dragon and of the beast seen by John, namely, the Roman kingdom in its
+ultimately divided condition.
+
+
+A Comparison of the Visions.
+
+The following points are noteworthy in comparing these visions
+relatively to the tenfold division. First, there is a parallelism in the
+order of the revelations given to the two seers, Daniel and John. A
+preliminary vision is given to each--more than one in the case of
+John--in which, in the matter of this territorial partition, symbols
+occur without explanation. Each then receives a further vision, in the
+interpretation of which the eventual division into ten kingdoms is
+plainly disclosed. To Daniel it is said: "As for the ten horns, out of
+the kingdom shall ten kings arise;" and to John: "The ten horns that
+thou sawest are ten kings, ... which receive authority as kings with
+the beast for one hour."
+
+Second, the ten kingdoms are seen to be contemporaneous, as is indicated
+by the co-existence of the ten horns of the beast, and further, by the
+fact that the ten kings mutually agree to a certain line of policy in
+handing over their authority to a supreme potentate (Rev. 17. 12, 13).
+
+Third, it is evident that the fourth kingdom is the last of the Gentile
+world-powers, and that it will exist in its tenfold state at the end of
+the times of the Gentiles. We observed this above in the case of the
+image, from the fact that the stone, symbolising the kingdom of Christ,
+smote the image upon its toes. So now, in the vision of the four beasts,
+it is the fourth beast that is slain, his body destroyed, and given to
+be burned (Dan. 7. 11). The Personal Agent of this destruction is here
+made known: "I saw in the night visions, and, behold, there came with
+the clouds of Heaven One like unto a son of man, and He came even to the
+Ancient of Days, ... and there was given Him dominion, and glory, and a
+kingdom, that all the peoples, nations, and languages should serve Him:
+His dominion is an everlasting dominion, which shall not pass away, and
+His kingdom that which shall not be destroyed" (vv. 13, 14). The
+finality of the fourth kingdom is clearer still from the interpretation
+given in the remainder of the chapter. The final world-ruler is, of
+course, prominent in this vision; in his destruction is involved the
+destruction of his kingdom; his power and aggression are terminated when
+the Ancient of Days comes (v. 22); then it is that "the judgment shall
+sit, and they shall take away his dominion, to consume and to destroy it
+unto the end. And the kingdom and the dominion, and the greatness of the
+kingdoms under the whole heaven, shall be given to the people of the
+saints of the Most High: His kingdom is an everlasting kingdom, and all
+dominions shall serve and obey Him" (vv. 26, 27). Similarly, again, in
+Revelation 13 and 17, in the corresponding visions of the beast and its
+ten horns, the ten kings and their federal head, ruling at the time of
+the end, "shall war against the Lamb, and the Lamb shall overcome them,
+for He is Lord of lords, and King of kings; and they _also shall
+overcome_ that are with Him, called and chosen and faithful" (Rev. 17.
+14).
+
+The crushing of the image by the stone, the slaying of the fourth beast
+before the Ancient of Days, and the conquest of the ten kings and their
+chief by the Lamb, are therefore different views of the same event. The
+tenfold division of the fourth kingdom is obviously still future, and
+marks the condition of the world-government at the close of the times of
+the Gentiles, and immediately prior to the kingdom of Christ.
+
+
+The Testimony of Early Christian Writers.
+
+That the Roman Empire would in its final form be divided into ten
+kingdoms was held by Christian writers of the earliest post-apostolic
+times. Their opinions are here given, not as forming any basis of
+exposition, but as expressions of early Christian conception of the
+Scriptures under consideration.
+
+What is known as "_The Epistle of Barnabas_," probably written early in
+the second century A.D., quotes from Daniel concerning the ten kingdoms
+to show that they would exist at the consummation of the present age.
+_Irenaeus_ (circa A.D. 120-202), a disciple of Polycarp, who had been a
+companion of the apostle John, observes that "the ten toes are ten
+kings, among whom the kingdom will be divided." _Tertullian_, a
+contemporary of Irenaeus, remarks that "the disintegration and dispersion
+of the Roman State among the ten kings will produce Antichrist, and then
+shall be revealed that Wicked One, whom the Lord Jesus shall slay with
+the breath of His mouth and destroy by the brightness of His
+manifestation." _Hippolytus_, who was a follower of Irenaeus, and
+flourished in the first half of the third century, makes similar
+reference to the ultimate division. _Lactantius_, of the latter half of
+the third and the early part of the fourth centuries, writes as follows:
+"The Empire will be sub-divided, and the powers of government, after
+being frittered away and shared among many, will be undermined. Civil
+discords will then ensue, nor will there be respite from destructive
+wars, until ten kings arise at once, who will divide the world among
+themselves to consume rather than to govern it." _Cyril_ (circa
+315-386), who became bishop of Jerusalem in 350, quoting from Daniel,
+and speaking of the Empire and its future division, implies that
+teaching on the subject was customary in the churches. _Jerome_
+(342-420) observes that "at the end of the world, when the kingdom of
+the Romans is to be destroyed, there will be ten kings to divide the
+Roman world among themselves." Similarly writes _Theodoret_ in the fifth
+century, and others of that time make more or less direct reference to
+the subject. While the views of these writers differ considerably on
+other points of detail, all are unanimous as to the eventual division of
+the Empire among ten contemporaneous potentates.
+
+
+Processes at Work Since the Twofold Division.
+
+The mediaeval and modern history of the lands originally constituting the
+Roman Empire is a history of the formation of independent states in such
+a way as to point to the eventual revival of the Empire in the tenfold
+division we have been considering. The process has been a long and
+involved one, for the counsels of God have had a far wider range than
+the mere shaping of national destiny. It has been the Divine pleasure,
+for instance, that the Gospel should be spread among all nations for the
+purpose of taking out from among them a people for the Name of Christ,
+and for the formation thereby of His Church. In contradistinction to
+this, and from the standpoint of the world itself, which, though under
+God's control, remains in alienation from Him, there has been a gradual
+development of the political, social, and religious principles which are
+ultimately to permeate the nations.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+THE OVERTHROW IN THE WEST: GERMANIC INVASIONS.
+
+
+In the interpretation of his vision of the beast, John is told of its
+rise, temporary removal, and reappearance: "The beast that thou sawest
+was, and is not; and is about to come up out of the abyss, and to go
+into perdition" (Rev. 17. 8). Here the Roman world-power, the imperial
+dominion, is in view. In verse 11 the final king himself is similarly
+described. The symbol of the beast is thus employed to describe first
+the dominion and then its imperial head. This symbolic association of
+locality and ruler is found elsewhere in Scripture, and is illustrated
+in this very chapter. The seven heads of the beast, for example, are
+interpreted in both ways: "The seven heads are seven mountains, ... and
+they are seven kings" (v. 9, R.V. ) The distinction between verses 8 and
+11 may be observed in this way: in the first part of the chapter,
+verses 1-8, the beast is viewed as a whole, indicating world-wide
+government; in verse 11 the scope of the symbol is limited, the beast is
+a person, and is identified with one of the seven heads, or kings, he is
+"himself also an eighth, and is of the seven." With this individual we
+shall be occupied later.
+
+A striking illustration of the symbolic use of the word "beast" to
+denote both a kingdom and the ruler over it is to be found in Dan. 7,
+where the following statements are made: "These great beasts, which are
+four, are four kings" (v. 17), and "The fourth beast shall be the fourth
+kingdom" (v. 23).
+
+[Illustration: THE WESTERN ROMAN EMPIRE UNDER GERMANIC TRIBES]
+
+The statement of verse 8 seems, then, undoubtedly to refer to the
+Empire; it did exist, it ceased to be, and it will reappear. The
+assertion that it "is not" must not be taken to mean that the beast had
+ceased to exist in John's time. The present tense is to be regarded as
+prophetic. The verb "to be" often has the force of continuance of
+existence. The whole statement implies a past existence, a
+discontinuance of that existence, a future reappearance. In the vision
+recorded in the thirteenth chapter, John saw one of the heads of the
+beast "as though it had been smitten unto death." If, as seems probable,
+this head is imperialism, then the overthrow of imperial Rome is
+likewise indicated in that passage.
+
+In the light, then, of the words: "The beast that thou sawest was, and
+is not," we may now consider how the Roman Empire was overthrown.
+
+
+Disintegration of the Western Half.
+
+We have seen that, at the accession of the Emperor Valentinian I. in
+A.D. 364, the Empire was divided into two parts. The succeeding century
+witnessed the disintegration of the western half. The cause was
+primarily from within. Augustus, the first Emperor, had instituted a
+policy of settling colonies of "barbarians" from northern Europe within
+the frontiers of the Empire. Later Emperors adopted the policy more
+generally. The significance of this lies in the fact that by the
+barbarians who had already been thus established in the Empire, the
+attacks were commenced which resulted in the dismemberment of its
+western provinces.
+
+
+Alaric and the Goths.
+
+At the close of the fourth century hordes of Gothic tribes from
+north-eastern and eastern Germany set out, under Alaric their chief, in
+quest of new lands. Settlements of these very Goths had already been
+established south of the Danube by the Imperial Government as allies of
+the Romans. After an excursion into Italy, in which they were
+temporarily checked, they poured, in 406, into defenceless Gaul. From
+thence Alaric returned to invade Italy, and three times in three years
+besieged Rome (408-410), eventually sacking the city. After his death,
+in 410, the Goths retired from Italy, entered Gaul, and permanently
+occupied the southern part of that country and a large part of Spain,
+where they were known as =Visigoths= (_i.e._, Western Goths).
+
+Other Germanic tribes also streamed into Gaul. Of these, the =Franks=
+(whence the name France) issued from districts around the middle and
+lower Rhine and occupied northern Gaul; the =Suevi=, from north and
+north-west Germany, passed through into Spain; the =Alani=, formerly
+from eastern Europe, settled in west France and Spain; the
+=Burgundians=, from eastern Germany, seized that part of Gaul which
+eventually was named after them, Burgundy. The =Vandals=, from northern
+and central Germany, after being defeated by the Franks, crossed into
+Spain under their leader Genseric, and from thence established
+themselves in the province of Africa, in 429. This occupation of Gaul
+and Spain was soon perforce recognised by the Emperor at Rome. At the
+death of the Emperor Honorius, in 423, Rome exercised little more than a
+nominal authority over the greater part of the west.
+
+From Britain the Roman troops were withdrawn by Honorius, in 409, though
+the final abandonment of the island province did not take place till
+436. Teutonic tribes from North Europe were soon engaged in invading
+this part of the Empire. The =Jutes=, from Jutland, landed in 449, the
+=Saxons= in 477, and about the same time the =Angles=.
+
+
+Attila and the Huns.
+
+Toward the close of the reign of Valentinian III. (433-455), Gaul and
+Italy were invaded by the =Huns= under Attila. The Huns originally
+inhabited a large part of central and northern Asia. In the latter part
+of the fourth century they moved west into Scythia and Germany, driving
+the Goths before them. Attila's dominions thereafter extended over a
+vast area of eastern, central, and northern Europe, and he was regarded
+as of equal standing with the Emperors at Constantinople and Rome. After
+a gigantic but futile incursion into Gaul, in 451, the Huns rushed into
+Italy, ravaging its northern plains. An embassy from Rome and an immense
+ransom saved the situation. Attila died in 453, and Italy was evacuated.
+The Huns eventually settled in south-eastern Europe, and their dominion
+dwindled away. A trace of their name may be found in the word Hungary.
+
+
+Genseric and the Vandals.
+
+In North Africa Genseric the Vandal established a powerful dominion, and
+set about preparing an invasion of Italy by sea. In 455 (the last year
+of the reign of Valentinian III.) his army of Vandals and Moors attacked
+Rome, which was again given over to pillage. Its wealth and treasures
+were transported to Carthage, and with them the vessels of the temple at
+Jerusalem; these had been brought to Rome in A.D. 70 by Titus, the
+conqueror of Jerusalem. For twenty years after Genseric's achievement
+Roman Emperors existed in little else than name, the real power being
+in the hands of a barbarian officer. In 476 the last Emperor was deposed
+by Odoacer, the king of the Heruli, a tribe which, issuing from the
+shores of the Baltic, made successful inroads into Italy and occupied
+much of the country. Odoacer was, at the request of the Roman Senate,
+given the reins of government by the eastern Emperor Zeno, and news was
+despatched to the court at Constantinople that no longer was there an
+Emperor of the west. Subsequently, in 493, Odoacer was slain by
+Theodoric, the king of the =Ostrogoths=, who then became predominant in
+the Italian peninsula. The Ostrogoths (_i.e._, Eastern Goths) had broken
+off from the main body of their nation, and after settling south of the
+Danube moved into the province of Dalmatia.
+
+
+Northern Limits of the Empire.
+
+Other Germanic tribes, in addition to those named above, firmly
+established themselves within the northern limits of the Empire. Of
+these, two are worthy of mention, the =Alemanni=, who occupied most of
+what is now Switzerland and districts northward, and the =Lombards=, who
+settled in north Italy and the territory north-east of it.
+
+
+The Ten Kingdoms not Formed by the Germanic Invasions.
+
+There have been various attempts to identify with the ten prophetic
+kingdoms the states formed from the western half of the Roman Empire by
+the Germanic tribes from the north. Such attempts fail from the
+standpoints both of history and of prophecy. To group the tribes so as
+to make ten kingdoms out of them is, of course, possible in several
+ways, for there were at least eighteen such tribes. Accordingly lists
+put forward differ considerably. But such grouping is manifestly
+arbitrary. Again, since these invading nations occupied only the western
+half of the Empire, the above allocation of the ten kingdoms necessarily
+leaves the eastern half out of consideration, and therefore excludes the
+land of Palestine from this stage of the prophetic forecast.
+
+Now the prophecies concerning the times of the Gentiles are invariably
+focussed upon the Jews and their land. The dealings of God with the Jews
+form the pivot of His dealings with other nations. Thus no scheme of
+prophetic exposition relative to this subject is to be regarded as
+Scriptural which excludes Palestine from its scope. To endeavour to
+make the Word of God square with facts of history is to tamper with
+Scripture and to run the risk of obscuring its meaning and force.
+
+The idea that the formation of the ten kingdoms took place in the fifth
+century fails to stand the test of Scripture in other respects. Of the
+ten kings prophecy foretells that "they receive authority as kings with
+the beast for one hour," that they "have one mind, and they give their
+power and authority unto the beast" (Rev. 17. 13, 14). No such tenfold
+confederacy has existed in Europe; it certainly never existed among the
+chieftains of the Germanic tribes which invaded the west of the Roman
+Empire in the fifth century, neither is there any record of such an
+agreement among them. Nor, again, can it be said that they made war with
+the Lamb and were overcome by Him (v. 14). These prophecies still await
+fulfilment. Similar considerations apply to the passage in Daniel 7 in
+reference to the fourth kingdom. The ten kings, it is said, would arise
+out of that kingdom, and after them another king who would make war with
+the saints and prevail against them until the Ancient of Days came (vv.
+21, 22, 24).
+
+Again, since the persecution under the king who arises after the others
+continues until the Ancient of Days comes (v. 22), his war against the
+saints must have lasted from the fifth century until the present time,
+if he arose in that century. Moreover, as he was said to be going to
+subdue three kingdoms (v. 24), the seven kingdoms not so subdued must
+likewise have continued. This has obviously not been the case. From
+every point of view it is impossible to assign the tenfold division to
+any time in the past.
+
+[Illustration: The Turkish Empire in the 16th Century.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE OVERTHROW IN THE EAST: THE TURKISH EMPIRE.
+
+
+Having narrated the disintegration of the western half of the Empire, we
+will now recount the events which involved the overthrow of the eastern
+half. The impoverishment of the imperial power at Rome, and the
+weakening effect of the Germanic attacks upon it, tended to enhance the
+power of the Emperor at Constantinople. Indeed the eastern Empire was
+soon regarded as the more important of the two, and for some time after
+the barbarian invasions in Italy the Emperors at Constantinople
+claimed supremacy over the west.
+
+
+Mohammed and the Khaliphs.
+
+The seventh century saw the ascendency of Mohammed (born A.D. 570) in
+Arabia, to which country his personal power, temporal and religious, was
+limited. Upon his death, in 632, his followers determined on the
+invasion of Persia and the Asiatic dominions of the Emperor at
+Constantinople. Mohammed's successor, Abubekr, the first of the Khaliphs
+(_i.e._, "representatives" of the prophet), at once waged war in both
+directions. Persia speedily succumbed; Syria and Palestine were
+subjugated after seven years by the Khaliph Omar. The reduction of Egypt
+followed, and during the remainder of this century the Saracens, the
+name by which the followers of Mohammed became termed in Christendom,
+extended their territory across the entire length of North Africa, and
+shortly afterwards even into Spain, where they overpowered the then
+disunited Visigoths.
+
+The Saracen power in Western Asia was distracted during the next century
+by civil war, and was further weakened by unsuccessful wars against the
+Greeks. At length, in 750, the seat of government was moved from
+Damascus to Bagdad. From the eighth century onward, though the religion
+of Mohammed gained ground, and continues to do so to-day, the empire
+established by his followers dwindled rapidly, one province after
+another shaking off its allegiance until at the end of the tenth century
+its shattered dominions lay open to the nearest invader. The foe
+appeared in the shape of the formidable Turk.
+
+
+Eastern Empire at End of 10th Century.
+
+In view of the entrance of this new enemy we may note the extent of the
+territory belonging at this time to the eastern branch of the old Roman
+world, the Byzantine Empire, as it is termed (from Byzantium, the
+ancient name of Constantinople). The Eastern Emperors had recovered some
+of their lost ground in Asia, and at the close of the tenth century they
+held all Asia Minor, Armenia, a part of Syria, a considerable portion of
+Italy, and all the Balkan Peninsula.
+
+
+The Appearance of the Turks.
+
+Beyond the north-eastern border of the Saracen dominions lay the country
+of Turkestan, inhabited by the Turks, a branch of the warlike nation of
+the Tartars of Central Asia. With them the Saracens, after the
+establishment of their Government at Bagdad, waged successful warfare
+for a time, taking numbers of Turks captive and dispersing them over the
+Empire. This only facilitated the eventual downfall of the Saracen
+sovereignty. The Turks in Western Asia grew in influence, and at length
+the Turkish troops, breaking into open revolt, assumed control over the
+Khaliphate, deposing and nominating the Khaliphs at their will.
+
+
+The Turks Embrace Mohammedanism.
+
+Early in the eleventh century the bulk of the Turkish nation, under its
+leader Tongrol Bek, moving out from Turkestan, swept down upon Persia.
+The Khaliphate at Bagdad was, however, permitted to remain, and not only
+so, but Tongrol Bek and all his tribes embraced the Mohammedan religion.
+The invaders then marched west in vast numbers to make an attack upon
+Christendom, and in the course of time subdued Armenia and most of Asia
+Minor. Europe became alarmed, and the Byzantine Emperors eagerly sought
+the assistance of the nations of the west. Hence arose the Crusades,
+which had as their chief object the deliverance of Palestine from both
+Saracens and Turks, and which served to retard, though not to prevent,
+the advance of the Turkish power in Europe.
+
+
+The Turks Enter Europe.
+
+Early in the thirteenth century a mighty movement of Mongols south-west
+from Central Asia, involving the immediate destruction of the Khaliphate
+at Bagdad, exerted an important influence upon the Turks, in driving
+those Turkish tribes which had remained east of Armenia westward into
+Asia Minor. This resulted in the establishment of various Turkish
+dynasties in that country. At the close of the thirteenth century the
+paramount power over these was exercised by Osman (or Othman, whence the
+name Ottoman), who seized all that remained of the ancient Roman world
+in Asia, and thus practically founded the Ottoman Empire. In the middle
+of the fourteenth century the way was opened for the Ottomans to advance
+into Europe. They were invited by one of the rival factions at
+Constantinople to undertake their cause. The Turks accordingly crossed
+the Hellespont and seized Gallipoli and the territory in the vicinity of
+the capital. Constantinople itself was left unattacked for the time.
+Under Murad I., the grandson of Osman, Roumania and several kingdoms
+south of the Danube, including Bulgaria, were subdued. The kings of
+Hungary, Bosnia and Serbia rose against the invader, but were severely
+defeated, and by the decisive victory of Kosovo, in 1389, Serbia and
+Bosnia were annexed.
+
+
+Constantinople Taken.
+
+Constantinople was temporarily saved by another advance of the Mongol
+Tartars upon the Turkish dominions in Asia, where, in 1402, the Ottomans
+suffered a severe defeat. From this check they recovered, and during the
+first part of the fifteenth century were at war with the Hungarians and
+neighbouring races, whom they eventually overthrew. In 1451 Mohammed II.
+ascended the Ottoman throne, and in 1453 led an immense army against
+Constantinople. The city was taken by storm, the last of the Roman
+Emperors of the east died fighting, and Mohammed II. rode in triumph to
+the cathedral of St. Sophia, where he established the Moslem worship.
+
+For over a hundred years after this the Turkish Empire continued to
+extend. Egypt was annexed in 1517, and in the middle of this century
+Tripoli and Algeria were added, as well as considerable districts in
+Europe and Asia. The Turks were now at the zenith of their power.
+
+
+A Comparison of the Two Divisions.
+
+Recapitulating, we may compare the two divisions of the Roman Empire
+since their overthrow, from the _prophetic_, _religious_ and _political_
+standpoints. From the _prophetic_ point of view our interest in the west
+has thus far centred in the fact that the ten kingdoms were not formed
+by the fifth century invasions; our interest in the east centres chiefly
+in the land of Palestine, wrenched, as we have seen, from the eastern
+Emperor by the Saracens, and then occupied by the Turks, who still
+possess it. From the _religious_ standpoint, the Germanic tribes in the
+west accepted Roman Catholicism, hence its progress in that part of
+Europe; in the east the Turks had accepted Mohammedanism when invading
+the Empire of the Khaliphs, hence the establishment of Islamism
+throughout the Turkish dominions. _Politically_, the western invasion in
+the fifth century, and the consequent amalgamation of the Teutonic
+tribes with the peoples formerly under Roman control, led eventually to
+the formation of the various mediaeval monarchies of Western Europe
+which are to-day either kingdoms or republics. Affairs in the eastern
+half of the Roman world have moved more slowly in this respect, owing to
+the prolonged existence of the Ottoman Empire. The slow decay of the
+Turkish power from the middle of the sixteenth century onward has
+already resulted in the formation of some Eastern States, and the
+process still continues.
+
+
+The Decline of the Turkish Empire.
+
+The decline of the power of the Turks set in during the latter half of
+the sixteenth century, when their dominions passed under incapable
+rulers. In the reign of Selim II. (1566-1574) occurred the first
+conflict between the Turks and Russians, the former being driven back
+from Astrakkan. In 1593, during a war between Turkey and Austria, the
+provinces of Transylvania, Moldavia, and Wallachia rose in revolt. As
+the result of intermittent wars in the latter half of the seventeenth
+century Austria acquired almost the whole of _Hungary_. In 1770 Russia
+occupied _Moldavia_ and _Wallachia_, which though nominally for a time
+under Turkey were practically Russian protectorates. During the next
+few years Russia regained the Crimea and all the neighbouring district
+north of the Black Sea. At the commencement of the nineteenth century
+the Ottoman Empire was in a perilous condition. Napoleon had plans for
+its partition. Provincial governors were everywhere acting independently
+of the Sultan. In 1804 _Serbia_ revolted, and after a few years of
+persistent struggle obtained its autonomy. _Greece_ revolted in 1820,
+and, though subdued for a time, gained its independence in 1829 through
+the intervention of England, France, and Russia, and chiefly as the
+result of the naval battle of Navarino, in which the Turco-Egyptian
+fleet was annihilated. In the same year _Algeria_ was annexed by the
+French. European rivalries prevented for a time any rapid diminution of
+the Empire.
+
+The Crimean War of 1854-5 had important consequences for the Balkan
+peoples. It gave them, under the slackening grasp of the Porte, twenty
+years of comparatively quiet national development. In 1860 Wallachia and
+Moldavia formed themselves into the single state of _Roumania_. In 1866
+the Pasha of Egypt assumed the title of Khedive (_i.e._, king), thereby
+securing a measure of independence for the country. In 1875 the misrule
+of the Sultan led to the insurrection of Bosnia, Herzegovina, and
+Bulgaria. Serbia and Montenegro then took up arms. In 1877 a war with
+Russia saw Turkey without an ally. A complete Russian victory in 1878
+issued in the treaties first of San Stefano and then of Berlin, by which
+Turkey yielded to Russia the state of _Bessarabia_ and districts south
+of the Caucasus, the independence of _Serbia_, _Montenegro_, and
+_Roumania_ were recognised by the Porte, _Bulgaria_ was constituted an
+autonomous state, _Bosnia_ and _Herzegovina_ were ceded to Austria,
+_Thessaly_ to Greece, and _Cyprus_ to Britain. In 1885, as the result of
+a revolution, Eastern _Roumelia_ became united to Bulgaria. Shortly
+after that date German influence began to gain ascendancy at the court
+of the Sultan, and, among other affairs, largely dominated the granting
+of railway concessions in Western Asia. The effects of that influence
+have been evidenced in the present war. In 1912 Italy annexed _Tripoli_
+after a brief war. In 1913 a short but sanguinary war with the Balkan
+States deprived Turkey of all her European dominions save for a small
+piece of territory in the vicinity of Constantinople. _Egypt_, which
+has been chiefly under British control for a considerable period, has in
+1915 been practically annexed by Britain as a protectorate, the Khedive
+being deposed and a nominee of the British Government being placed in
+authority. Britain has likewise annexed a district north of the Persian
+Gulf.
+
+
+The Coming Overthrow.
+
+The continual decrease of the Turkish Empire, and more especially during
+the past hundred years, affords ground, apart from other considerations,
+for the expectation of its overthrow and the eventual cession of
+Palestine to the Jews, perhaps by a general agreement among the European
+Powers, events which seem not far distant. National jealousies would not
+permit the permanent annexation of Palestine by any one of these Powers,
+in whatever way the remaining Asiatic Turkish dominions may be divided.
+A proposal has already been put forward for its annexation to Egypt.
+Such an arrangement would in any case be merely temporary. To the Jews
+the land belongs, and by Divine decree the Jews are to possess it
+again.
+
+[Illustration: The Turkish Empire in 1914.]
+
+
+A Blank in Prophecy.
+
+It should be observed, in passing, that Scripture is apparently silent
+concerning the occupation of Palestine by the Saracens and Turks. Such
+silence is noticeable when we remember how definitely the occupation by
+the other Gentile powers, the Chaldean, Medo-Persian, Greek, and Roman,
+and the order and character of their rule, were predicted. The cause of
+the silence is not difficult to ascertain. The four Gentile powers just
+mentioned had to do with the Jews as the recognised possessors of
+Palestine, either by way of removing them from their country or
+restoring them to it, or during such time as they were permitted to
+remain in it with liberty to continue their temple worship and
+sacrifice. The Chaldeans removed the Jews from the land, the
+Medo-Persians repatriated them, the Greeks permitted their continuance
+in it, the Romans did so too, until A.D. 70, when they crushed them.
+When, however, the Saracens and the Turks seized the land the Jews had
+been scattered, nor have they received national recognition while under
+them. Gentile occupation of Palestine during such times as the Jews
+remain in their present condition seems therefore to receive no direct
+notice in prophecy.
+
+The restoration of Palestine to the Jews is closely connected with the
+revival of the Roman Empire in its tenfold form. Prior to considering
+the manner of this revival we must notice how during the period between
+the overthrow of that Empire and its coming resuscitation, its dominions
+and their government have remained Roman in character, thus affording a
+further proof that the coming and final world-power will not be entirely
+a new one, but will be a revival of the ancient Roman or fourth empire
+indicated in the prophecies of Daniel.
+
+
+The Continuation of Roman Government and Influence.
+
+Such was the prestige of the Roman name and authority that the
+chieftains of the Germanic tribes which in the fifth century subdued the
+western half of the Empire governed the conquered territories, not so
+much as tribal chiefs, but as successors to, and in continuation of, the
+imperial rule; they introduced no radical changes in the provincial and
+municipal forms of government of their predecessors. Civil organisation
+remained distinctly Roman, and has continued so; upon it are based some
+of the chief municipal institutions of modern life. Indeed Roman civil
+law still remains the foundation of modern jurisprudence.
+
+In south-eastern Europe, too, countries which were for centuries under
+the power of the Turk retained, in their municipal institutions and
+organisation, the impress of Roman authority. It should be remembered
+that though the eastern or Byzantine portion of the ancient Roman Empire
+was distinct from the western, its emperors being designated as Grecian
+in contrast to the Roman, yet its legislative foundations were laid in
+the Roman Empire prior to the division of the east from the west.
+Byzantine imperialism was therefore really Roman under an eastern title.
+According as the states in the east have become freed from the Turkish
+yoke, so the character of their government and legislation has conformed
+in a large degree to those of the west. The further diminution of the
+Turkish Empire will doubtless see a corresponding revival of western
+conditions and methods.
+
+
+Roman Imperialism Continued.
+
+It is important also to observe that notwithstanding the passing away of
+the Roman Empire as such, the principle of imperialism remained, and,
+amidst the vicissitudes of national government in Europe, has continued
+to the present time. The imperial power in the west was not abolished
+when in 476 the last Roman Emperor was deposed. On the contrary, there
+was a kind of reunion imperially of the west with the east. For a
+considerable time the tribal kings of the west received recognition from
+the eastern emperors, and were regarded as their associates in imperial
+control. This was the case even with the Saxon kings in Britain, and on
+Saxon coins may be seen to-day the same title, _basileus_ (_i.e._,
+king), as was borne by the emperors at Constantinople. Italy itself was
+wrested from the Teutons by the eastern Emperor Justinian in the sixth
+century, and remained under the Byzantine Caesars till 731.
+
+Meanwhile the Roman Senate continued to exercise its authority, and in
+800 chose the Frankish king Charlemagne as their sovereign. He was
+already ruling over the greater part of Western Europe, and was now
+crowned as Emperor at Rome by the Pope. Though his empire fell to pieces
+after his death, his dominions retained, and have since retained, their
+Roman character.
+
+Consideration of space forbids our tracing here the further continuance
+of imperialism as a factor in European politics. Recent history and
+present-day events indicate how rapidly we are approaching its final
+development at the close of the times of the Gentiles. The coming
+confederacy of European states will not result in the formation of a new
+empire, but will be the revival of the Roman in an altered form.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+THE COMING REVIVAL OF THE ROMAN EMPIRE.
+
+
+(1) _The Geographical Standpoint._
+
+The coming revival of the Roman Empire will for our present purpose be
+best considered from the geographical, political, and religious
+standpoints.
+
+
+Geographical Considerations.
+
+Any forecast of the exact delimitations of the ten kingdoms constituting
+the reconstructed Empire must necessarily be largely conjectural. That
+their aggregate area will precisely conform to that of the ancient Roman
+Empire does not necessarily follow from the fact of its revival, and
+cannot be definitely concluded from Scripture. An extension of the
+territories of the Empire in its resuscitated form would be quite
+consistent with the retention of its identity. Moreover, if Roman
+imperialism may be considered to have continued in the hands of Teutonic
+monarchs after the fall of the western part of the Empire in 476, if,
+for instance, Charles the Great, of whom we have spoken (p. 58), ruled
+as a Roman Emperor, despite the passing away of the actual Empire
+itself, then the dominions which were under the rule of these later
+monarchs may yet be found incorporated in the Empire, and so form parts
+of the ten kingdoms. In that case Germany and Holland would be included.
+Possibly, too, the Empire will embrace all the territories which
+belonged to the three which preceded it, the Grecian, Medo-Persian, and
+Chaldean. Certainly when the stone fell on the toes of the image, the
+whole image, representing these former three as well as the fourth, was
+demolished. Suggestive also in this respect is the fact that the beast
+in the vision recorded in Revelation 13. 2 was possessed of features of
+the leopard, the bear, and the lion, the same beasts which represented
+in Daniel's vision the Grecian, Medo-Persian, and Chaldean kingdoms
+(Dan. 7. 4-6), the order in Revelation 13 being inverted. While
+political characteristics are doubtless chiefly in view in these
+symbols, there may at the same time be an indication of the eventual
+incorporation of the first three empires in the fourth. It must be
+remembered, too, that the authority of the federal head of the ten
+kingdoms is to be world-wide: "There was given to him authority over
+every tribe and people and tongue and nation" (Rev. 13. 7). It is
+probable, therefore, that while the ten kingdoms will occupy a well
+defined area, their dependencies and the countries which are allied with
+them will embrace practically the remainder of the world.
+
+If, on the other hand, the Roman Empire is to be reconstructed in exact
+conformity territorially with its ancient boundaries--such a
+reconstruction is, of course, not inconceivable--we must consider what
+period of the conquests of the ancient Empire to take, whether under the
+first emperor, Augustus, or during the Apostolic Age, or later. We may,
+perhaps, be helped by the facts already mentioned, that prophecy
+relating to Gentile dominion is focussed upon the Jews and Palestine,
+and has especially in view the presence of the nation in their land.
+Now, shortly after their overthrow, in A.D. 70, their national
+recognition as possessors of the land ceased. This period, moreover,
+corresponds broadly to the close of the Apostolic Age. The dispersion of
+the Jews among the nations was completed by Adrian in the next century.
+He desolated the whole of Palestine, expelling all the remaining Jewish
+inhabitants.
+
+
+A Review of the Ancient Territories.
+
+We will therefore now review the limits of the Empire and of some of its
+provinces at that time, noticing certain circumstances of past and
+present history suggestive of future issues. In doing so we are not
+predicting that the boundaries of the revived Empire will be those of
+the ancient.
+
+Commencing with North Africa, it will be observed, on referring to the
+map, that practically the same strip of territory which belonged to the
+Roman Empire in the times of the apostles has passed directly under the
+government of countries which were themselves then within the Empire.
+For Spain rules over Morocco, France over Algeria and Tunis, Italy
+recently seized Tripoli, and Britain has, since Turkey's entrance into
+the great war, virtually taken possession of Egypt. It seems not a
+little significant that no country which was outside the limits of the
+Empire at the time under consideration has been permitted by God to
+annex these North African territories since the Saracens and the Turks
+were dispossessed of them.
+
+Passing now to Asia, the territory in that continent which belonged to
+Rome in the first century is approximately what remained to Turkey
+immediately prior to the present war. Mesopotamia and most of Armenia
+were included. The war has already seen Turkey dispossessed of portions
+of these. The downfall of the Turkish Empire would almost certainly
+involve territorial rearrangements of deepest import in the light of
+prophecy, especially as regards Palestine.
+
+
+Divisions of the Greek Empire: A Possible Renewal.
+
+The 8th chapter of Daniel apparently indicates that the Asiatic
+territories of the Empire will be divided much as they were under the
+Greeks after the death of Alexander the Great. He was obviously
+symbolised by the great horn (v. 22). The four horns which came up in
+its place (v. 8) are clearly, too, the four generals who succeeded
+Alexander, and among whom his dominions were divided, Cassander ruling
+over Macedonia and Greece, Lysimachus over part of Asia Minor and Thrace
+(the extent of the latter province was almost exactly what now belongs
+to Turkey in Europe), Seleucus over most of Syria, Palestine,
+Mesopotamia, and the east, and Ptolemy over Egypt. Next follows a
+prediction carrying us to events which are evidently yet future. It is
+said, for instance, that these events will take place "in the latter
+time of their kingdom (not, it will be observed, in the time of the four
+kings themselves who succeeded Alexander, but of the kingdoms over which
+they ruled), when the transgressors are come to the full" (v. 23). The
+expressions in this chapter, "the time of the end" (v. 17), "the latter
+time of the indignation," "the appointed time of the end" (v. 19), and
+"the latter time of their kingdom" (v. 23), all point to a period still
+future, namely, to the close of the present age. Again, in reference to
+the "king of fierce countenance," while much of the prophecy can be
+applied to Antiochus Epiphanes in the second century B.C., yet no man
+has hitherto arisen whose character and acts have been precisely those
+related in verses 9-12 and 23-25. We may also compare what is said of
+"the transgression that maketh desolate" (v. 13) with the Lord's
+prophecy concerning the abomination of desolation (Matt. 24. 15-22), a
+prophecy which also manifestly awaits fulfilment.
+
+Possibly, therefore, these Asiatic territories will be similarly divided
+in the coming time. In regard to the first of the above-mentioned four
+divisions, the recent extension of Greece to include the ancient
+province of Macedonia is remarkable. This was an outcome of the Balkan
+War of 1912. The boundaries of Greece are now approximately what they
+were under Cassander in the time of the Grecian Empire, what they were
+also later as the provinces of Macedonia and Achaia in the Roman Empire.
+There has lately, therefore, been a significant reversion to ancient
+conditions in this respect.
+
+
+Other European Territories.
+
+Coming now to the dual-monarchy of Austria-Hungary, reference to the map
+of the Roman Empire in the Apostolic Age will show that what are now
+Hungary, Transylvania, Bessarabia, and other states of the present
+monarchy were without the Roman boundaries, while Pannonia, or what is
+now Austria west of the Danube, was within; even when in the next
+century Dacia (now Transylvania, Bessarabia, &c.) was annexed, the two
+parts of the present dual kingdom were separate. The separation of
+Hungary from Austria has for a considerable time been a practical
+question of European politics, and may be hastened by present events.
+
+The northern and north-eastern boundaries of Italy embraced the Trentino
+and the peninsula of Istria. Noticeable, therefore, are the present
+efforts of Italy to acquire these very districts, efforts which seem
+likely to achieve success. Roman states north of Italy covered what are
+now Baden, Wurtemberg, Luxemberg, and a large part of Bavaria. The
+possibility of an eventual severance of these from Prussian domination
+has been much discussed of late.
+
+The Rhenish provinces of Alsace and Lorraine, originally portions of the
+Roman province of Gallia (now France), were snatched from France by
+Germany in the Franco-Prussian war of 1870-71. Their recovery is a
+supreme object of the efforts of the French in the present war, and not
+without hope of success.
+
+
+The British Empire.
+
+As to Britain, at the time under consideration the greater part of the
+island was definitely included in the Roman Empire. Ireland and most of
+Scotland were never conquered by the Romans. Should Britain form one of
+the ten kingdoms, there is nothing to show that Ireland or any other
+part of the British Empire must of necessity be absolutely separated
+from it. Self-government may yet be possessed by those territories which
+have not yet received it, and it is significant that Ireland has now
+practically obtained it. That the lands which are linked with Britain as
+dependencies, or as in possession of self-government, should remain as
+integral parts of the Empire is but consistent with the coming
+world-wide authority of the potentate who will be the federal head of
+the ten kingdoms. And that each state in the British Empire should have
+its own local government is, on the other hand, consistent with the
+establishment of a closer and complete confederacy of ten kingdoms, the
+area of which may correspond largely to that of the ancient Roman
+Empire. In contrast to the self-government of the other countries of the
+world at the coming period, the ten united kingdoms will eventually be
+absolutely under the control of the final emperor just mentioned, for
+the ten kings over these states, who receive authority as kings with
+him, will be of one mind to give their power and authority and their
+kingdom to him (Rev. 17. 12, 13, 17).
+
+What has been said of the British Empire may be true also of others of
+the ten kingdoms which have colonies or dependencies, and thus, while
+the ten kingdoms will themselves constitute an Empire, their alliances
+and treaties with other countries of the world will apparently involve
+an extension of the authority of the controlling despot "over every
+tribe and people and tongue and nation" (Rev. 13. 7). If, for instance,
+the United States of America were at that time in alliance with Britain
+(quite a possible contingency), their joint influence would probably
+extend to the whole of the American continents, which would thereby
+acknowledge his authority.
+
+We may observe, too, the way in which the continent of Africa has come
+under certain European influences in modern times. The mention of this
+is simply suggestive. That the Scripture will be absolutely fulfilled
+is beyond doubt; the exact mode of its accomplishment is known to God.
+
+
+(2) _The Political Standpoint._
+
+
+European Federation.
+
+Agencies are already at work for the establishment of a confederacy of
+European States--not the least significant of the many signs that the
+end of the age is approaching. The movement towards confederacy is
+doubtless receiving an impetus from the great upheaval in Europe. A
+circular issued in December, 1914, and distributed far and wide,
+announced the formation of a committee of influential men with the
+object of promoting a "European Federation." The circular says: "In
+sight of the present situation of ruin it ought to be the general
+opinion that a firmer economical and political tie is of utmost
+importance for all nations without exception, and that particularly for
+Europe the narrower bond of a federation, based on equality and interior
+independence of all partaking states, is of urgent necessity, which
+public opinion ought to demand."
+
+A pamphlet published by the Committee recommends that the union of
+states shall be economical, political, and legal, with an international
+army as a common guarantee, and that European Federation should become
+the principal and most urgent political battle-cry for the masses of all
+European nations, and declares that "when the Governments are willing,
+when the public opinion of all peoples forces them to be willing, there
+is no doubt but that a reasonable and practical union of nations will
+prove to be as possible and natural as is at present a union of
+provinces, cantons, territories, whose populations often show more
+difference of race and character than those of nations now at
+hostilities." The Committee calls upon the peoples of Europe to suffer
+the diplomatists no longer to dispose of them like slaves and by
+militarism to lash them to fury against each other. It calls upon them
+to see to it that never and nowhere should a member of any body or
+Government be elected who is not an advocate of the Federation, and that
+the trade union, society, or club to which any individual belongs should
+express sympathy with the movement in meetings and in votes. "The
+people," it is said, "have it now in their power, more than ever before,
+to control the Powers."
+
+
+Two Possible Ways of Federation.
+
+The formation of ten federated states, covering at least the area of the
+ancient Empire at the end of the first century of the present era, may
+be effected in two ways, either by the peaceful methods of arbitration
+and treaty, or as a result of strife and confusion. That the present
+European War will be succeeded by efforts for the creation of permanent
+international harmony and universal peace is probable, as is also some
+attempt at such a federation as is proposed by the above-mentioned
+Committee. On the other hand, sinister indications abound to-day which
+point to industrial strife and revolution rather than peace. The
+condition of the industrial world presents a gloomy prospect indeed.
+There are ominous signs of keener conflict than ever between capital and
+labour. The forces of Socialism, Syndicalism, Communism, &c., are
+rapidly increasing in power and in international activity, and their
+avowed aims presage anything but peace in the near future. We may take,
+for example, the declared objects of "The Alliance of the Social
+Democracy"--now incorporated in the International Working Men's
+Association--"To destroy all States and all Churches with all their
+institutions and laws, religious, political, juridical, financial,
+magisterial, academical, economical, and social, and to establish in
+their place industrial co-operation and collective ownership of land and
+capital." All this sounds very pretentious, and would probably fail of
+complete accomplishment, but the agencies at work for it are strong.
+Attempts on a large scale would certainly lead to unprecedented disorder
+and chaos.
+
+
+The Sea Symbolic of National Unrest.
+
+Not improbably the ten kingdoms of the reconstructed Roman Empire will
+arise as a result of political and social confusion. Thus it was in the
+case of the French Revolution and the consequent uprising of Napoleon. A
+repetition of such events on a far wider scale in the future is quite
+conceivable. In the prophetic vision given to the Apostle John, the
+beast was seen "coming up out of the sea" (Rev. 13. 1). Now the sea is
+in Scripture used figuratively of the nations, its characteristic
+restlessness symbolising their commotion and strife. Compare the words
+of Isaiah: "Ah, the uproar of many peoples, which roar like the roaring
+of the seas; and the rushing of nations, that rush like the rushing of
+many waters! The nations shall rush like the rushing of many waters: but
+He shall rebuke them" (Isa. 17. 12, 13; see also Psa. 65. 7; and Ezek.
+26. 3). To national unrest the Lord Jesus applied similar language when
+He foretold to the disciples that there would be "upon the earth
+distress of nations, in perplexity for the roaring of the sea and the
+billows; men fainting for fear, and for expectation of the things which
+are coming on the world" (Luke 21. 25, 26). So also the waters which
+John had seen in his vision are described by the angel as "peoples, and
+multitudes, and nations, and tongues" (Rev. 17. 15). Daniel, too, saw
+the four great beasts come up from the sea as a result of the breaking
+forth of the four winds of the Heaven upon it, an undoubted
+representation of a condition of national disturbance (Dan. 7. 2, 3).
+That the beast of Revelation 13. 1 was seen coming up out of the sea
+points, therefore, to the probability that the ten kings who will have
+brief authority over the revived Empire will be raised to their kingdom,
+not by constitutional methods, but as the result of revolutions and the
+collapse of present-day governments and institutions.
+
+
+Revolutions and their Issues.
+
+Should any great measure of success attend the syndicalist and communist
+movements of the day, and especially if they are internationalised, the
+inevitable revolutions and disorder would almost certainly issue, as
+revolutions have so frequently issued, in despotism and autocracy, and
+perhaps in this way the ten kings would arise. The overthrow of the
+governments in the countries involved would remove what has certainly
+been the great restraint upon lawlessness[A] from the times of the
+apostles until now. Everything would be ripe for the appearance of a
+universal potentate. The cry would arise for "a man," a controlling
+organiser to bring order out of chaos. The unstable character of the
+rule of the ten kings, and the impoverishment of their kingdoms, would
+lead them, as a matter of diplomacy, to hand over their authority to
+him.
+
+  [A] See "The Epistles to the Thessalonians, with Notes Exegetical and
+  Expository," by C. F. Hogg and W. E. Vine, note _c._ pp. 259, 260.
+  (Glasgow: Pickering & Inglis. 3/9, p.f.)
+
+
+The Iron and the Clay.
+
+The political constitution of the successive empires during "the time of
+the Gentiles" was indicated in the image of Nebuchadnezzar's vision by
+the various substances of which the parts of the image were composed.
+While the regular deterioration in the relative value of these
+substances is noticeable, we are concerned now with those of the legs
+and feet. The legs were of iron, and the feet part of iron and part of
+potter's clay, not moist or miry clay, but "earthenware" (Dan. 2. 41,
+R.V., margin), and consequently brittle (v. 42, margin).
+
+That the iron symbolised militarism seems clear from what is said of the
+fourth kingdom, that "as iron breaketh in pieces and subdueth all
+things: and as iron that crusheth all these, shall it break in pieces
+and crush" (v. 40). Nations are broken and crushed by military power,
+and thus the nations were treated by the Romans. This was further
+signified by the iron teeth of the fourth beast, as is definitely stated
+in Daniel 7. 19, 23: "And shall devour the whole earth, and shall tread
+it down, and break it in pieces."
+
+The supposition that the clay represents democracy is gratuitous and
+arbitrary. The early Roman Empire, symbolised by the legs of the image,
+was built up under democratic rule. When republicanism was superseded
+by imperialism, democratic principles still prevailed. Democracy,
+therefore, played its part from the very commencement of the fourth
+kingdom, and had it been symbolised by the clay, not only the feet and
+toes but the legs themselves would have consisted of mingled iron and
+clay. Moreover, democracy in the generally accepted sense of the term
+has not always been found to be of an unstable or brittle character;
+witness the republicanism of the United States. Democracies, too, may be
+established on strictly constitutional principles.
+
+Another explanation, therefore, of the symbolism of the clay must be
+sought, and it is not unlikely to be found in those revolutionary
+principles to which we have already referred, which were evidenced at
+the time of the French Revolution, and are finding expression, though in
+greater variety to-day, in such projects as those of the International
+Working Men's Association. Certainly the masses of the people of Europe
+are being permeated both by militarism and by the revolutionary
+doctrines of which we have spoken. Should these principles spread among
+the civil services and forces, everything would be in a complete state
+of preparedness for Unprecedented Political and Social Upheaval
+
+which would effect the overthrow of present forms of government. From
+the world's point of view the situation would require a consummate
+genius with powers of world-wide organisation. Doubtless Satan's
+masterpiece of infidel ingenuity would be at hand for the occasion.
+
+We are not predicting that this is to be the manner of the revival of
+the Empire and of the advent of its imperial head. We have merely
+suggested possible circumstances in the light of Scripture and
+present-day movements. The actual circumstances attending the rise of
+the ten kings and their Emperor must for the time remain conjectural.
+Certainly these kings will receive authority with him for one hour (Rev.
+17. 12), a phrase which may be translated "at the same time;" and
+certainly they will agree to give their power and authority to him (v.
+13).
+
+(3) _The Religious Standpoint._
+
+We will now note the religious conditions which are to prevail for a
+time upon the resuscitation of the Empire. These are plainly indicated
+for us in Revelation 17. The apostle sees a woman sitting on the
+seven-headed and ten-horned beast. The woman is gorgeously arrayed,
+holds in her hand a golden cup full of abominations, and is drunken with
+the blood of the saints. Her name, written on her forehead, is
+
+
+"Mystery, Babylon the Great,"
+
+"the mother of the harlots and of the abominations of the earth" (vv.
+3-6). The woman is symbolically described as the city of Rome (v. 18),
+and that leads on to a second mention of Babylon, in chapter 18, and a
+new description. Now to the description of the woman in chapter 17
+nothing more closely corresponds than the Papacy. But if the Babylon of
+chapter 17 is to be identified with that of chapter 18, the Papacy
+answers to the whole description only to a limited extent. While,
+however, there is much in common in the two descriptions in these
+chapters, yet the two Babylons are possibly to be distinguished. The
+Babylon of chapter 17 is a "mystery," not so that of chapter 18. Again,
+the destruction of the one is different from that of the other. The
+first will be destroyed by the ten kings and their emperor (17. 16), the
+second by the direct judgment of God (18. 5, 8, 20); the first as the
+result of human antagonism, the second by famine, fire and earthquake.
+We are perhaps, therefore, justified in taking the more limited view in
+connection with the circumstances of chapter 17. Even so the woman may
+be regarded as representing the apostate sacerdotal systems which have
+sprung from the Papacy as well as that system itself.
+
+The position of the woman indicates an exercise of power which is
+voluntarily supported by the beast. That she sits upon the waters
+implies her religious dominion over the nations; that she is carried by
+the beast, who rules over the nations politically, implies that there
+will be a complete alliance between her and the ten kings with their
+chief, and that the sphere of her influence will be co-extensive with
+the dominions of the beast.
+
+
+The Papacy: Its Present Power.
+
+Now though the Papacy lost its temporal power in 1870, it is far from
+having lost its political influence. Ecclesiastically, too, though it
+has received various set-backs, it is manifestly gaining power. This is
+especially observable, for example, in Britain, the overthrow of which
+as a Protestant Power is undoubtedly the object of the persistent
+aggressiveness of Romanism. This aggressiveness is manifest in all the
+dominions of the British Empire, as well as in other lands.
+
+Again, while certain governments have of late shaken off the
+ecclesiastical yoke, and infidelity has spread among the people of Roman
+Catholic lands, the number of Roman Catholics has increased with great
+rapidity. They were estimated at somewhat over 200,000,000 twenty years
+ago, they are now said to number about 300,000,000.
+
+Indications are not wanting of a tendency towards
+
+
+A Reunion of Christendom,
+
+which would be facilitated by a willingness on the part of the Papacy to
+adapt itself to the impulse of the time.
+
+Present events, therefore, point to a great renewal of Papal power
+involving the fulfilment of the prophecy relating to the woman and the
+beast that carries her. This renewed alliance between the political and
+the ecclesiastical powers will, however, be of brief duration. The
+successful efforts of governments in recent times to liberate themselves
+from Papal authority, as in the case of France and Portugal, are but
+foreshadowings of the eventual entire destruction of ecclesiasticism and
+sacerdotalism under the revived Roman Empire. "The ten horns ... and the
+beast, these shall hate the harlot, and shall make her desolate and
+naked, and shall eat her flesh, and shall burn her utterly with fire"
+(Rev. 17. 16). Thus it would seem that, when at the very zenith of its
+power and ambition, the Papacy, at the head of amalgamated Christendom,
+will suddenly meet its doom.
+
+
+The Doom of Religious Babylon.
+
+Its accumulated wealth would probably be an incentive in determining the
+ten kings to take this step, owing possibly to the impoverishment of
+their kingdoms as a result of wars and political and social upheavals.
+An additional cause will doubtless be the widespread spirit of
+antagonism against all religion.
+
+Submission to the Papal yoke has invariably had an aftermath of
+infidelity; similarly the temporary subservience of the beast to the
+woman will issue in the casting off of all religious restraint and in
+the universal acknowledgment of the presumptuous claims of the
+world-ruler.
+
+
+Satanic Authority of the Emperor.
+
+The authority of this final emperor of the Roman kingdom will be
+Satanic. "The dragon gave him his power, and his throne, and great
+authority" (Rev. 13. 2); "the beast ... was, and is not; and is about to
+come up out of the abyss, and to go into perdition" (Rev. 17. 8). This
+implies that he has been on the earth in the past. The same thing is
+indicated in the interpretation of the seven heads. Topographically they
+are described as seven mountains, personally as seven kings (v. 9). Of
+these, five had fallen, the sixth was in power in John's time, the
+seventh had not then come (v. 10). The beast (clearly here symbolising,
+not a kingdom, but a person) would be an eighth, and yet would be of the
+seven (v. 11). These heads have been regarded by some as forms of
+government, by others as empires, or again, as emperors. There seems to
+be no reason why they are not to be regarded as emperors, though
+doubtless their empires are in view, as being associated with them.
+Accordingly, the fact that the eighth is also one of the seven indicates
+his reappearance on the scene. Various suggestions have been made as to
+his identification, but this must remain uncertain until his advent.
+With him the ten kings for a time receive authority (v. 12),
+subsequently handing it over to him with their kingdom (v. 17), but not
+before they have together with him crushed the great religious system
+symbolised by the woman (v. 16). His stupendous power and brilliant
+abilities, the evidence of his superhuman origin, his phenomenal
+capacity for organisation, and the consolidation of the empire under his
+absolute control will cause the whole world to marvel at him (Rev. 13.
+3; 17. 8). To the world, in its divinely inflicted and therefore
+retributive delusion, he will appear like a god who has come to deliver
+from woe, and to introduce the long-looked-for age of peace and
+prosperity. Wonder will be succeeded by worship, both of the man and of
+Satan. "They worshipped the dragon, because he gave his authority unto
+the beast; and they worshipped the beast, saying, Who is like unto the
+beast? and who is able to war with him?" (13. 4).
+
+The world is now in course of rapid preparation for all this:
+
+
+The "Superman"
+
+has of late become a much discussed topic in various classes of society
+and in the press, and the idea is supported by the theories of
+evolution which are receiving increasingly wide acceptance. A spirit of
+expectancy is being thus aroused which will undoubtedly facilitate the
+recognition of the man himself at his advent, and the acknowledgment of
+his claims to divine honour. But this will involve the worship of Satan,
+and to this end the effective agency of
+
+
+Spiritism
+
+has been long at work. Spiritism leads to devil worship. It must do so;
+its energising power is Satan himself. Both spiritism and theosophy, and
+similar forms of error, all of which are rapidly on the increase to-day,
+are paving the way for world-wide worship of the dragon.
+
+The imperial power and worship of this emperor will be promoted by
+another potentate similarly energised by Satan. This latter is the
+second beast, described in Revelation 13. 11-end. Later on in the book
+he is called
+
+
+The False Prophet
+
+(Rev. 16. 13; 19. 20; 20. 10), indicating that his activities are
+chiefly of a religious character, and perhaps that he will be more
+closely connected with Jewish affairs. He will make "the earth and them
+that dwell therein worship the beast," the emperor of the ten kingdoms
+(13. 11), deceiving the world by supernatural signs wrought in the
+presence of the first beast (v. 12), and enforcing the worship of his
+image (v. 15), the abomination of desolation set up in the temple at
+Jerusalem (Matt. 24. 15). With the worship of an image the times of the
+Gentiles began (Dan. 3. 1), and with similar idolatry they will end. In
+the days of the early Roman emperors their deification was celebrated by
+the adoration of their images. Then, as formerly under Nebuchadnezzar,
+those who refused to worship suffered death. So will it be under the
+final emperor and his colleague.
+
+Various opinions are held regarding these two beasts of Revelation 13,
+as to which is the Man of Sin spoken of by Paul in 2 Thessalonians 2,
+which the Antichrist mentioned in John's Epistles, and which of the two
+is the wilful king described in Daniel 11. Limitations of space preclude
+our entering into the subject in detail here. The present writer holds
+the view that all three are the same person, and that they are also the
+same as the horn in Daniel 7. 8, 11, and as the first beast of
+Revelation 13, and that these are all different descriptions of the
+final head of the revived Empire. The Old Testament passages somewhat
+briefly announce the arising of this world-wide ruler; the New Testament
+passages unfold and expand the preceding predictions concerning him,
+among the additional details given in the New Testament being the fact
+that he is to have a prophet who will assiduously support his claim to
+deity and his administration. It is the world-emperor, and not his
+prophet, who is to be worshipped, and who therefore proclaims himself as
+God (2 Thess. 2. 4). His prophet, the second beast of Revelation 13, in
+the exercise of all the power of the first, will cause the world to
+worship him (13. 12). As his prophet and prime minister he would not
+himself endeavour to usurp the position of him whose avowed deity he
+seeks to support.
+
+The similarity of the details in the above-mentioned passages indicates
+that the same person is in view in each case. His blasphemies, for
+instance, and his assumption of deity are mentioned in Daniel 7. 25; 11.
+36, 37; 2 Thessalonians 2. 3, 4, and Revelation 13. 5, 6, and his war
+with the saints in Daniel 7. 21, 25 and Revelation 13. 7. Further, the
+blasphemous proclamation of himself as God is consistent with what is
+said in John's Epistles concerning the Antichrist. For in his
+self-deification he is directly "antagonistic to Christ," he denies that
+Jesus is the Christ, and therefore denies the Father and the Son (1 John
+2. 22).
+
+The two potentates will establish not only a universal religion, but
+also a
+
+
+Universal System of Commerce.
+
+The second beast "causeth all, the small and the great, and the rich and
+the poor, and the free and the bond, that there be given them a mark on
+their hand, or upon their forehead; and that no man should be able to
+buy or to sell, save he that hath the mark, even the name of the beast
+or the number of his name" (Rev. 13. 16, 17). This indicates a
+world-wide protectionist system, such a system as, for instance, might
+conceivably be established under some form of syndicalism. Undeniably,
+circumstances in the industrial world to-day manifest an increasing
+tendency in this direction. The principles previously mentioned, as now
+making for industrial and international revolution, and the present
+stupendous movements towards amalgamation, are clearly preparing for
+the fulfilment of this prophecy by facilitating the eventual
+establishment of the unrighteous commercial system of the reconstituted
+Empire.
+
+[Illustration: Palestine, to illustrate Psalm 29.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+THE EVERLASTING KINGDOM.
+
+
+We have now to consider the dealings of the two beasts, the final Roman
+emperor and his false prophet, with
+
+
+The Jews.
+
+With the Romans the Jews joined in the death of Christ, and with the
+rulers of this fourth empire they will be in agreement for a time at the
+close of their long course of apostasy. This was especially made known
+to Daniel in the prophecy of
+
+
+The Seventy Weeks
+
+(Dan. 9). These weeks (lit., _hebdomads_, or periods of seven, _i.e._,
+seven years each) had been divinely decreed (or "cut off," _i.e._, from
+the period of "the times of the Gentiles") upon his people and his city.
+From the going forth of the commandment to restore and to build
+Jerusalem unto the Anointed One (the Messiah), the Prince, would be
+seven weeks and threescore and two weeks. After this the Anointed One
+would be cut off, and would have nothing (Dan. 9. 24-26). This period is
+69 times 7, or 483 years, and to the very day this was the period
+commencing with the command of Artaxerxes Longimanus, King of Persia,
+for the restoration of Jerusalem (Neh. 2. 1-9), and ending with the
+triumphal entry of Christ into the city (Matt. 21. 1-11).[B] Four days
+later He was crucified, "the Anointed One was cut off and had nothing,"
+_i.e._, He did not enter then upon His Messianic kingdom. The prophecy
+predicted that the people of the prince (lit., "a prince") that would
+come would destroy the city and the sanctuary. That took place in A.D.
+70, under Titus Vespasianus. But Titus is not "the prince that shall
+come." This, apart from other considerations, is clear from what
+follows: "And his (the prince's) end shall be with a flood (or rather,
+'in the overflowing,' _i.e._, of the wrath of God)," a prediction at
+once inapplicable to Titus. The mention of
+
+
+The Last "Week"
+
+is deferred, indicating an interval between the sixty-ninth and the
+seventieth. Now the events predicted for the seventieth had no
+historical fulfilment immediately after the sixty-ninth. The one,
+therefore, did not follow the other consecutively. At the commencement
+of the intervening period the Jews were scattered from their land. At
+the seventieth they will have been restored, and the events of that week
+concern "the prince that shall come," the last world-emperor, and his
+dealings with them. "He shall make a firm covenant with many (lit., 'the
+many,' _i.e._, the great majority of the nation) for one week" (v. 27).
+This covenant is described in Isaiah's prophecies as a "covenant with
+death" and an "agreement with Hell." The covenant, he says, "shall be
+disannulled," and the agreement "shall not stand; when the overflowing
+scourge shall pass through, then ye shall be trodden down by it" (Isa.
+28. 18). That this refers to a time yet future and not to past
+Israelitic history may be gathered from verse 22, where the theme and
+the language are similar to those of the passage in Daniel now under
+consideration. Daniel tells us the mode of the disannulling. "In the
+midst of the week (R.V., margin) he shall cause the sacrifice and
+oblation to cease." Accordingly after three and a half years the
+Antichrist, manifesting his real character, will prove himself a traitor
+and break the covenant, and thus Isaiah's prediction will be fulfilled.
+
+  [B] See "The Coming Prince," by Sir Robert Anderson. Price, 5/.
+
+Apparently at the very time when he thus breaks his league with the Jews
+the Antichrist will determine upon his public deification and the
+establishment of his worship in the Temple. For he it is who "opposeth
+and exalteth himself above all that is called God, or that is
+worshipped; so that he as God sitteth in the Temple of God, showing
+himself that he is God" (2 Thess. 2. 4). This, with the setting up of
+his image, will doubtless be the fulfilment of the prophecies recorded
+by Daniel, that "upon the wing (or pinnacle) of abominations shall come
+one that maketh desolate" (Dan. 9. 27, cp. 11. 31 and 12. 11), and "they
+shall profane the sanctuary, even the fortress, and shall take away the
+continual burnt offering, and they shall set up the abomination that
+maketh desolate" (11. 31, cp. 12. 11); a fulfilment also of the Lord's
+prediction that "the abomination of desolation, which was spoken of by
+Daniel the prophet," will "stand in the holy place" (Matt. 24. 15). In
+the establishment of this blasphemous worship of the emperor, the false
+prophet will play a prominent part, as we have seen from the latter part
+of Revelation 13.
+
+The many references to the desolator and the desolations are indicative
+of the
+
+
+Fierce Persecution
+
+which will follow. This will be at first directed against "the remnant,"
+the large numbers of Jews who will repudiate allegiance to the beast and
+to the false prophet, many doubtless having been converted to their
+coming Messiah through the testimony of two witnesses who will be sent
+from God to the nation. "They shall prophesy a thousand two hundred and
+threescore days, clothed in sackcloth" (Rev. 11. 3-13). The success of
+their ministry will apparently arouse the bitter antagonism of Satan and
+his human instruments. The breaking of the covenant with the people as a
+whole indicates that an effort will also be made to crush the entire
+nation. Thus the latter half of the seventieth week will be the time of
+"Jacob's trouble," "a time of trouble, such as never was since there was
+a nation even to that same time" (Dan. 12. 1), though the unprecedented
+tribulation will not be confined to the Jews only.
+
+
+Armageddon and After.
+
+The bitter antagonism of the man of sin, and his colleague, the false
+prophet, against God and His people will culminate in the gathering
+together of all the forces of the Empire in Palestine in final conflict
+for the complete domination of the world. This tremendous event is thus
+indicated by the apostle John: "And I saw coming out of the mouth of the
+dragon, and out of the mouth of the beast, and out of the mouth of the
+false prophet, three unclean spirits, as it were frogs: for they are the
+spirits of devils (correctly, "demons"), working signs; which go forth
+unto the kings of the whole world, to gather them together unto the war
+of the great day of God, the Almighty" (Rev. 16. 13, 14).
+
+In reality the issue at stake will be the supremacy of Christ or of
+Satan in the earth. The objective will be neither territorial conquest
+nor naval supremacy, nor commercial predominance. The war of the beast
+and the ten kings under him is against the Lamb (Rev. 17. 14). This the
+second Psalm had foretold: "Why do the nations rage, and the peoples
+imagine a vain thing? The kings of the earth set themselves, and the
+rulers take counsel together against the Lord, and against His Anointed,
+saying, Let us break their bands asunder, and cast away their cords from
+us." The issue is not uncertain: "He that sitteth in the Heavens shall
+laugh: the Lord shall have them in derision."
+
+
+The Scene of the Conflict
+
+is Har-Magedon, commonly known as Armageddon (Rev. 16. 16). The name,
+which is associated with Megiddo, a locality famed in Old Testament
+history for its decisive battles (Judges 5. 19; 2 Kings 23), doubtless
+stands here for a wider area, stretching, as we shall see, from the
+north to the south of the land.
+
+The combatants, the conflict and its conclusion, are described by John
+in vivid language of terrible grandeur in Revelation 19. 11-21: "And I
+saw the Heaven opened; and behold, a white horse, and He that sat
+thereon, called Faithful and True; and in righteousness He doth judge
+and make war. And His eyes are a flame of fire, and upon his head are
+many diadems; and He hath a name written, which no one knoweth but He
+Himself. And He is arrayed in a garment sprinkled with blood: and His
+name is called the Word of God. And the armies which are in Heaven
+followed Him upon white horses, clothed in fine linen, white and pure.
+And out of His mouth proceedeth a sharp sword, that with it He should
+smite the nations: and He shall rule them with a rod of iron: and He
+treadeth the winepress of the fierceness of the wrath of Almighty God.
+And He hath on His garment and on His thigh a name written, KING OF
+KINGS, AND LORD OF LORDS.
+
+"And I saw an angel standing in the sun; and he cried with a loud voice,
+saying to all the birds that fly in mid heaven, Come and be gathered
+together unto the great supper of God; that ye may eat the flesh of
+kings, and the flesh of captains, and the flesh of mighty men, and the
+flesh of horses and of them that sit thereon, and the flesh of all men,
+both free and bond, and small and great.
+
+"And I saw the beast, and the kings of the earth, and their armies,
+gathered together to make war against Him that sat upon the horse, and
+against His army. And the beast was taken, and with him the false
+prophet that wrought the signs in his sight, wherewith he deceived them
+that had received the mark of the beast, and them that worshipped his
+image: they twain were cast alive into the lake of fire that burneth
+with brimstone: and the rest were killed with the sword of Him that sat
+upon the horse, even the sword which came forth out of His mouth: and
+all the birds were filled with their flesh" (Rev. 19. 11-21). Ezekiel
+similarly describes the scene in his prophecy in chapter 30. 17-21.
+
+Thus it is that the climax of the world's rebellion against God is to
+meet its doom. This is the manner of the overthrow of the ten-kingdomed
+empire, the fourth of Daniel's visions. Accordingly, what we have now
+read from Revelation 19 is identical with (1) the falling of the stone
+upon the feet of the image in Nebuchadnezzar's vision, the annihilation
+of all Gentile government (Dan. 2. 45); (2) the consuming of the
+dominion of the fourth beast in Daniel's subsequent vision (Dan. 7. 26);
+(3) the pouring out of God's wrath upon the Antichrist, the desolator
+(Dan. 9. 27); and (4) the coming of the Son of Man on the clouds of
+Heaven with power and great glory (Matt. 24. 30). The great emperor, the
+man of sin, is to be crushed by the Lord Jesus, "with the breath of His
+mouth," and brought to nought "by the manifestation of His coming" (2
+Thess. 2. 8).
+
+Now this "manifestation of His coming" is, to transliterate the Greek
+words,
+
+
+The Epiphany of His Parousia.
+
+An epiphany is, literally, the 'shining forth' of that which has been
+hidden; and the word Parousia is, literally, 'presence' (see margin of
+R.V. and Phil. 2. 12). This latter word is used of the coming of Christ
+to the air for His saints, 'to receive them unto Himself,' and of their
+consequent presence with Him (1 Thess. 2. 19). They are thus to be "ever
+with the Lord" (1 Thess. 4. 17), and with Him they will come when He
+descends at His revelation "from Heaven with the angels of His power in
+flaming fire, rendering vengeance to them that know not God, and to them
+that obey not the Gospel of our Lord Jesus" (2 Thess. 1. 7, 8). The
+sudden bursting forth of His glory thus "to execute judgment" (Jude 15)
+will be the 'Epiphany, or shining forth, of His Parousia,' and by it the
+Man of Sin is to be brought to nought and his empire demolished. He and
+his false prophet will be "cast alive into the lake of fire," and his
+armies will perish (Rev. 19. 20, 21).
+
+This is to be the issue of the world's attempts to establish a
+millennium of its own by schemes of federation and amalgamation. This
+is the upshot of its fancied progress and improvement without God and
+His Christ.
+
+We must now see what other Scriptures have to say concerning this scene.
+The instrument which the Lord uses for the destruction of His foes is a
+sword which proceeds _out of His mouth_; the destruction is described as
+the treading of the winepress.
+
+
+The Voice of the Lord.
+
+First, as to the instrument. The sword is symbolic of the utterance of
+the Lord's voice. No material instrument is needed, a word is enough.
+This is clear from many passages. In the second Psalm the overthrow of
+the foe is thus described: "Then shall He _speak_ unto them in His
+wrath, and vex them in His sore displeasure" (v. 5). Joel prophesies of
+the same event: "The sun and the moon are darkened, and the stars
+withdraw their shining: and the Lord _uttereth His voice_ before His
+army; for His camp is very great; for He is strong that executeth His
+word: for the day of the Lord is great and very terrible; and who can
+abide it?" (Joel 2. 10, 11; and see 3. 16. With this compare Isa. 11. 4
+and 30. 30-33.) The same voice of judgment is implied in Paul's
+prediction of the doom of the lawless one, that "the Lord Jesus will
+slay him _with the breath of His mouth_" (2 Thess. 2. 8). In the same
+connection we are doubtless to read Psalm 29, the Psalm which describes
+the terrible majesty and effect of the _voice of the Lord_.
+
+We must presently dwell more fully upon this Psalm in order to observe
+its application to the circumstances under consideration, and its
+connection with the passages which describe the judgment of the foe as
+
+
+The Treading of the Winepress.
+
+These passages are Isaiah 63. 1-6; Joel 9. 16; Revelation 14. 17-20, and
+the one already quoted in Revelation 19. It is observable, too, that in
+the first of these the voice of the Lord is mentioned again, for the
+Deliverer describes Himself as "I that _speak in righteousness_."
+
+We shall first refer to Revelation 14. 17-20. Two angels appear coming
+forth, the one from the temple in Heaven with a sickle in his hand, the
+other from the altar. The latter calls to the one with the sickle to
+gather "the clusters of the vine of the earth," symbolic of the Man of
+Sin and his gathered armies. The angel then casts his sickle into the
+earth, gathers the vintage, and casts it into the winepress of the wrath
+of God. The winepress is "trodden without the city," and "there came out
+blood from the winepress, even unto the bridles of the horses, as far as
+a thousand and six hundred furlongs" (_i.e._, 200 miles). The great
+emperor and his prophet, and their vast forces, will thus be gathered in
+dense battle array throughout the length of Palestine, Jerusalem being
+their objective. Joel calls the scene of the battle "the Valley of
+Decision." "Come, tread ye," says the prophet, "for the winepress is
+full, the fats overflow; for their wickedness is great. Multitudes,
+multitudes in the valley of decision! for the day of the Lord is near in
+the valley of decision" (Joel 3. 13, 14). The multitudes are the forces
+of the Man of Sin.
+
+The first six verses of Isaiah 63 narrate in the form of a dialogue
+
+
+The Overthrow of the Man of Sin
+
+and his forces. The dialogue is between Messiah the Deliverer and the
+Jews. Having just overthrown the foe in the treading of the winepress,
+and the armies of the Empire being destroyed throughout the battle line
+from the north of the land to the south, the Messiah, in the fruits of
+His victory, reveals Himself to His astonished earthly people. In
+wondering admiration they exclaim: "Who is this that cometh from Edom,
+with dyed garments from Bozrah? this that is glorious, marching in the
+greatness of His strength?" To this their Deliverer answers, "I that
+_speak in righteousness_, mighty to save." The significance of this is
+at once apparent to the reader who calls to mind the various passages
+mentioned above in reference to the voice of the Lord. "I that speak in
+righteousness"--this is the voice uttered before His army (Joel 2. 10),
+"the sword that proceedeth out of His mouth" (Rev. 19. 15); the "breath
+of His mouth," by which the Man of Sin is crushed (2 Thess. 2. 8), and
+the "voice" of Psalm 29.
+
+The people, struck by the appearance of the Victor, next ask: "Wherefore
+art Thou red in Thine apparel, and Thy garments like him that treadeth
+in the winefat?" The language is doubtless symbolic. Messiah explains in
+reply how the threatening foes have been crushed: "I have trodden the
+winepress alone; and of the peoples there was no man with Me: yea, I
+trod them in Mine anger, and trampled them in My fury; and their
+lifeblood is sprinkled upon My garments, and I have stained all My
+raiment. For the day of vengeance was in Mine heart, and the year of My
+redeemed is come. And I looked, and there was none to help; and I
+wondered that there was none to uphold: therefore Mine own arm brought
+salvation unto Me; and My fury, it upheld Me. And I trod down the
+peoples in Mine anger, and made them drunk in My fury, and I poured out
+their lifeblood on the earth" (vv. 3-6). The words of a previous
+prophecy express the joyful recognition of the delivered nation: "And it
+shall be said in that day, Lo, this is our God; we have waited for Him,
+and He will save us: this is the Lord; we have waited for Him, we will
+be glad and rejoice in His salvation" (Isa. 25. 9).
+
+Turning now to Psalm 29 we find
+
+
+The Scene of Judgment
+
+strikingly depicted; the very length of the battle line is indicated, in
+agreement with the later and clearer description in Revelation 20. 14.
+Indeed, the passages which foretell the events of this coming terrible
+day afford a remarkable illustration of the progressive character of the
+revelations of Scripture. The Psalm is divided into three parts: (1)
+The first three verses are a call to the saints in Heaven, the "sons of
+the mighty," to worship the Lord in view of the judgment He is just
+about to execute for the deliverance of His people the Jews, their land
+and their city. (2) The second part, verses 3-9, describes the actual
+judgment by means of "the voice of the Lord." The psalmist was doubtless
+thinking of a thunderstorm. The Spirit of God was giving prophetic
+utterance concerning a more terrible scene, and the geographical
+limitations of the Psalm are of prophetic import. The first place
+mentioned is Lebanon, in the north, with its mountain-spur Sirion (vv.
+5, 6). The last place is the wilderness of Kadesh, in the south, the
+centre of which is Bozrah, in Edom (v. 8), a point of connection with
+Isaiah 63. 1. Now the distance from Sirion to Bozrah, in the wilderness
+of Kadesh, is 200 miles, and this is the 1600 furlongs of Revelation
+14.20. Here, then, in one fell stroke of divine wrath the Man of Sin and
+his forces are overthrown, and the Jews are delivered. The later
+revelations of Scripture thus enable us to pass from the natural and
+physical setting of the Psalm to the veiled reality. Thus this portion
+of the Psalm is to be read in connection with the passage from
+Revelation 19 quoted above. (3) The last two verses describe the results
+of the conquest.
+
+
+The Jews in their Extremity
+
+were threatened with annihilation. But man's extremity is God's
+opportunity. The people now see their Deliverer in person, they "look on
+Him whom they pierced." They realise that their enemies were destroyed
+because "the Lord sat as King at the flood." And now "the Lord sitteth
+as King for ever." He whose right it is to reign has come to Zion. Hence
+the psalmist can next say: "The Lord will give strength unto His people;
+the Lord will bless His people with peace." Armageddon is over, the
+winepress of God's wrath has been trodden, and the war against the Lamb
+is ended. Psalm 30 follows on with the people's song of praise for
+deliverance.
+
+The judgments of God in the earth will be accompanied by
+
+
+Seismic Disturbances,
+
+including "a great earthquake such as was not since there were men upon
+the earth," the overthrow of the cities of the nations, and the
+displacement of islands and mountains (Rev. 16. 18-21). Then doubtless
+will be fulfilled the prophecy of Zechariah, that in the day when the
+Lord goes forth to fight against the nations that are gathered against
+Jerusalem, His feet will stand upon the Mount of Olives, and the
+mountain will be divided, leaving a very great valley east of the city
+(Zech. 14. 1-5).
+
+
+The Everlasting Kingdom.
+
+In this tremendous intervention in the affairs of the world for the
+termination of Gentile dominion the Son of God will be accompanied by
+all His saints. He will come "to be glorified in His saints, and to be
+marvelled at in all them that believed" (2 Thess. 1. 10). So from
+earliest times Enoch had prophesied: "Behold, the Lord came with His
+holy myriads, to execute judgment upon all" (Jude 14, 15, margin). And
+Zechariah: "The Lord my God shall come, and all the saints with Thee"
+(14. 5). They are to take an active part in the inauguration of His
+Kingdom, and in its government. For "the saints of the Most High shall
+receive the Kingdom, and possess the Kingdom for ever, even for ever and
+ever" (Dan. 7. 18). "The Kingdom and the dominion, and the greatness of
+the Kingdoms under the whole Heaven, shall be given to the people of the
+saints of the Most High" (v. 27).
+
+Then shall the Lord "be King over all the earth" (Zech. 14. 9). God's
+claims will be vindicated. His Christ will reign as King of
+Righteousness, and King of Peace, the centre of His government being the
+very place where once He was despised and rejected, and men cast Him out
+and crucified Him. Of the increase of His government and of peace there
+shall be no end, upon the throne of David, and upon His Kingdom, to
+establish it, and to uphold it with judgment and with righteousness from
+henceforth even for ever. The zeal of the Lord of hosts shall perform
+this (Isa. 9. 7). His saints "shall be priests of God and of Christ, and
+shall reign with Him a thousand years" (Rev. 20. 6). Then will be
+fulfilled the words of the Lord, "I am returned unto Zion, and will
+dwell in the midst of Jerusalem: and Jerusalem shall be called the city
+of truth; and the mountain of the Lord of hosts the holy mountain"
+(Zech. 8. 3). The days of Israel's mourning will be ended, the nation
+will be a "crown of beauty in the hand of the Lord, and a royal diadem
+in the hand of her God," and Jerusalem will be a praise in the earth
+(Isa. 60. 30; 62. 3, 7). "The Heavens shall rejoice and the earth be
+glad," and "the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord, as the
+waters cover the sea" (Psa. 96. 11; Isa. 11. 9). According to God's
+Eternal Counsel the despised Nazarene will yet be manifested and
+acknowledged by all as King of Kings and Lord of Lords.
+
+              "To Him be glory for ever and ever,
+
+                             AMEN."
+
+
+
+
+INDEX.
+
+
+                               PAGE
+
+  Adrian, 62
+
+  Alaric, 37, 38
+
+  Alexander the Great, 19
+
+  Alliance of Social Democracy, 71, 63
+
+  Alsace and Lorraine, 66
+
+  Antichrist, 85, 87, 91, 96
+
+  Antiochus Epiphanes, 20, 21, 64
+
+  Antiochus the Great, 19
+
+  Armageddon, 93
+
+  Attila, 39, 40
+
+
+  Babylon, 73
+
+  Bagdad, 46, 47
+
+  Balkan Peninsula, 46, 53
+
+  Barnabas, Epistle of 32
+
+  Beast, Twofold Symbolism of, 35, 36
+
+  Britain, 23, 39, 53, 62
+
+  British Empire, 67, 68
+
+  Bulgaria, 53
+
+  Byzantine Empire, 46, 57
+
+
+  Caesar Augustus, 14, 22, 25, 37
+
+  Carthage, 16, 17, 18, 40
+
+  Chaldean Empire, 12, 55, 60
+
+  Charlemagne, 58, 60
+
+  Christendom, Reunion of, 80
+
+  Commercial System, 87
+
+  Comparisons of Symbols in Daniel and Revelation, 29
+
+  Constantine, 26
+
+  Constantinople, 26, 27, 40, 44, 45, 46, 58
+
+  Crimean War, 52
+
+  Crusades, 47
+
+  Cyprus, 53
+
+  Cyril, 33
+
+
+  Democracy, 75, 76
+
+  Diocletian, 26
+
+
+  Early Christian Writers, 32-34
+
+  Eastern Half of Empire Overthrown, 44
+
+  European Federation, 69
+
+
+  False Prophet, 84
+
+
+  Genseric, 39, 40
+
+  German Influence, 53
+
+  Germanic Tribes, 37-41, 56
+
+  Grecian Empire, 19, 63, 65
+
+  Grecian Empire Divided, 64
+
+  Greece, 19, 20, 52, 53, 65
+
+
+  Hannibal, 18
+
+  Hippolytus, 33
+
+  Hungary, 40, 49, 52, 66
+
+  Huns, 39
+
+
+  International Working Men's Association, 71
+
+  Ireland, 67
+
+  Irenaeus, 32
+
+  Iron and Clay, 25, 74
+
+
+  Jerome, 33
+
+  Jews, 22, 54, 55, 56, 62, 68
+
+  Judaea Subdued by Romans, 23
+
+  Julius Caesar, 22
+
+  Justinian, 58
+
+
+  Khaliphs, 45, 47
+
+  Kosovo, Battle of, 49
+
+
+  Lactantius, 33
+
+
+  Magnesia, Battle of, 19
+
+  Man of Sin, 85, 100
+
+  Medes and Persians, 13, 55, 60
+
+  Megiddo, 94
+
+  Mithradates, 21
+
+  Mohammed, 45, 46
+
+  Mohammed II., 49
+
+
+  Napoleon, 72
+
+  Navarino, Battle of, 52
+
+  Nebuchadnezzar, 9, 11, 75, 96
+
+  Northern Limits of Empire, 41
+
+
+  Odoacer, 41
+
+  Omar, 45
+
+  Osman, 48
+
+  Ottoman Empire, 48
+
+
+  Palestine, 20, 21, 54, 56
+
+  Papacy, 79
+
+  Parousia, The Epiphany of, 97
+
+  Psalm 29, 102
+
+  Pydna, Battle of, 20, 21
+
+
+  Roman Emperor, The Final, 67, 68, 77, 82, 89
+
+  Roman Empire--Decline of, 51
+    Extended in Final Form, 60
+    Final Destruction of, 30, 32, 60, 96
+    Still in Power at Close of Present Age, 14, 30, 56
+    Tenfold Division of, 27-34
+    Twofold Division of, 35
+
+  Roman Influence Continued, 56-58
+
+  Roumania, 52, 53
+
+
+  San Stefano Treaty, 53
+
+  Saracens, 45, 47, 55, 63
+
+  Scotland, 67
+
+  Sea Symbolic of National Unrest, 72
+
+  Serbia, 52, 53
+
+  Seventy Weeks, 88
+
+  Slavery Under the Romans, 23
+
+  Spiritism, 84
+
+  Superman, 83
+
+
+  Ten Kingdoms Foretold, 27-34
+    Not Formed in West, 42
+
+  Tertullian, 33
+
+  Theodoret, 34
+
+  Times and Seasons, 10
+
+  Titus, 40, 89
+
+  Tongrol Bek, 47
+
+  Trajan, 23
+
+  Trentino, 66
+
+  Tribulation, The, 92
+
+  Tripoli, 53
+
+  Turkish Empire, 44
+
+  Turkish Empire, Downfall of, 63
+
+  Turks, 46, 55, 63
+
+  Turks and Mohammedanism, 47, 50
+
+
+  United States, 67, 76
+
+
+  Valens, 26
+
+  Vandals, 38, 40
+
+  Valentinian, 26, 37
+
+  Voice of the Lord, The, 98, 101
+
+
+  Western Half of Empire Overthrown, 37-41
+
+  Winepress, The, 99, 104
+
+
+  Zama, Battle of, 18
+
+
+
+
+Demy 8vo, 308 pages clear type, strong dark cloth, gold title, 4/ net
+(4/6, or $1.12, post free).
+
+THE EPISTLES TO THE THESSALONIANS
+
+With Notes Exegetical and Expository.
+
+By C. F. HOGG and W. E. VINE, M.A.
+
+With Index to Subjects, Texts, and Greek Words.
+
+                *       *       *       *       *
+
+_A few out of very many favourable notices:_
+
+"The authors have seen clearly the great difference between the
+_parousia_ and the _epiphaneia_, and thus set forth, so much and so
+clearly, the great Hope of the Church."--Lord BLYTHSWOOD.
+
+"I greatly value such a book for the definiteness and prominence with
+which it unfolds the great truth of the Lord's return as a present
+hope--not a theory, nor yet a mere doctrine, but a blessed and glorious
+hope."--Sir ROBERT ANDERSON, K.C.B., LL.D., London.
+
+"The notes are brief, clear, full, and suggestive. It supplies a felt
+want between such volumes as the International Critical and the ordinary
+devotional expositions."--JAS. F. ARTHUR, Theological Tutor, B.T.I.,
+Glasgow.
+
+"These notes are admirable. The authors disclaim having written for
+scholars, but as scholars, I may say, they write for Christians, but for
+Christians as Bible students and serious ones."--GEO. F. TRENCH, B.A.,
+Dublin.
+
+"The book is one of such permanent value and wide scholarship. I hope it
+will be the first and not the last."--H. M. BLEBY, B.A., Dudley.
+
+"Should certainly find a place in the library of all Christians who
+desire to study this portion of God's Word."--L. W. G. ALEXANDER.
+
+
+PICKERING & INGLIS, 14 Paternoster Row, London, E.C.4.
+
+229 Bothwell Street, Glasgow; 75 Princes Street, Edinburgh.
+
+And through most Booksellers.
+
+                *       *       *       *       *
+
+Transcriber's note:
+
+1. The footnote at the end of page 74 reads:
+
+See "The Epistles to the Thessalonians, with Notes Exegetical and
+Expository," by C. F. Hogg and W. E. Vine, note _c._ pp. 259, 260.
+(Glasgow: Pickering & Inglis. 3/9, p.f.)
+
+
+The _c._ is unclear.
+
+
+2. The footnote at the end of page 89 reads:
+
+See "The Coming Prince," by Sir Robert Anderson. Price, 5/.
+
+
+The 5 in 5/ is unclear.
+
+
+3. Spelling, hyphenation and punctuation are left as in the original.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Roman Empire in the Light of
+Prophecy, by W. E. Vine
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROMAN EMPIRE IN LIGHT OF PROPHECY ***
+
+***** This file should be named 38721.txt or 38721.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/7/2/38721/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/38721.zip b/38721.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae0fbc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38721.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7e775e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #38721 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/38721)